Detroit Diesel DDEC VI Application And Installation

Document

ATTENTION

This document is a guideline for quali fi ed personnel. It is intended to be used by vehicle manufacturers and contains Detroit Diesel Corporation's recommendations for the ancillary systems supporting the Detroit Diesel engines covered by this document. The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for developing, designing, manufacturing and installing these systems, including component quali fi cation. The vehicle manufacturer is also responsible for furnishing vehicle users complete service and safety information for these systems. Detroit

Diesel Corporation makes no representations or warranties regarding the information contained in this document and disclaims all liability or other responsibility for the design, manufacture or installation of these ancillary systems, or the preparation or distribution to vehicle users of appropriate information regarding these systems. The information contained in this document may not be complete and is subject to change without notice.

TRADEMARK INFORMATION

DDEC®, Ether Start®, Optimized Idle®, ProDriver®, and Series 60® are registered trademarks of Detroit Diesel Corporation. Allison Transmission® is a registered trademark of General

Motors Corporation. BorgWarner® is a registered trademark of Borg-Warner Corporation. Jake

Brake® is a registered trademark of Diesel Engine Retarders, Inc. Smart Cruise® is a registered trademark of Eaton Vorad Technologies. SmartMedia® is a registered trademark of Kabushiki

Kaisha Toshiba DBA Toshiba Corporation. Viton® is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow

Elastomers L.L.C. Voith® is a registered trademark of JM Voith GmbH. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND

INSTALLATION

ABSTRACT

DDEC VI offers engine controls and an extensive range of engine and vehicle options.

The detail provided will facilitate the following:

□ The selection of features and settings, based on individual applications

□ The fabrication and installation of a vehicle interface harness, based on individual applications

□ The communication of messages & data between sensors and various electronic control modules within the installation

□ The use of industry standard tools to obtain engine data and diagnostic information, as well as to reprogram key parameters

The manual is arranged as follows:

□ The initial portion covers the installation, beginning with an overview and safety precautions, followed by hardware and wiring requirements, inputs and outputs, and available features.

□ The second portion covers communication protocol.

□ The third portion covers the tools capable of obtaining engine data and diagnostic information from the MCM and the CPC, as well as reprogramming of its key parameters.

□ The fi nal portion, the appendix, summarizes detailed information on codes and kit availability.

This manual does not cover the installation of the engine itself into various applications. For this, the reader should refer to the speci fi c engine application and installation manual.

This manual is intended for those with an electrical background. A simple installation may require a basic understanding of electrical circuits while a more comprehensive electrical/electronics background is required to access all the capability of the DDEC VI.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

ABSTRACT ii

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...................................................................................................

STANDS ..........................................................................................................................

GLASSES .......................................................................................................................

WELDING .......................................................................................................................

WORK PLACE ...............................................................................................................

CLOTHING ......................................................................................................................

ELECTRIC TOOLS .........................................................................................................

AIR ..................................................................................................................................

DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS .....................................................................................................

FLUIDS AND PRESSURE ..............................................................................................

2.10

BATTERIES ....................................................................................................................

2.11

FIRE ................................................................................................................................

2.12

PAINT ..............................................................................................................................

2.13

FLUOROELASTOMER ...................................................................................................

3.1

3.1.1

HARDWARE AND WIRING ................................................................................................

MOTOR CONTROL MODULE .......................................................................................

ENGINE HARNESS ....................................................................................................

3.1.2

3-1

3-3

MCM 120–PIN CONNECTOR FOR SERIES 60 ENGINES .................................

MCM 120–PIN CONNECTOR FOR MBE 900 ENGINES ....................................

MCM 120–PIN CONNECTOR FOR MBE 4000 ENGINES ..................................

CONNECTOR BRACKETS ..................................................................................

MCM 21–PIN AND 31–PIN CONNECTORS ........................................................

DPF HARNESS ..........................................................................................................

3-20

DPF HARNESS – VERTICAL MOUNT ATD (31-PIN TO 10 PIN CONNECTOR)

DPF HARNESS – HORIZONTAL MOUNT ATD (31-PIN TO 10-PIN

3-22

3.2

3.2.1

CONNECTOR/2-PIN CONNECTOR) ...................................................................

COMMON POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER ...................................................................

3-24

3-27

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................

3-29

TEMPERATURE ...................................................................................................

3-29

3.2.2

3.2.3

WATER INTRUSION ............................................................................................

3-29

CPC VEHICLE INTERFACE HARNESS ....................................................................

3-30

FREQUENCY INPUT ...........................................................................................

DIGITAL INPUTS ..................................................................................................

3-31

3-32

DIGITAL OUTPUTS ..............................................................................................

3-32

VIH WIRING ...............................................................................................................

3-34

TRUCK APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................

VOCATIONAL APPLICATIONS ............................................................................

3-34

3-38

COACH APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................

FIRE TRUCK APPLICATIONS .............................................................................

CRANE APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................

TRANSIT BUS APPLICATIONS ...........................................................................

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.2.4

3.2.5

3.2.6

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.2

3.3.3

3.3.4

3.3.5

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.6.1

3.6.2

3.6.3

3.6.4

3.6.5

3.6.6

3.7

3.7.1

3.7.2

3.7.3

VIH TO MCM CONNECTOR WIRING ..................................................................

VIH POWER WIRING ...........................................................................................

WIRE RESISTANCES ..........................................................................................

COMMUNICATIONS – SAE J1939 DATA LINK ...................................................

3-58

3-61

3-63

COMMUNICATIONS – PROPRIETARY ENGINE-CAN DATA LINK ....................

3-65

POWER SUPPLY – 12 VOLT SYSTEM .....................................................................

3-65

AVERAGE CURRENT DRAW ..............................................................................

BATTERY ISOLATOR ...........................................................................................

3-66

MAIN POWER SHUTDOWN ................................................................................

3-67

FUSES ........................................................................................................................

3-68

CONNECTORS ..........................................................................................................

3-70

DATA LINK CONNECTOR ....................................................................................

3-72

WIRES AND WIRING .....................................................................................................

3-73

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................

3-73

GENERAL WIRE .......................................................................................................

3-73

CRIMP TOOLS ...........................................................................................................

3-74

DEUTSCH TERMINAL INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL ..........................................

3-74

DEUTSCH TERMINAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ........................................

3-74

DEUTSCH TERMINAL REMOVAL .......................................................................

3-76

SPLICING GUIDELINES ............................................................................................

3-78

CLIPPED AND SOLDERED SPLICING METHOD ...............................................

SPLICING AND REPAIRING STRAIGHT LEADS-ALTERNATE METHOD 1 ......

SPLICING AND REPAIRING STRAIGHT LEADS - ALTERNATE METHOD 2 ....

SHRINK WRAP ....................................................................................................

STAGGERING WIRE SPLICES ...........................................................................

CONDUIT AND LOOM ....................................................................................................

TAPE AND TAPING ........................................................................................................

SENSORS .......................................................................................................................

FACTORY-INSTALLED SENSORS ............................................................................

3-92

OEM-INSTALLED SENSORS ...................................................................................

3-94

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR .................................................................

3-95

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSTALLATION .................................

3-96

ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR .......................................................................

3-97

TURBO COMPRESSOR IN TEMPERATURE SENSOR ........................................... 3-101

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ....................................................................................... 3-102

MAGNETIC PICKUP ............................................................................................

3-103

SAE J1939 DATA LINK .........................................................................................

3-105

VSS ANTI-TAMPER .............................................................................................

3-105

LAMPS ............................................................................................................................

3-107

AMBER WARNING LAMP .......................................................................................... 3-107

AWL AND PASSMART .........................................................................................

3-107

AMBER WARNING LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES .......................

3-107

WIRING REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................

3-108

RED STOP LAMP ....................................................................................................... 3-108

RED STOP LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ...................................

3-109

RED STOP LAMP WIRING ..................................................................................

3-109

DPF REGENERATION LAMP ...................................................................................

3-110

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7.4

3.7.5

3.7.6

3.7.7

3.7.8

DPF REGENERATION LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES .................

3-110

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-110

HIGH EXHAUST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE LAMP ..................................................

3-111

HIGH EXHAUST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND

GUIDELINES ........................................................................................................

3-111

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-111

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ...........................................................................

3-112

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES .......

3-112

LOW OIL PRESSURE LAMP .....................................................................................

3-113

REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES .................................................................

3-113

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-113

CRUISE ACTIVE LAMP .............................................................................................

3-114

CRUISE ACTIVE LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ..........................

3-114

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-114

DECELERATION LAMP .............................................................................................

3-115

DECELERATION LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ..........................

3-115

3.7.9

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-115

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE LAMP ..............................................................................

3-116

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ...........

3-116

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-116

3.7.10

LOW COOLANT LEVEL LAMP ..................................................................................

3-117

LOW COOLANT LEVEL LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ...............

3-117

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-117

3.7.11

OPTIMIZED IDLE ACTIVE LAMP ..............................................................................

3-118

OPTIMIZED IDLE ACTIVE LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ...........

3-118

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-118

3.7.12

WAIT TO START LAMP ..............................................................................................

3-119

WAIT TO START LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ..........................

3-119

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-119

3.7.13

AGS2 BACKUP LAMP ................................................................................................ 3-120

AGS2 BACKUP LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ............................

3-120

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-120

3.7.14

AGS2 CHECK TRANS LAMP ..................................................................................... 3-121

AGS2 CHECK TRANS LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES .................

3-121

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-121

3.7.15

AGS2 TRANS TEMP LAMP ....................................................................................... 3-122

AGS2 TRANS TEMP LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES ....................

3-122

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

3-122

4.1

4.1.1

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ....................................................................................................

INPUTS ...........................................................................................................................

4.1.2

AIR CONDITION STATUS ..........................................................................................

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

ABS ACTIVE ...............................................................................................................

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.1.3

4.1.4

4.1.5

4.1.6

4.1.7

AUXILIARY SHUTDOWN #1 ......................................................................................

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

CLUTCH SWITCH ......................................................................................................

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF SWITCH ......................................................................

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

CRUISE CONTROL RESUME/ACCEL SWITCH AND SET/COAST SWITCH ..........

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

DIAGNOSTICS .....................................................................................................

4-9

DIAGNOSTIC REQUEST SWITCH ............................................................................

4-10

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4.1.8

4.1.9

DUAL-SPEED AXLE SWITCH ...................................................................................

4-11

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-11

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-11

ENGINE BRAKE DISABLE .........................................................................................

4-12

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-12

4.1.10

ENGINE BRAKE LOW & MEDIUM .............................................................................

4-13

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-13

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-13

4.1.11

FAN OVERRIDE .........................................................................................................

4-13

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-13

4.1.12

FAST ENGINE HEAT UP SWITCH ............................................................................

4-14

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-14

4.1.13

IDLE VALIDATION 1 & IDLE VALIDATION 2 ..............................................................

4-15

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-15

4.1.14

LIMITERS FOR TORQUE, ENGINE SPEED, AND VEHICLE SPEED .....................

4-15

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-15

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-15

4.1.15

OPTIMIZED IDLE HOOD TILT SWITCH ....................................................................

4-16

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-16

4.1.16

OPTIMIZED IDLE THERMOSTAT ..............................................................................

4-17

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-17

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-17

4.1.17

PARK BRAKE SWITCH ..............................................................................................

4-18

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

4-18

4.1.18

REGEN SWITCH ........................................................................................................

4-19

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-19

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-19

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.19

REMOTE THROTTLE SELECT SWITCH ..................................................................

4-20

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-20

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

4-20

4.1.20

REMOTE PTO SWITCH .............................................................................................

4-20

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-20

4.1.21

RPM FREEZE .............................................................................................................

4-21

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

4-21

4.1.22

SERVICE BRAKE RELEASED SWITCH ...................................................................

4-22

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-22

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

4-22

4.1.23

STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE ......................................................................................

4-23

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................

4-23

4.1.24

THROTTLE INHIBIT ...................................................................................................

4-24

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-24

4.2

4.3

4.1.25

TRANSMISSION NEUTRAL SWITCH .......................................................................

4-24

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-24

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

4-24

4.1.26

TRANSMISSION RETARDER ACTIVE ......................................................................

4-25

4.3.1

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

SWITCH INPUTS RECEIVED OVER J1939 DATA LINK ...............................................

DIGITAL OUTPUTS – CPC .............................................................................................

4-25

4-27

4-29

4.3.2

AGS2 BACKUP LAMP ................................................................................................

4-30

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-30

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-30

AGS2 CHECK TRANS LAMP .....................................................................................

4-31

4.3.3

4.3.4

4.3.5

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-31

AGS2 TRANS TEMP LAMP .......................................................................................

4-32

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-32

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-32

AMBER WARNING LAMP ..........................................................................................

4-32

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-32

CRUISE ACTIVE LAMP .............................................................................................

4-33

4.3.6

4.3.7

4.3.8

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ....................................

4-33

DECELERATION LAMP ............................................................................................

4-34

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-34

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-34

DPF REGENERATION LAMP (HARDWIRED AND J1939) .......................................

4-35

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-35

ENGINE BRAKE ACTIVE ...........................................................................................

4-36

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-36

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-36

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS viii

4.3.9

ETHER START ...........................................................................................................

4-37

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-37

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

4-37

4.3.10

HIGH EXHAUST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE LAMP (HARDWIRED AND J1939) .....

4-38

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ....................................

4-38

4.3.11

LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE LAMP ..............................................................................

4-39

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-39

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-39

4.3.12

LOW COOLANT LEVEL LAMP ..................................................................................

4-40

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-40

4.3.13

LOW OIL PRESSURE LAMP .....................................................................................

4-41

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-41

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-41

4.3.14

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) .................................................................

4-41

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-41

4.3.15

OPTIMIZED IDLE ACTIVE LAMP ..............................................................................

4-42

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-42

DIAGNOSTICS .....................................................................................................

4-42

4.3.16

OPTIMIZED IDLE ALARM ..........................................................................................

4-43

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-43

DIAGNOSTICS .....................................................................................................

4-43

4.3.17

RED STOP LAMP .......................................................................................................

4-44

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-44

4.3.18

STARTER LOCKOUT .................................................................................................

4-44

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-44

4.3.19

TOP2 SHIFT SOLENOID ...........................................................................................

4-45

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-45

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

DIAGNOSTICS .....................................................................................................

4-45

4.3.20

TOP2 SHIFT LOCKOUT SOLENOID .........................................................................

4-46

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-46

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

DIAGNOSTICS .....................................................................................................

4-46

4.3.21

VEHICLE POWER SHUTDOWN ................................................................................

4-47

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

4-47

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-47

4.3.22

WAIT TO START LAMP ..............................................................................................

4-48

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-48

4.4

4.4.1

4.4.2

ANALOG OUTPUTS – CPC ...........................................................................................

PIN 3/05 – ANALOG OUTPUT ...................................................................................

PIN 3/06 – ANALOG OUTPUT ...................................................................................

4-49

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.5

4.5.1

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

PWM OUTPUT — CPC ..................................................................................................

4-50

4-51

PWM OUTPUT — PIN 4/12 PWM SELECTION ........................................................

4-51

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

4-51

5.1

5.1.1

FEATURES .........................................................................................................................

ACCELERATION LIMITER .............................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5.2

5.2.1

COLD START – MBE900 AND MBE4000 .......................................................................

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

INITIALIZATION ....................................................................................................

PREHEATING STATE ...........................................................................................

WAITING FOR ENGINE START ..........................................................................

ENGINE START ..................................................................................................

5.2.2

5.2.3

5.2.4

5.3

5.3.1

POST-HEATING STATE .......................................................................................

COOLING OFF .....................................................................................................

OFF .......................................................................................................................

INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

DIAGNOSTICS ...........................................................................................................

CRUISE CONTROL ........................................................................................................

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5.3.2

5.3.3

5.3.4

5.4

5.4.1

ENGINE BRAKES IN CRUISE CONTROL (OPTIONAL) .....................................

CRUISE AUTO RESUME (OPTIONAL) ...............................................................

ADAPTIVE CRUISE (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................

CRUISE ENABLE .................................................................................................

SET / COAST ......................................................................................................

RESUME / ACCEL ..............................................................................................

CLUTCH RELEASED (MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS) ..........................................

SERVICE BRAKE RELEASED (AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL TRANSMIS-

SIONS) .................................................................................................................

5-11

INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................

5-11

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-13

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................

5-14

DIAGNOSTICS ...............................................................................................................

5-15

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-15

FLASHING FAULT CODES WITH AWL / SEL .....................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS & FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

5.5

5.5.1

5.5.2

5.5.3

5.6

5.6.1

DUAL SPEED AXLE ......................................................................................................

5-19

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-19

INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................

5-19

PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY & REQUIREMENTS ................................................

5-19

ENGINE BRAKE CONTROLS – MBE900 AND MBE4000 .............................................

5-21

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-21

CRUISE CONTROL OR ROAD SPEED LIMIT WITH ENGINE BRAKE .............

SERVICE BRAKE CONTROL OF ENGINE BRAKES ..........................................

ENGINE BRAKE ACTIVE .....................................................................................

5-22

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.6.2

5.6.3

5.7

5.7.1

ENGINE BRAKE DISABLE ...................................................................................

ENGINE FAN BRAKING .......................................................................................

CLUTCH RELEASED INPUT ...............................................................................

MIN VEHICLE SPEED FOR ENGINE BRAKES ...................................................

5-22

5-23

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-23

CONFIGURATION FOR MBE900 EXHAUST FLAP APPLICATIONS ..................

5-23

CONFIGURATION FOR MBE900 COMPRESSION BRAKE ONLY

APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................

5-26

CONFIGURATION FOR MBE900 COMPRESSION AND EXHAUST BRAKE

APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................

5-29

CONFIGURATION FOR MBE4000 COMPRESSION BRAKE AND BRAKE GATE

APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................

CRUISE CONTROL OF ENGINE BRAKE OPTION ............................................

ENGINE BRAKE OPTION WITH SERVICE BRAKE ............................................

ENGINE BRAKES OPTION WITH MINIMUM VEHICLE SPEED .........................

5-32

5-35

5-36

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................

5-36

ENGINE BRAKE CONTROLS – SERIES 60 ..................................................................

5-37

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-37

SERVICE BRAKE CONTROL OF ENGINE BRAKES ..........................................

CRUISE CONTROL OR ROAD SPEED LIMIT WITH ENGINE BRAKE .............

5-37

5-38

5.7.2

5.7.3

5.7.4

5.8

5.8.1

5.8.2

5.8.3

5.9

5.9.1

ENGINE BRAKE DISABLE ...................................................................................

ENGINE BRAKE ACTIVE .....................................................................................

ENGINE FAN BRAKING .......................................................................................

CLUTCH RELEASED INPUT ...............................................................................

MIN VEHICLE SPEED FOR ENGINE BRAKES ...................................................

INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ..........................................

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................

ENGINE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................

5-45

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-45

WARNING ............................................................................................................

SHUTDOWN .........................................................................................................

5-46

STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE OPTION .........................................................................

PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY ..................................................................................

ENGINE STARTER CONTROL ......................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5.10

ETHER STARTING – SERIES 60 ...................................................................................

5.11

FAN CONTROL ...............................................................................................................

5-51

5-53

5.11.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-53

5.11.2

SINGLE–SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 4) .........................................................................

5-54

SINGLE-SPEED FAN INSTALLATION .................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-54

5-55

5.11.3

SINGLE–SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 7) .........................................................................

5-57

SINGLE-SPEED FAN INSTALLATION .................................................................

5-57

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-58

5.11.4

DUAL FANS (FAN TYPE 6) ........................................................................................

5-60

DUAL FANS INSTALLATION ................................................................................

5-61

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-62

5.11.5

TWO-SPEED FAN ......................................................................................................

5-64

TWO-SPEED FAN INSTALLATION ......................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-65

5-66

5.11.6

VARIABLE SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 3) WITHOUT FAN SPEED FEEDBACK ..........

5-68

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

5-69

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-70

5.11.7

VARIABLE SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 2) WITH FAN SPEED FEEDBACK ..................

5-72

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-73

5-74

5.12

FLEET MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................................

5-77

5.12.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-77

5.12.2

DDEC DATA ...............................................................................................................

5-77

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-78

5.12.3

DDEC REPORTS .......................................................................................................

5-79

5.13

FUEL ECONOMY INCENTIVE .......................................................................................

5-85

5.13.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-85

5.13.2

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-86

5.13.3

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES. ...............................................................

5-86

5.14

IDLE ADJUST .................................................................................................................

5-87

5.14.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-87

5.14.2

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-88

5.15

IDLE SHUTDOWN TIMER AND PTO SHUTDOWN .......................................................

5-89

5.15.1

OPERATION — IDLE SHUTDOWN NON-PTO MODE ..............................................

5-89

5.15.2

OPERATION — PTO SHUTDOWN ............................................................................

5-90

5.15.3

IDLE SHUTDOWN TIMER AND PTO SHUTDOWN OPTIONS .................................

5-90

IDLE / PTO SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE .................................................................

IDLE SHUTDOWN WITH AMBIENT AIR TEMP ..................................................

5-90

5-91

IDLE SHUTDOWN WITH AMBIENT AIR TEMP CONTINUOUS OVERRIDE .....

VEHICLE POWER SHUTDOWN ..........................................................................

5-92

5-93

MAXIMUM ENGINE LOAD SHUTDOWN .............................................................

5-93

5.15.4

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-94

5.16

LIMITERS ........................................................................................................................

5-97

5.16.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-97

5.16.2

INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................

5-98

5.16.3

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-99

5.17

LOW GEAR TORQUE REDUCTION ..............................................................................

5-101

5.17.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-101

EXAMPLE 1 – ONE TORQUE LIMIT ...................................................................

5-101

EXAMPLE 2 – TWO TORQUE LIMITS ................................................................

5-102

5.17.2

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ........................................... 5-103

5.18

OPTIMIZED IDLE ............................................................................................................

5-105

5.18.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-105

OPTIMIZED IDLE START UP SEQUENCE .........................................................

5-106

ENGINE MODE ....................................................................................................

5-106

THERMOSTAT MODE ..........................................................................................

5-108

5.18.2

INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 5-108

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.18.3

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-110

5.18.4

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................

5-111

5.19

PARKED REGENERATION ............................................................................................

5-113

5.19.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-113

5.19.2

DPF PARKED (STATIONARY) REGENERATION ONLY ...........................................

5-113

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-115

5.20

PASSMART .....................................................................................................................

5-117

5.20.1

OPERATION ...............................................................................................................

5-117

5.20.2

INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................................

5-118

5.20.3

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ...........................................

5-119

5.20.4

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................

5-119

5.21

PASSWORDS .................................................................................................................

5-121

5.21.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-121

BACK DOOR PASSWORD ..................................................................................

5-122

CHANGING THE PASSWORD ............................................................................

5-122

5.22

PROGRESSIVE SHIFT ...................................................................................................

5-123

5.22.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-123

5.22.2

LOW RANGE #1 ......................................................................................................... 5-124

5.22.3

LOW RANGE #2 ......................................................................................................... 5-124

5.22.4

HIGH RANGE ............................................................................................................. 5-125

5.22.5

INSTALLATION INFORMATION ................................................................................. 5-127

5.22.6

PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY .................................................................................. 5-127

5.22.7

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................ 5-128

5.23

STARTER LOCKOUT .....................................................................................................

5-129

5.23.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-129

5.23.2

INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 5-130

5.23.3

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ........................................... 5-130

5.24

TACHOMETER DRIVE ...................................................................................................

5-131

5.24.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-131

5.25

THROTTLE CONTROL/GOVERNORS ..........................................................................

5-133

5.25.1

AUTOMOTIVE LIMITING SPEED GOVERNOR - ON-HIGHWAY .............................. 5-133

ALSG ACCELERATOR PEDAL ............................................................................

5-133

ALSG ACCELERATOR PEDAL INSTALLATION ..................................................

5-133

ALSG ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY DIAGNOSTICS ..............................

5-134

5.25.2

POWER TAKE-OFF .................................................................................................... 5-134

CAB PTO – CRUISE SWITCH PTO .....................................................................

5-136

CRUISE SWITCH PTO PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENT AND FLEXIBILITY .

5-138

5.25.3

REMOTE PTO — PREPROGRAMMED SET SPEEDS ............................................. 5-140

PULSED INPUT USING PIN 2/9 ..........................................................................

5-141

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

5-142

GRAY CODED USING PINS 2/9, 1/11, 2/11 AND BINARY CODED ....................

5-143

INSTALLATION FOR GRAY CODED OR BINARY INPUT ...................................

5-143

REMOTE PTO PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENT AND FLEXIBILITY ...............

5-144

REMOTE ACCELERATOR CONTROL FOR PTO OR ALSG ..............................

5-146

REMOTE ACCELERATOR CONTROL EXAMPLE ..............................................

5-146

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

5-147

5.25.4

RPM FREEZEE .......................................................................................................... 5-147

xii

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.26

TRANSMISSION INTERFACE ........................................................................................

5-149

5.26.1

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS ...................................................................................... 5-149

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-149

5.26.2

MERCEDES AGS2 TRANSMISSION ........................................................................ 5-149

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

5-150

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-152

5.26.3

EATON TOP2 OPERATION ....................................................................................... 5-153

INSTALLATION .....................................................................................................

5-153

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-153

DIAGNOSTICS .....................................................................................................

5-154

5.26.4

EATON ULTRASHIFT TRANSMISSION .................................................................... 5-155

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-155

5.26.5

EATON ULTRASHIFT ASW TRANSMISSION ........................................................... 5-156

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-156

5.26.6

EATON AUTOSHIFT TRANSMISSION ...................................................................... 5-157

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-157

5.26.7

ZF ASTRONIC TRANSMISSION ............................................................................... 5-158

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-158

5.26.8

ALLISON TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................ 5-159

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY .....................................

5-159

5.27

VEHICLE SPEED LIMITING ...........................................................................................

5-161

5.27.1

OPERATION ............................................................................................................... 5-161

5.27.2

INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 5-161

5.27.3

PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY ........................................... 5-161

5.27.4

INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES ................................................................ 5-162

5.28

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ANTI-TAMPERING ............................................................

5-163

5.28.1

PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY .................................................................................. 5-163

6.1

6.2

6.2.1

6.2.2

6.2.3

6.3

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS ......................................................................................

OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................

SAE J1587 DATA LINK ...................................................................................................

MESSAGE FORMAT ..................................................................................................

6.3.1

SAE J1708/J1587 MESSAGE PRIORITY ..................................................................

SAE J1587 PIDS REQUIRING ACTION ....................................................................

DATA REQUEST ..................................................................................................

COMPONENT SPECIFIC REQUEST ..................................................................

J1587 OUTPUTS - SINGLE BYTE PARAMETERS .............................................

DOUBLE BYTE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................

VARIABLE LENGTH PARAMETERS ...................................................................

SAE J1939 MESSAGES AND MESSAGE FORMAT ......................................................

SAE J1939 SUPPORTED MESSAGES .....................................................................

6-29

ACC1 – ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL .............................................................

ACK/NACK – ACKNOWLEDGE / NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE .........................

AMB – AMBIENT CONDITIONS ..........................................................................

ATI2 - AFTERTREATMENT INTAKE GAS 2 ........................................................

ATO2 - AFTERTREATMENT OUTLET GAS 2 .....................................................

CCSS – CRUISE CONTROL / VEHICLE SPEED SETUP ...................................

6-30

6-31

6-32

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CCVS – CRUISE CONTROL / VEHICLE SPEED ................................................

CI – COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION .................................................................

CM1 – CAB MESSAGE1 ......................................................................................

DM1 – ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES ..............................................

DM2 – PREVIOUSLY ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES ......................

DM3 - DIAGNOSTIC DATA CLEAR/RESET OF PREVIOUSLY ACTIVE DTCS .

DM11 — DIAGNOSTIC DATA CLEAR/RESET FOR ACTIVE DTCS ...................

DM13 — STOP START BROADCAST ................................................................

EBC1 -- ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROLLER #1 .............................................

EBC2 – WHEEL SPEED INFORMATION ...........................................................

EC – ENGINE CONFIGURATION ........................................................................

EEC1 -- ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLLER #1 ...........................................

EEC2 -- ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLLER #2 ..........................................

EEC3 -- ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLLER #3 ...........................................

EEC4 – ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLLER #4 ............................................

EFL/P1 – ENGINE FLUID LEVEL/PRESSURE1 ..................................................

EFL/P2 – ENGINE FLUID LEVEL/PRESSURE #2 ...............................................

ERC1 - ELECTRONIC RETARDER CONTROLLER #1 .......................................

ET1 – ENGINE TEMPERATURE #1 ....................................................................

ET2 – ENGINE TEMPERATURE #2 ....................................................................

ETC1 -- ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER #1 ..............................

ETC2 -- ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER #2 .............................

ETC7 – ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER 7 ................................

FD – FAN DRIVE ..................................................................................................

HOURS – ENGINE HOURS, REVOLUTIONS .....................................................

IC1 – INLET/EXHAUST CONDITIONS #1 ...........................................................

IO — IDLE OPERATION ......................................................................................

LFC – FUEL CONSUMPTION (LIQUID) ..............................................................

LFE – FUEL ECONOMY (LIQUID) .......................................................................

PTC1 – PARTICULATE TRAP CONTROL 1 ........................................................

PTO – POWER TAKEOFF INFORMATION ..........................................................

RC – RETARDER CONFIGURATION ..................................................................

REQUESTS ..........................................................................................................

SHUTDOWN — IDLE SHUTDOWN .....................................................................

SOFT – SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION ...............................................................

TC — TURBOCHARGER .....................................................................................

TCFG2 — TRANSMISSION CONFIGURATION ..................................................

TCO1 — TACHOGRAPH .....................................................................................

TD — TIME/DATE ................................................................................................

TSC1 — TORQUE SPEED CONTROL ................................................................

VD — VEHICLE DISTANCE .................................................................................

VDHR – HIGH RESOLUTION VEHICLE DISTANCE ...........................................

VEP – VEHICLE ELECTRICAL POWER .............................................................

VH — VEHICLE HOURS ......................................................................................

VI – VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ..........................................................................

APPENDIX A: HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS ..........................................................................

xiv

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

APPENDIX B: ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................................

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST ...............................................................................................

B-1

C-1

INDEX ............................................................................................................................................ INDEX-1

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS xvi

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

LIST OF FIGURES

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Figure 3-1 Motor Control Module ........................................................................................

Figure 3-2 Series 60 Engine 120–pin Connector and 21–pin Connector Tie-wrapped to

Figure 3-3

Figure 3-6

Figure 3-7

Figure 3-8 CPC Dimensions ...............................................................................................

Figure 3-9 NAFTA Architecture On-highway ......................................................................

Figure 3-10

Figure 3-11

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-15

Figure 3-16 Locking Terminal Into Connector .......................................................................

Figure 3-17 Removal Tool Position .......................................................................................

Figure 3-18

Figure 3-19

Figure 3-22

Figure 3-23

Figure 3-24 The Correct and Incorrect Method of Staggering Multiple Splices ....................

Figure 3-25 Sensor Location for the DOC and DPF .............................................................

Figure 3-26

Figure 3-27

Brackets ...........................................................................................................

Aftertreatment Device .......................................................................................

Figure 3-4 Typical Mounting Views of an Aftertreatment Device ........................................

Figure 3-5 Vertical and Under Step Mount ATD Wiring — OEM Responsibility .................

Horizontal Mount ATD Wiring — OEM Responsibility .......................................

The Common Powertrain Controller ..................................................................

Vehicle Interface Harness .................................................................................

Power Wiring ....................................................................................................

Figure 3-12 Main Power Supply Shutdown ..........................................................................

Figure 3-13 Wiring for 9-pin Data Link Connector ................................................................

Setting Wire Gage Selector and Positioning the Contact ..................................

Pushing Contact Into Grommet ........................................................................

Removal Tool Insertion ......................................................................................

Positioning the Leads ........................................................................................

Figure 3-20 Securing the Leads With a Clip .........................................................................

Figure 3-21 Recommended Strain Relief of Spliced Joint ....................................................

Splicing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 1 ....................................................

Splicing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 2 ....................................................

Ambient Air Temperatures Sensor Dimensions ................................................

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Installation ....................................................

Figure 3-28 Engine Coolant Level Sensor Speci fi cations ....................................................

Figure 3-29 Engine Coolant Level Sensor Installation for CPC ............................................

3-3

3-20

Figure 3-30 Engine Coolant Level Sensor Location - Top of Radiator Tank .........................

3-99

Figure 3-31 Turbo Compressor In Temperature Sensor .......................................................

3-101

Figure 3-32 Turbo Compressor In Temperature Sensor Installation ....................................

3-102

Figure 3-33 Vehicle Speed Sensor .......................................................................................

3-102

Figure 3-34 Magnetic Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation – CPC .........................................

3-104

Figure 3-35 Amber Warning Lamp Wiring ............................................................................

3-108

Figure 3-36 Red Stop Lamp Wiring ......................................................................................

3-109

Figure 5-1 Grid Heater – MBE4000 ....................................................................................

5-6

Figure 5-2 Grid Heater – MBE900 ......................................................................................

Figure 5-3 Grid Heater – Heavy-duty Engine .....................................................................

5-7

Figure 5-4 Cruise Control Circuit ........................................................................................

Figure 5-5 Flashing Fault Codes ........................................................................................

Figure 5-6 Exhaust Flap Only – MBE900 ...........................................................................

5-12

5-17

5-25

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Figure 5-7

Figure 5-8

Compression Brake Only – MBE900 ................................................................

Compression Brake and Exhaust Flap – MBE900 ............................................

Figure 5-9 Compression Brake and Brake Grate – MBE4000 ...........................................

Figure 5-10 Engine Brake for DDEC VI – Series 60 .............................................................

Figure 5-11 Key Switch Starter Control ................................................................................

Figure 5-12 MCM Starter Control .........................................................................................

Figure 5-13 Single-speed Fan – Fan Type 4 ........................................................................

Figure 5-14 Single-speed Fan – Fan Type 7 ........................................................................

Figure 5-15 Dual Fan (Fan Type 6) ......................................................................................

Figure 5-16 Two-speed Fan ( Fan type 0 or 1) .....................................................................

Figure 5-17 Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed Feedback (Fan Type 3) .....................

Figure 5-18 Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback (Fan Type 2) ..........................

Figure 5-19 DDEC Reports, Trip Activity Report ..................................................................

Figure 5-20 DDEC Reports, Daily Engine Usage .................................................................

Figure 5-21 DDEC Reports, Engine Load/RPM ...................................................................

Figure 5-22 DDEC Reports, Vehicle Speed/RPM ................................................................

Figure 5-23 Park Brake Digital Input ....................................................................................

Figure 5-24 Ambient Air Temperature Override ....................................................................

5-90

5-91

Figure 5-25 Vehicle Power Shutdown Relay ........................................................................

5-93

Figure 5-26 Optimized Idle System .....................................................................................

5-109

Figure 5-27 Progressive Shift Chart - Represents Default ...................................................

5-124

Figure 5-28 Progressive Shift Corrects Problem with High and Low Gears Modi fi ed ..........

5-126

Figure 5-29 Starter Lockout ..................................................................................................

5-130

Figure 5-30 Tachometer Drive Installation ............................................................................

5-131

Figure 5-31 Accelerator Pedal Installation ............................................................................

5-134

Figure 5-32 PTO Logic .........................................................................................................

5-135

Figure 5-33 Cab PTO Mode .................................................................................................

5-136

Figure 5-34 Remote PTO Mode – Pulsed Input Using Pin 2/9 .............................................

5-142

Figure 5-35 Remote PTO Switch ..........................................................................................

5-142

Figure 5-36 Remote PTO Gray Coded or Binary Input ........................................................

5-143

Figure 5-37 Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG .................................................

5-147

Figure 5-38 AGS2 Transmission Interface to CPC/MCM – Non-multiplexed .......................

5-150

Figure 5-39 AGS2 Transmission Interface to CPC/MCM – Multiplexed ...............................

5-150

Figure 5-40 Top2 Transmission ............................................................................................

xviii

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

LIST OF TABLES

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Table 2-1

Table 3-1

Table 3-2

Table 3-3

Table 3-4

Table 3-5

Table 3-6

Table 3-7

The Correct Type of Fire Extinguisher ...............................................................

MCM Connector – Series 60 (1 of 4) .................................................................

MCM Connector – Series 60 (2 of 4) .................................................................

MCM Connector – Series 60 (3 of 4) .................................................................

MCM Connector – Series 60 (4 of 4) .................................................................

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (1 of 4) – C Sample .............................................

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (2 of 4) – C Sample .............................................

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (3 of 4) – C Sample .............................................

Table 3-8

Table 3-9

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (4 of 4) – C Sample .............................................

MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (1 of 4) – C Sample ...........................................

Table 3-10 MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (2 of 4) – C Sample ...........................................

Table 3-11 MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (3 of 4) – C Sample ...........................................

Table 3-12 MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (4 of 4) – C Sample ...........................................

Table 3-13 21–Pin Connector to the MCM ..........................................................................

Table 3-14 21–Pin Connector to the MCM Part Numbers ...................................................

Table 3-15 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector Part Numbers ..................................................

Table 3-16 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector ..........................................................................

Table 3-17 DPF 10–pin Connector ......................................................................................

Table 3-18 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin Connector ...........................................

Table 3-19 DPF 10–pin Connector and 2–pin Connector — Horizontal Mount ATD ...........

Table 3-20 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin and 2–pin Connector — Horizontal

Mount ATD .......................................................................................................

Table 3-21 Variable Reluctance Signal Interface ................................................................

Table 3-22 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Truck Application .........................................

Table 3-23 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-24 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Truck Application .........................................

Table 3-25 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

Table 3-26 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Truck Application .........................................

Table 3-27 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ...........................................................

Table 3-28 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Truck Application .........................................

Table 3-29 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ...........................................................

Table 3-30 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications ................................

Table 3-31 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-32 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications ................................

Table 3-33 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

Table 3-34 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications ................................

Table 3-35 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ...........................................................

Table 3-36 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications ................................

Table 3-37 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ...........................................................

Table 3-38 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Coach Application ........................................

Table 3-39 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-40 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Coach Application ........................................

Table 3-41 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

3-37

3-38

3-39

3-40

3-25

3-31

3-34

3-35

3-36

3-41

3-42

3-43

3-17

3-18

2-6

3-23

3-25

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table 3-42 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Coach Application ........................................

Table 3-43 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ...........................................................

Table 3-44 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Coach Application ........................................

Table 3-45 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ...........................................................

Table 3-46 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application ..................................

Table 3-47 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-48 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application ..................................

Table 3-49 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

Table 3-50 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application ..................................

Table 3-51 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ...........................................................

Table 3-52 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application ..................................

Table 3-53 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ...........................................................

Table 3-54 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Crane Application .........................................

Table 3-55 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-56 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Crane Application .........................................

Table 3-57 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

Table 3-58 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Crane Application .........................................

Table 3-59 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ...........................................................

Table 3-60 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Crane Application .........................................

Table 3-61 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ...........................................................

Table 3-62 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application ................................

Table 3-63 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-64 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application ................................

Table 3-65 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

Table 3-66 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application ................................

Table 3-67 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ...........................................................

Table 3-68 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application ................................

Table 3-69 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ...........................................................

Table 3-70 21–Pin Connector to the MCM ..........................................................................

Table 3-71 21–Pin Connector to the MCM Part Numbers ...................................................

Table 3-72 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector Part Numbers ..................................................

Table 3-73 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector ..........................................................................

Table 3-74 Wire Characteristics ..........................................................................................

Table 3-75 J1939 CPC to VIH Connector Pin Assignments ................................................

Table 3-76 Propriety Engine-CAN Data Link .......................................................................

Table 3-77 Maximum Average Current Draw ......................................................................

Table 3-78 Current Draw for CPC Con fi guration .................................................................

Table 3-79 Current Draw for MCM Con fi guration ................................................................

Table 3-80 Fuse Current and Blow Time .............................................................................

Table 3-81 Fuse Temperature and Current .........................................................................

Table 3-82 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key ...........................................................

Table 3-83 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key ...........................................................

Table 3-84 CPC Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A ..................................................

Table 3-85 CPC Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C ..................................................

Table 3-86 21–Pin Connector to the MCM Part Numbers ...................................................

Table 3-87 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector Part Numbers ..................................................

3-56

3-57

3-58

3-59

3-60

3-52

3-53

3-54

3-55

3-48

3-49

3-50

3-51

3-44

3-45

3-46

3-47

3-70

3-71

3-63

3-65

3-66

3-69

3-69 xx

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Table 3-88 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin and 2–pin Connector — Horizontal

Mount ATD .......................................................................................................

Table 3-89 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin Connector — Vertical Mount ATD .......

Table 3-90

Table 3-92

Table 3-93 Recommended Splicing Tools ...........................................................................

Table 3-94

Table 3-96

Table 3-97 Recommended Splicing Tools ...........................................................................

Table 3-98

VIH Components to Incorporate an SAE J1939/J1587 Data Link .....................

Table 3-91 Crimp Tools .......................................................................................................

Removal Tools for Deutsch Terminals ...............................................................

Applied Load Criteria for Terminals ...................................................................

Table 3-95 Recommended Splicing Tools ...........................................................................

Applied Load Criteria for Terminals ...................................................................

Sensor Types ....................................................................................................

Table 3-99 Function of Factory-installed Sensors ...............................................................

Table 3-100 Function and Guidelines for OEM-installed Sensors .........................................

Table 3-101 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Parameters ...................................................

Table 3-102 Metri-Pack 280 Connectors and Part Numbers .................................................

3-71

3-72

3-74

3-76

3-78

3-80

3-81

3-83

3-91

3-92

3-94

3-96

3-97

Table 3-103 ECL Sensor Installation Kit 1/4 in. NPTF P/N: 23515397 .................................

3-100

Table 3-104 ECL Sensor Installation Kit 3/8 in. NPTF P/N: 23515398 .................................

3-100

Table 3-105 Enabling the Engine Coolant Level Sensor .......................................................

3-100

Table 3-106 Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters ...................................................................

3-103

Table 3-107 Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor Requirements ....................................

3-103

Table 3-108 Vehicle Speed Sensor Wiring ............................................................................

3-103

Table 3-109 Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters for J1939 Option ........................................

3-105

Table 3-110 DPF Regeneration Lamp Options .....................................................................

3-110

Table 3-111 High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Options ...........................................

3-112

Table 3-112 Low Oil Pressure Lamp Programming Options .................................................

3-113

Table 3-113 Cruise Active Lamp Programming Options .......................................................

3-114

Table 3-114 Deceleration Lamp Programming Options ........................................................

3-115

Table 3-115 Low Battery Voltage Lamp Programming Options ............................................

3-116

Table 3-116 Low Coolant Level Lamp Programming Options ...............................................

3-117

Table 3-117 Optimized Idle Active Lamp Programming Options ...........................................

3-118

Table 3-118 Wait to Start Lamp Programming Options .........................................................

3-119

Table 3-119 AGS2 Backup Lamp Programming Options ......................................................

3-120

Table 3-120 AGS2 Check Trans Lamp Programming Options .............................................

3-121

Table 3-121 AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp Programming Options ...............................................

3-122

Table 4-1

Table 4-2

Table 4-3

Table 4-4

DDEC VI Inputs .................................................................................................

Air Condition Status Programming Options .......................................................

ABS Programming Options ...............................................................................

Aux Shutdown #1 Programming Options ..........................................................

4-3

4-4

4-5

4-6

Table 4-5

Table 4-6

Table 4-7

Table 4-8

Clutch Switch Programming Options .................................................................

Cruise Control On/Off Switch Programming Options ........................................

Cruise Control Resume/Accel Switch Programming Options ............................

Diagnostic Request Switch Programming Options ............................................

Table 4-9 Dual-speed Axle Switch Programming Options ................................................

Table 4-10 Engine Brake Disable Programming Options ....................................................

Table 4-11 Level of Engine Braking ....................................................................................

Table 4-12 Engine Brake Switch Programming Options .....................................................

4-7

4-8

4-9

4-10

4-11

4-12

4-13

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table 4-13 Fast Engine Heat Up Switch Programming Options .........................................

Table 4-14 Hood Tilt Switch Programming Options ............................................................

Table 4-15 OI Thermostat Programming Options ...............................................................

Table 4-16 Con fi guring the Park Brake Switch Input ...........................................................

Table 4-17 Regen Switch Programming Options ................................................................

Table 4-18 Con fi guring the Remote Accelerator Select Input .............................................

Table 4-19 RPM Freeze Programming Options ..................................................................

Table 4-20 Con fi guring the Service Brake Switch Input ......................................................

Table 4-21 Diagnostic Request Switch Programming Options ............................................

Table 4-22 Con fi guring the Transmission Neutral Switch Input ..........................................

Table 4-23 Transmission Retarder Input Options ................................................................

Table 4-24 Source Address Options ...................................................................................

Table 4-25 Parameters for Multiplexing ...............................................................................

Table 4-26 Digital Outputs – CPC .......................................................................................

Table 4-27 Digital Outputs – CPC .......................................................................................

Table 4-28 AGS2 Backup Lamp Programming Options ......................................................

Table 4-29 AGS2 Check Transmission Indication Lamp Programming Options .................

Table 4-30 AGS2 Transmission Temp Indication Lamp Programming Options ..................

Table 4-31 Cruise Active Lamp Programming Options .......................................................

Table 4-32 Deceleration Lamp Programming Options ........................................................

Table 4-33 DPF Regeneration Lamp Programming Options ...............................................

Table 4-34 Engine Brake Active Programming Options ......................................................

Table 4-35 Ether Start Options ............................................................................................

Table 4-36 High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Options ...........................................

Table 4-37 Low Battery Voltage Lamp Programming Options ............................................

Table 4-38 Coolant Level Low Lamp Programming Options ...............................................

Table 4-39 Low Oil Pressure Lamp Programming Options .................................................

Table 4-40 Optimized Idle Active Lamp Programming Options ...........................................

Table 4-41 Optimized Idle Alarm Programming Options .....................................................

Table 4-42 Starter Lockout Programming Options ..............................................................

Table 4-43 Top2 Shift Solenoid Programming Options .......................................................

Table 4-44 Top2 Shift Lockout Solenoid Programming Options ..........................................

Table 4-45 Vehicle Power Shutdown Programming Options ...............................................

Table 4-46 Wait to Start Lamp Programming Options .........................................................

Table 4-47 Analog Output Selections for CPC Pin 3/05 ......................................................

Table 4-48 Analog Output Selections for CPC Pin 3/06 ......................................................

Table 4-49 Analog Output Options ......................................................................................

Table 4-50 Frequency vs. Speed ........................................................................................

Table 4-51 PWM Output Options ........................................................................................

Table 5-1 Acceleration Limiter Parameters and Options ...................................................

Table 5-2

Table 5-3

Table 5-4

Table 5-5

Table 5-6

Table 5-7

Table 5-8

Cold Start States and Outputs ...........................................................................

Cold Start Parameters .......................................................................................

Cold Start Failures and Action Taken ................................................................

Three Cruise Control Operation Modes ............................................................

Cruise Control Input Con fi guration ....................................................................

Cruise Control Parameters ................................................................................

Instrument Panel Lamps ...................................................................................

4-35

4-37

4-24

4-27

4-29

4-22

5-5

5-8

5-9

5-13

5-14

5-16

4-47

4-48

4-49

4-50

4-51

5-3 xxii

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Table 5-9 Flashing Fault Code Parameters .......................................................................

Table 5-10 Dual Speed Axle Digital Input ............................................................................

Table 5-11 Programming the Axle Ratios ............................................................................

Table 5-12 MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Exhaust Flap Applications - MBE900

Engine ..............................................................................................................

Table 5-13 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Exhaust Flap Applications - MBE900

Engine ..............................................................................................................

Table 5-14 MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Compression Brake Applications - MBE900

Engine ..............................................................................................................

Table 5-15 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Compression Brake Applications - MBE900

Engine ..............................................................................................................

Table 5-16 MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Compression and Exhaust Brake

Applications - MBE900 Engine ........................................................................

Table 5-17 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Compression and Exhaust Brake

Applications - MBE900 Engine ........................................................................

Table 5-18 MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Compression and Brake Gate Applications -

MBE4000 Engine .............................................................................................

Table 5-19 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for MBE4000 Compression Brake and Brake

Gate Applications .............................................................................................

Table 5-20 Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine Brake Parameters .....................

Table 5-21 Optional Digital Output for Engine Brakes .........................................................

Table 5-22 Optional Fan Braking for Engine Brakes ...........................................................

Table 5-23 Service Brake Control of Engine Brake Parameter ...........................................

Table 5-24 Minimum Vehicle Speed for Engine Brakes Option ...........................................

Table 5-25 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Jake Brake Applications ..............................

Table 5-26 Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine Brake Parameters .....................

Table 5-27 Optional Digital Output for Engine Brakes .........................................................

Table 5-28 Optional Fan Braking for Engine Brakes ...........................................................

Table 5-29 Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes Parameter .........................................

Table 5-30 Minimum MPH for Engine Brakes Option ..........................................................

Table 5-31 Engine Protection ..............................................................................................

Table 5-32 Engine Starter Control Settings — MCM ...........................................................

Table 5-33 Single-speed Fan – Type 4 MCM Options ........................................................

Table 5-34 Single-speed Fan – Type 4 CPC Options .........................................................

Table 5-35 Single-speed Fan – Type 7 MCM Options ........................................................

Table 5-36 Single-speed Fan – Type 7 CPC Options .........................................................

Table 5-37 Dual Fan – Type 6 MCM Options ......................................................................

Table 5-38 Dual Fan – Type 6 CPC Options .......................................................................

Table 5-39 Two-speed Fan – Type 1 MCM Options ............................................................

Table 5-40 Two-speed Fan – Type 1 CPC Options .............................................................

Table 5-41 Variable Speed Fan Without Fan Speed Feedback – Type 3 MCM Options ....

Table 5-42 Variable Speed Fan Without Fan Speed Feedback – Type 3 CPC Options .....

Table 5-43 Variable Speed Fan With Fan Speed Feedback – Type 2 Options ...................

Table 5-44 Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback – Type 2 CPC Options ...........

Table 5-45 DDEC Data Parameters for Fleet Management ................................................

Table 5-46 Fuel Economy Limits .........................................................................................

Table 5-47 Fuel Economy Incentive Parameters ................................................................

5-18

5-19

5-23

5-25

5-26

5-28

5-29

5-31

5-32

5-58

5-59

5-62

5-63

5-66

5-67

5-70

5-71

5-74

5-75

5-78

5-85

5-86

5-42

5-43

5-47

5-50

5-55

5-56

5-34

5-35

5-36

5-41

5-42

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table 5-48 Idle Adjust Parameters ......................................................................................

Table 5-49 Idle Shutdown Timer Programming Options .....................................................

Table 5-50 Limiter Pin Assignments ....................................................................................

Table 5-51 Limiter 0 and Limiter 1 Parameters ...................................................................

5-88

5-95

5-98

5-99

Table 5-52 Minimum and Maximum Engine Speed Parameters .........................................

5-99

Table 5-53 Transmission Ratios ..........................................................................................

5-101

Table 5-54 Transmission Ratios ..........................................................................................

5-102

Table 5-55 Low Gear Torque Limiting Parameters ..............................................................

5-103

Table 5-56 Voltage Threshold Based on Ambient Air Temperature ....................................

5-106

Table 5-57 Normal Battery Run Mode .................................................................................

5-107

Table 5-58 Alternate Battery Run Mode ..............................................................................

5-107

Table 5-59 Continuous Battery Run Mode ..........................................................................

5-107

Table 5-60 Optimized Idle Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs ..............................................

5-110

Table 5-61 Optimized Idle Options ......................................................................................

5-110

Table 5-62 Engine Protection Parameters ..........................................................................

5-111

Table 5-63 Parked Regeneration Options ...........................................................................

5-114

Table 5-64 Parameter Settings for Manual Transmissions .................................................

5-115

Table 5-65 Parameter Settings for J1939 Transmissions (Allison, Eaton UltraShift, Eaton

AutoShift) .........................................................................................................

5-115

Table 5-66 DPF Stationary Regen Only Parameter ............................................................

5-115

Table 5-67 PasSmart Settings .............................................................................................

5-118

Table 5-68 PasSmart Parameters .......................................................................................

5-119

Table 5-69 Protected Parameters .......................................................................................

5-121

Table 5-70 Progressive Shift Programming ........................................................................

5-127

Table 5-71 Starter Lockout ..................................................................................................

5-130

Table 5-72 Cruise Switch PTO Digital Inputs ......................................................................

5-138

Table 5-73 Cruise Switch PTO Parameters (1 of 2) ............................................................

5-139

Table 5-74 Cruise Switch PTO Parameters (2 of 2) ............................................................

5-140

Table 5-75 Gray Coded Inputs ............................................................................................

5-143

Table 5-76 Remote PTO Parameters (1 of 2) ....................................................................

5-144

Table 5-77 Remote PTO Parameters (2 of 2) .....................................................................

5-145

Table 5-78 Remote Accelerator Control Parameter Settings ..............................................

5-146

Table 5-79 Manual Transmission Options ...........................................................................

5-149

Table 5-80 AGS2 Connector ...............................................................................................

5-151

Table 5-81 AGS2 Transmission Programming Requirements for Non-Multiplexed

Vehicles ............................................................................................................

5-152

Table 5-82 AGS2 Transmission Programming Requirements for Multiplexed Vehicles ......

5-152

Table 5-83 Top2 Reprogramming Choices ..........................................................................

5-154

Table 5-84 Eaton UltraShift Transmission Parameters .......................................................

5-155

Table 5-85 Eaton UltraShift ASW Transmission Parameters ..............................................

5-156

Table 5-86 Eaton AutoShift Transmission Parameters .......................................................

5-157

Table 5-87 ZF Astronic Transmission Parameters ..............................................................

5-158

Table 5-88 Allison Transmission Parameters ......................................................................

5-159

Table 5-89 Vehicle Speed Limiting Parameters ..................................................................

5-161

Table 5-90 VSS Anti-tampering Parameters .......................................................................

5-163

Table 6-1 Identi fi ers Used by CPC ....................................................................................

6-4

Table 6-2 Message Priority Assignments ..........................................................................

6-5 xxiv

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Table 6-3

Table C-1

J1939 Source Address ......................................................................................

6-28

DDEC VI Parameters ........................................................................................

C-17

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

TABLE OF CONTENTS xxvi

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

INTRODUCTION

DDEC VI is a system that monitors and determines all values required for the operation of the engine. A diagnostic interface is provided to connect to an external diagnosis tester.

Besides the engine related sensors and the engine-resident control unit, the Motor Control Module

(MCM), this system has a cab-mounted control unit for vehicle engine management, the Common

Powertrain Controller (CPC). The connection to the vehicle is made via a CAN interface which digitally transmits the nominal values (e.g. torque, engine speed speci fi cation, etc.) and the actual values (e.g. engine speed, oil pressure, etc.).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

1-1

INTRODUCTION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

1-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following safety measures are essential when installing DDEC VI in a vehicle equipped with a Detroit Diesel engine.

PERSONAL INJURY

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

□ Always start and operate an engine in a well ventilated area.

□ If operating an engine in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the outside.

□ Do not modify or tamper with the exhaust system or emission control system.

2.1 STANDS

Use safety stands in conjunction with hydraulic jacks or hoists. Do not rely on either the jack or the hoist to carry the load.

2.2 GLASSES

Select appropriate safety glasses for the job. Safety glasses must be worn when using tools such as hammers, chisels, pullers and punches.

2-1

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2.3 WELDING

Consider the consequences of welding.

NOTICE:

When welding, the following must be done to avoid damage to the electronic controls or the engine:

□ Both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads must be disconnected before welding.

□ Ground cable must be in close proximity to welding location

- engine must never be used as a grounding point.

□ Welding on the engine or engine mounted components is

NEVER recommended.

Wear welding goggles and gloves when welding or using an acetylene torch.

FIRE

To avoid injury from fi re, check for fuel or oil leaks before welding or carrying an open fl ame near the engine.

Insure that a metal shield separates the acetylene and oxygen which must be chained to a cart.

2.4 WORK PLACE

Organize your work area and keep it clean.

PERSONAL INJURY

To avoid injury from slipping and falling, immediately clean up any spilled liquids.

Eliminate the possibility of a fall by:

□ Wiping up oil spills

□ Keeping tools and parts off the fl oor

A fall could result in a serious injury.

2-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

After installation of the engine is complete:

PERSONAL INJURY

To avoid injury from rotating belts and fans, do not remove and discard safety guards.

□ Reinstall all safety devices, guards or shields

□ Check to be sure that all tools and equipment used to install the engine are removed from the engine

2.5 CLOTHING

Wear work clothing that fi ts and is in good repair. Work shoes must be sturdy and rough-soled.

Bare feet, sandals or sneakers are not acceptable foot wear when installing an engine.

PERSONAL INJURY

To avoid injury when working near or on an operating engine, remove loose items of clothing and jewelry. Tie back or contain long hair that could be caught in any moving part causing injury.

2.6 ELECTRIC TOOLS

Improper use of electrical equipment can cause severe injury.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK

To avoid injury from electrical shock, follow OEM furnished operating instructions prior to usage.

Check power tools before using.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

2-3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2.7 AIR

Use proper shielding to protect everyone in the work area.

EYE INJURY

To avoid injury from fl ying debris when using compressed air, wear adequate eye protection (face shield or safety goggles) and do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) air pressure.

2.8 DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS

For mobile applications, the vehicle operator must maintain control of the vehicle while an assistant performs the diagnostic evaluations using a diagnostic tool.

PERSONAL INJURY

To avoid injury from loss of vehicle/vessel control, the operator of a DDEC equipped engine must not use or read any diagnostic tool while the vehicle/vessel is moving.

2.9 FLUIDS AND PRESSURE

Fluids under pressure can have enough force to penetrate the skin.

PERSONAL INJURY

To avoid injury from penetrating fl uids, do not put your hands in front of fl uid under pressure. Fluids under pressure can penetrate skin and clothing.

2-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

HOT COOLANT

To avoid scalding from the expulsion of hot coolant, never remove the cooling system pressure cap while the engine is at operating temperature. Wear adequate protective clothing

(face shield, rubber gloves, apron, and boots). Remove the cap slowly to relieve pressure.

These fl uids can infect a minor cut or opening in the skin. See a doctor at once, if injured by escaping fl uid. Serious infection or reaction can result without immediate medical treatment.

2.10 BATTERIES

Electrical storage batteries give off highly fl ammable hydrogen gas when charging and continue to do so for some time after receiving a steady charge.

Battery Explosion and Acid Burn

To avoid injury from battery explosion or contact with battery acid, work in a well ventilated area, wear protective clothing, and avoid sparks or fl ames near the battery. If you come in contact with battery acid:

□ Flush your skin with water.

□ Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.

□ Flush your eyes with water.

□ Get medical attention immediately.

Always disconnect the battery cable before working on the Detroit Diesel Electronic Controls system.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

2-5

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2.11 FIRE

Keep a charged fi re extinguisher within reach. Be sure you have the correct type of extinguisher for the situation. The correct fi re extinguisher types for speci fi c working environments are listed in Table 2-1.

Fire Extinguisher

Type A

Type B

Type C

Table 2-1

Work Environment

Wood, Paper, Textile and Rubbish

Flammable Liquids

Electrical Equipment

The Correct Type of Fire Extinguisher

2.12 PAINT

Mask off the MCM prior to applying any paint.

NOTICE:

Do not apply paint to the MCM. The application of paint may affect the performance of the MCM.

2.13 FLUOROELASTOMER

Fluoroelastomer (Viton®) parts such as O-rings and seals are perfectly safe to handle under normal design conditions.

CHEMICAL BURNS

To avoid injury from chemical burns, wear a face shield and neoprene or PVC gloves when handling fl uoroelastomer

O-rings or seals that have been degraded by excessive heat.

Discard gloves after handling degraded fl uoroelastomer parts.

A potential hazard may occur if these components are raised to a temperature above 600°F (316°C)

(in a fi re for example). Fluoroelastomer will decompose (indicated by charring or the appearance of a black, sticky mass) and produce hydro fl uoric acid. This acid is extremely corrosive and, if touched by bare skin, may cause severe burns (the symptoms could be delayed for several hours).

2-6

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Section Page

3.1

MOTOR CONTROL MODULE ................................................................

3-3

3.2

COMMON POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER .............................................

3-27

3.3

WIRES AND WIRING .............................................................................

3-73

3.4

CONDUIT AND LOOM ............................................................................

3-87

3.5

TAPE AND TAPING ................................................................................

3-89

3.6

SENSORS ...............................................................................................

3-91

3.7

LAMPS .................................................................................................... 3-107

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-1

HARDWARE AND WIRING

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.1 MOTOR CONTROL MODULE

The engine mounted Motor Control Module (MCM) includes control logic to provide overall engine management. See Figure 3-1.

1. 21–pin Connector (OEM Responsibility)

Figure 3-1 Motor Control Module

2. 120–pin Connector (Detroit Diesel Responsibility)

NOTE:

Do NOT ground the MCM housing. This can result in false codes being logged.

3.1.1 ENGINE HARNESS

The MCM has a 120–pin connector Engine Harness which is factory installed. It also has a

21–pin connector and 31–pin connector which are the responsibility of the OEM.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-3

HARDWARE AND WIRING

MCM 120–pin Connector for Series 60 Engines

The pinouts for the 120–pin connector for the Series 60 engine are listed in Table 3-1, Table 3-2,

Table 3-3, and Table 3-4.

Pin

Table 3-1

Signal

Type

RPU_H

MV_B2

MV_B2D

MV_B2

MV_B2B

MV_B2

MV_B1E

MV_B1

MV_B1C

MV_B1

MV_B1A

MV_B1

START_B

A16

A01

RPU_L

PV_IM1

MV_B5F

MV_B5

MV_B5D

MV_B5

MV_B5B

MV_B5

MV_B4E

MV_B4

MV_B4C

MV_B4

MV_B4A

MV_B4

MV_B2F

Function

Spill Control Valve (cyl 4) - pin 4

Spill Control Valve Common - pin 3

Spill Control Valve (cyl 6) - pin 4

Spill Control Valve Common - pin 3

Spill Control Valve (cyl 5) - pin 4

Spill Control Valve Common - pin 3

Spill Control Valve (cyl 2) - pin 4

Spill Control Valve Common - pin 3

Spill Control Valve (cyl 3) - pin 4

Spill Control Valve (cyl 1) - pin 4

Needle Control Valve (cyl 4) - pin 2

Needle Control Valve Common - pin 1

Needle Control Valve (cyl 6) - pin 2

Needle Control Valve Common - pin 1

Needle Control Valve (cyl 5) - pin 2

Needle Control Valve Common - pin 1

Needle Control Valve (cyl 2) - pin 2

Needle Control Valve Common (cyl 1,2,3) - pin 1

Needle Control Valve (cyl 3) - pin 2

Needle Control Valve (cyl 1) - pin 2

DOC Outlet Temp Sensor

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor

MCM Connector – Series 60 (1 of 4)

Connector

3-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Connector Pin

Table 3-2

Signal Type

PWM_5

DYN3_N

DYN3

DYN2_N

DYN2

D3_V

DYN4

DYM_2M

DYN5_S

SGND_TL

DYN1

SGND_P

A23

A09

PWM_7

PWM_6

PWM_8

PWM_10

PWM_9

PWM_11

PV_M

HSW2

SW_1

HSW1

SGND_P

A20

A05

SENS1_V

A17

A02

Function

Jake 1

Two-speed Fan or Variable Speed Fan

Ground

CKP/TRS (-)

CKP/TRS (+)

CMP/SRS (-)

CMP/SRS (+)

Fan Speed

Sensor Ground

Turbo Speed Sensor

Sensor Ground

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

Sensor Power Supply

EGR Valve Position

MCM Connector – Series 60 (2 of 4)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-5

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Pin

Table 3-3

Signal Type

PWM_1

LIN_V

LIN

DYN_3M

CAN3L

CAN3H

D3_S

A29

A15

A27

A13

SENS2_V

A24

PV_B2

PWM_2

PV_B2

PWM_12

PWM_13

PV_M

SW_2

SW_8

SW_6

A10

SENS2_V

A21

A06

SGND_P

A18

A03

MCM Connector – Series 60 (3 of 4)

Function

EGR Valve

Power Supply

Doser

Jake 2

Ground

Fuel Cutoff Valve

Ether Start

VNT CAN (-)

VNT CAN (+)

Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor

Sensor Supply

EGR Temperature Sensor

Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor

Sensor Supply

Turbo Compressor In Temp

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

DOC Inlet Temp Sensor

Intake Air Throttle Valve

Connector

3-6

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Connector Pin

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

100

101

Table 3-4

Signal Type

PV_B1

A14

A26

A12

A25

A11

SGND_S2

A22

A08

SENS1_V

A07

A19

A04

SGND

A30

A28

PWM_3

PV_B1

PWM_4

PV_M

SW_4

SW_5

SW_3

SW_7

H_Out1

H_Out2

Function

Power Supply

Single-speed Fan or Two-speed Fan

Intake Air Throttle (+)

Intake Air Throttle (-)

Sensor Ground

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor

EGR Delta Pressure Sensor

Engine Coolant Temp Sensor

Fuel Line Pressure Sensor

Turbo Compressor Out Temp

Sensor Ground

DPF Outlet Temp Sensor

Sensor Power Supply

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor

MCM Connector – Series 60 (4 of 4)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-7

HARDWARE AND WIRING

MCM 120–pin Connector for MBE 900 Engines

The pinouts for the 120–pin connector for the MBE 900 engine are listed in Table 3-5, Table 3-6,

Table 3-7, and listed in Table 3-8.

Pin

Table 3-5

Signal

Type

RPU_H

MV_B2F

MV_B2

MV_B2D

MV_B2

MV_B2B

MV_B2

MV_B1E

MV_B1

MV_B1C

MV_B1

MV_B1A

MV_B1

START_B

A16

A01

RPU_L

PV_IM1

MV_B5F

MV_B5

MV_B5D

MV_B5

MV_B5B

MV_B5

MV_B4E

MV_B4

MV_B4C

MV_B4

MV_B4A

MV_B4

Function

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 4) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 4) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump(cyl 6) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 6) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 5) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 5) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 2) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 2) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 3) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 3) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 1) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 1) – pin 2

Injector (cyl 4) – pin 1

Injector Common (cyl 4) – pin 2

Injector (cyl 6) – pin 1

Injector Common (cyl 6) – pin 2

Injector (cyl 5) – pin 1

Injector Common (cyl 5) – pin 2

Injector (cyl 2) – pin 1

Injector Common (cyl 2) -– pin 2

Injector (cyl 3) – pin 1

Injector Common (cyl 3) – pin 2

Injector (cyl 1) – pin 1

Injector Common (cyl 1) – pin 2

DOC Outlet Temp Sensor

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (1 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

3-8

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Pin

Table 3-6

Signal Type

PWM_5

DYN5_S

SGND_TL

DYN1

SGND_P

A23

A09

SGND_P

A20

A05

SENS1_V

A17

A02

PWM_7

PWM_6

PWM_8

PWM_10

PWM_9

PWM_11

PV_M

HSW2

SW_1

HSW1

DYN3_N

DYN3

DYN2_N

DYN2

D3_V

DYN4

DYM2_M

Function

Constant Throttle Valve

Two-speed Fan or Variable Speed Fan

Ground

Electrostatic Oil Separator

Grid Heater

CKP (+)

CMP (+)

Fan Speed

CMP (-)

Sensor Ground

Turbo Speed Sensor

Sensor Ground

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

Water-in- Fuel Sensor

Sensor Power Supply

EGR Throttle Position

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (2 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-9

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Pin

Table 3-7

Signal Type

PWM_1

LIN

DYN3_M

CAN3L

CAN3H

D3_S

A29

A15

A27

A13

SENS2_V

A24

A10

PV_B2

PWM_2

PV_B2

PWM_12

PWM_13

PV_M

SW_2

SW_8

SW_6

LIN_V

SENS2_V

A21

A06

SGND_P

A18

A03

Function

EGR Valve

Power Supply

Doser

Ground

Fuel Cutoff Valve

CKP (-)

Wastegate CAN (-)

Wastegate CAN (+)

Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor

Grid Heater

Sensor Power Supply

Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor

Sensor Power Supply

Turbo Pressure/Temp Sensor

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

DOC Inlet Temp Sensor

Intake Air Throttle Position

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (3 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

3-10

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Pin

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

100

101

Table 3-8

Signal Type

PV_B1

A14

A26

A12

A25

A11

SGND_S2

A22

A08

SENS1_V

A07

A19

A04

SGND

A30

A28

PWM_3

PV_B1

PWM_4

PV_M

SW_4

SW_5

SW_3

SW_7

H_OUT1

H_OUT2

Function

Power Supply

High Tech Grid Heater

Power Supply

Ground

Exhaust Brake

Single-speed or Two-speed Fan

Intake Air Throttle 5kHz (+)

Intake Air Throttle 5kHz (-)

Sensor Ground

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

Diagnostic Electrostatic Oil Separator

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor

EGR Delta Pressure Sensor

Engine Coolant Temp Sensor

Fuel Line Pressure Sensor

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

Sensor Ground

DPF Outlet Temp Sensor

Sensor Power Supply

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor

Turbo Compressor Temperature Sensor

MCM Connector – MBE 900 (4 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-11

HARDWARE AND WIRING

MCM 120–pin Connector for MBE 4000 Engines

The pinouts for the 120–pin connector for the MBE 4000 engine are listed in Table 3-9, Table

3-10, Table 3-11, and Table 3-12.

Pin

Table 3-9

Signal

Type

RPU_H

MV_B2F

MV_B2

MV_B2D

MV_B2

MV_B2B

MV_B2

MV_B1E

MV_B1

MV_B1C

MV_B1

MV_B1A

MV_B1

START_B

A16

A01

RPU_L

PV_IM1

MV_B5F

MV_B5

MV_B5D

MV_B5

MV_B5B

MV_B5

MV_B4E

MV_B4

MV_B4C

MV_B4

MV_B4A

MV_B4

Function

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 4) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 4) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 6) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 6) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 5) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 5) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 2) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 2) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 3) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 3) – pin 1

Electronic Unit Pump (cyl 1) – pin 2

Electronic Unit Pump Common (cyl 1) – pin 1

Injector (cyl 4) – pin 2

Injector Common (cyl 4) – pin 1

Injector (cyl 6) – pin 2

Injector Common (cyl 6) – pin 1

Injector (cyl 5) – pin 2

Injector Common (cyl 5) – pin 1

Injector (cyl 2) – pin 2

Injector Common (cyl 2) – pin 1

Injector (cyl 3) – pin 2

Injector Common (cyl 3) – pin 1

Injector (cyl 1) – pin 2

Injector Common (cyl 1) – pin 1

DOC Outlet Temp Sensor

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor

MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (1 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

3-12

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Signal Type

PWM_5

DYN3_N

DYN3

DYN2_N

DYN2

D3_V

DYN4

DYM2_M

DYN5

SGND_TL

DYN1

SGND_P

A23

A09

PWM_7

PWM_6

PWM_8

PWM_10

PWM_9

PWM_11

PV_M

HSW2

SW_1

HSW1

SGND_P

A20

A05

SENS1_V

A17

A02

Pin

Function

Constant Throttle Valve

Two-speed Fan or Variable Speed Fan

Wastegate

Ground

Electrostatic Oil Separator

Grid Heater

CKP (+)

CMP (+)

Fan Speed

CMP (-)

Sensor Ground

Turbo Speed Sensor

Sensor Ground

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

Sensor Power Supply

EGR Throttle Position

Table 3-10 MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (2 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-13

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Pin

Signal Type

PWM_1

PV_B2

PWM_2

PV_B2

PWM_12

PWM_13

PV_M

SW_2

SW_8

SW_6

LIN_V

LIN

DYN3_M

CAN3L

CAN3H

D3_S

A29

A15

A27

A13

SENS2_V

A24

A10

SENS2_V

A21

A06

SGND_P

A18

A03

Table 3-11

Function

EGR Valve

Power Supply

Doser

EPV2

(Entry Connecting Flap)

Ground

Fuel Cutoff Valve

CKP (-)

Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor

Grid Heater

Sensor Power Supply

Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor

Sensor Power Supply

Turbo Compressor Temperature Sensor

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

DOC Inlet Temp Sensor

Intake Air Throttle Position

MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (3 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

3-14

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

111

112

113

114

105

106

107

108

109

110

115

116

117

101

102

103

104

100

118

119

120

Pin

Signal Type

PV_B1

PWM_3

PV_B1

PWM_4

PV_M

SW_4

SW_5

SW_3

SW_7

H_OUT1

H_OUT2

SGND

A30

A28

A14

A26

A12

A25

A11

SGND_S2

A22

A08

SENS1_V

A07

A19

A04

Function

Power Supply

High Tech Grid Heater

Power Supply

Ground

EPV1

(Entry Shutoff Flap)

Single-speed Fan or Two-speed Fan

Intake Throttle Valve 5 kHz (+)

Intake Air Throttle Valve 5 kHz (-)

Sensor Ground

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

Electrostatic Oil Separator

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor

Intake Air Delta P Sensor

Engine Coolant Temp Sensor

Fuel Line Pressure Sensor

Sensor Ground

DPF Outlet Temp Sensor

Sensor Power Supply

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

Turbo Compressor Pressure Sensor

Table 3-12 MCM Connector – MBE 4000 (4 of 4) – C Sample

Connector

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-15

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Connector Brackets

The harnesses on MCM must be bracketed and held secure. The bracket design will change for different engines as the routing is different. The 120–pin connector and the 21-pin connector must be tie-wrapped to the brackets as shown in the following drawing for the Series 60 engine

(see Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-2 Series 60 Engine 120–pin Connector and 21–pin Connector

Tie-wrapped to Brackets

3-16

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

MCM 21–pin and 31–pin Connectors

The wiring for the VIH 21–pin to the MCM is listed in Table 3-13. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

Connector Pin

21/1

21/9

21/10

21/11

21/12

21/13

21/14

21/15

21/2

21/3

21/4

21/5

21/6

21/7

21/8

21/16

21/17

21/18

21/19

21/20

21/21

Signal Type

CAN2L

CAN2GND

CAN2H

CAN2GND

KL31

KL15

KL31

CAN1GND

KL30

CAN1H

KL30

CAN1GND

BOOT

KDiag_S

CAN1L

KL50

START_B

Table 3-13 21–Pin Connector to the MCM

Function

Not Used

Battery (-)

IGN

Battery (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Battery (+)

Engine CAN +

Battery (+)

Not Used

Engine CAN –

Crank Start Input

Crank Activation Output

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Part

Connector

1.0 – 2.5 mm Contact (single)

0.5 – 1.0 mm Contact (single)

Seal (2.2 – 3.0 mm 2 insulation diameter)

Seal (1.2 – 2.1 mm 2 insulation diameter)

Backshell

Cavity Plug

Table 3-14 21–Pin Connector to the MCM Part Numbers

DDC Part Number

024 545 76 26

014 545 82 26

014 545 83 26

000 545 29 39

000 545 28 39

001 545 79 83

000 545 62 80

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-17

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The part numbers for the 31–pin MCM pigtail connector are listed in Table 3-15.

Part

Connector

Terminal

Seals

Cavity Plugs

Backshell

Table 3-15 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector Part Numbers

DDC Part Number

008 545 31 26

006 545 52 26

000 545 72 80

000 545 62 80

000 546 99 35

The pinout for the 31–pin pigtail on the Engine Harness is listed in Table 3-16. The OEM is

responsible for wiring to this connector.

3-18

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

31–pin 120–pin

31/1

31/2

31/3

31/4

31/5

31/6

31/7

31/8

31/9

31/10

31/11

31/12

31/13

31/14

31/15

31/16

31/17

—

120/70

120/33

120/98

—

120/71

120/67

120/96

120/29

Function

Spare

Power Supply (IGN)*

Fuel Heater Supply #1†

Spare

Full Heater Supply #2†

Spare

Power Supply Ground*

Ether Start

Fan Control #2 – High of Two-speed

Fan or Variable Speed Fan

Single Speed Fan or Low for

Two-speed Fan

Fuel Heater Ground #1†

Spare

Water-in-Fuel Sensor Supply

Water-in-Fuel Sensor Ground

Engine Brake Solenoid Control

DOC Outlet Temp Sensor (Exhaust Gas

Temperature in Front of Particulate Trap)

DOC Inlet Temp Sensor

Series 60 MBE 900 MBE 4000

—

31/18 120/89 X

31/19

31/20

31/21

31/22

31/23

31/24

31/25

120/115

—

120/91

120/47

120/88

—

31/26

31/27

120/57

120/86

31/28 120/114

31/29 120/85

DPF Outlet Temp Sensor( Exhaust Gas

Temperature After Particulate Trap)

Full Heater Ground #2†

Spare

Power Supply (Eng Brk, Fan, Ether)

Fan Speed

Sensor Ground

Spare

Water-in-Fuel Sensor

TCI Temp

Sensor Ground

Sensor Supply

—

31/30 120/30

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust

Gas Pressure After Particulate Filter)

31/31 120/118

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust

Gas Pressure Before Particulate Filter)

*Fused at 15 amps

† Optional for MBE 900 and HDE. Must use 14 AWG wire and fuse at 20A.

—

Table 3-16 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector

—

HDE

—

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-19

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.1.2 DPF HARNESS

The Aftertreatment Device (ATD) con fi guration includes a Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) and a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). See Figure 3-3.

1. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst

2. DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor

3. DOC Outlet Temperature Sensor

4. Sensor Junction Box

Figure 3-3 Aftertreatment Device

5. DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor

6. Diesel Particulate Filter

7. A= Engine Exhaust Inlet

8. B= Exhaust Outlet

3-20

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The ATD may be horizontally or vertically mounted depending on the vehicle chassis con fi

guration. See Figure 3-4 for a typical mounting view of the ATD.

Figure 3-4 Typical Mounting Views of an Aftertreatment Device

The wiring for the DPF Harness is determined by the ATD mount position.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-21

HARDWARE AND WIRING

DPF Harness – Vertical Mount ATD (31-pin to 10 pin connector)

See Figure 3-5 for the DPF Harness wiring for vertical mount ATDs.

Figure 3-5 Vertical and Under Step Mount ATD Wiring — OEM Responsibility

3-22

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The wiring for the 10–pin DPF connector is listed in Table 3-17.

The DDC part numbers for the DPF connector arelisted in Table 3-18.

Pin

Function

Sensor Ground

Sensor Supply

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust Gas Pressure

Before Particulate Filter)

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust Gas

Pressure After Particulate Filter)

DOC Outlet Temperature Sensor (Exhaust Gas

Temp in Front of Particulate Trap)

DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor

DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor( Exhaust Gas

Temp After Particulate Trap)

Sensor Ground

Plug

Table 3-17 DPF 10–pin Connector

Connector

Part

10–pin Connector

Terminal (Male)

Plug

DDC Part Numbers

23531613

23531614

23531615

Table 3-18 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin Connector

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-23

HARDWARE AND WIRING

DPF Harness – Horizontal Mount ATD (31-pin to 10-pin Connector/2-pin

Connector)

See Figure 3-6 for the DPF Harness wiring for horizontal mount ATDs.

Figure 3-6 Horizontal Mount ATD Wiring — OEM Responsibility

3-24

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The wiring for the DPF 10–pin connector and 2–pin connector is listed in Table 3-19.

The DDC part numbers for the DPF connector arelisted in Table 3-20.

Pin

Function

Sensor Ground

Sensor Supply

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust Gas Pressure

Before Particulate Filter)

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust Gas

Pressure After Particulate Filter)

DOC Outlet Temperature Sensor (Exhaust Gas

Temp in Front of Particulate Trap)

DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor

DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor( Exhaust Gas

Temp After Particulate Trap)

Connector

8 Sensor Ground

DPF 2–pin Connector

2 9 DOC Inlet Temperature Sensor

10 Sensor Ground 1

Table 3-19 DPF 10–pin Connector and 2–pin Connector — Horizontal Mount

ATD

Part

10-Pin Connector

Terminal (Male)

Plug

2-Pin Connector

Terminal (Female)

DDC Part Numbers

23531613

23531614

23531615

23537171

23531617

Table 3-20 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin and 2–pin Connector —

Horizontal Mount ATD

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-25

HARDWARE AND WIRING

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3-26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.2 COMMON POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER

The Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) has three 18–pin connectors and one 21–pin connector. The following sections contain the connector pin-outs for truck, vocational, transit bus, fi re truck, and crane applications.

The CPC is the interface between the MCM and the vehicle/equipment for engine control and

manages other vehicle/equipment functions. See Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 The Common Powertrain Controller

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-27

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The OEM is responsible for mounting this part in an enclosed, protected environment. The mounting bracket is the responsibility of the OEM. There must be maximum physical separation of the VIH from other vehicle/equipment electrical systems. Other electrical system wires should ideally be at least three feet away from the VIH and should not be parallel to the VIH. This will

eliminate coupling electromagnetic energy from other systems into the VIH. See Figure 3-8 for

the CPC dimensions.

Figure 3-8 CPC Dimensions

NOTE:

The CPC should be mounted with the connectors pointing down.

3-28

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The CPC communicates over the J1587 and J1939 Data Links to the vehicle (see Figure 3-9).

Figure 3-9 NAFTA Architecture On-highway

Within the CPC, sets of data for speci fi c applications are stored. These include idle speed, maximum running speed, and speed limitation. Customer programmable parameters are also stored here.

The CPC receives data from the operator (accelerator pedal position, switches, various sensors) and other electronic control units (for example, synchronization controllers for more than one genset, air compressor controls).

From this data, instructions are computed for controlling the engine and transmitted to the MCM via the proprietary data link.

3.2.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Temperature, vibration, and water intrusion must be considered.

Temperature

The ambient operating temperature range is –40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C).

Water Intrusion

The CPC is not water tight and cannot be subject to water spray. It must be mounted in an enclosed, protected environment.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-29

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.2.2 CPC VEHICLE INTERFACE HARNESS

The OEM supplied Vehicle Interface Harness (VIH) connects the CPC to the MCM and other

vehicle systems (see Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10 Vehicle Interface Harness

3-30

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The following criteria are to be used when designing the VIH.

Criteria: VIH Design

The four vehicle connectors are designed to accept 18 AWG wires for all circuits.

The conductor must be annealed copper, not aluminum, and must comply with the industry standard SAE J1128 document.

Color code the wires as shown in the schematics. If the wires used are the same color, hot stamp the cavity number on the wires.

NOTE:

The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be a twisted pair. The twists are a minimum of 12 turns per foot (305 mm) and are required to minimize electromagnetic fi eld coupling.

NOTE:

J1939 cable is required for the J1939 datalink wires. Refer to SAE J1939–11 spec for speci fi c requirements.

The low speed propriety Engine-CAN link between the MCM and the CPC must be a twisted shielded cable with 0.75 mm diameter wire (approximately 20 AWG), bundle shielded with drain wire and 30 twists per meter. The insulation is rated to 105°C. Termination resistors for the

Engine-CAN link are located in the CPC and MCM.

Frequency Input

The CPC has one frequency input on the VIH that can accept a variable reluctance sensor. A typical frequency input functions is the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). Requirements for a variable reluctance signal interface are listed in Table 3-21.

Parameter

Input Amplitude Range

Input Frequency Range

Range

V Peak to Peak

0 to 10,000 Hz

Table 3-21 Variable Reluctance Signal Interface

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-31

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Digital Inputs

These inputs are in low state by providing a connection to battery ground and placed in high state by providing an open circuit.

Digital Input Requirements:

High State:

Low State:

Isink:

V in

≥

≤

2/3 Battery (+)

1/3 Battery (+)

Capable of sinking 5–20 mA

NOTE:

Use switches that will not oxidize with the passage of time and environmental factors due to the low source current.

Digital Outputs

There are 15 digital outputs located on the CPC.

High Power Outputs

DO_HP_FLEX-01 – 4/9

DO_HP_FLEX_02 – 3/17

DO_HP_HS_01 — 3/7

DO_HP_HS_02 — 3/8

DO_HP_HS_04 — 4/10

DO_HP_LS_01 — 3/9

DO_HP_LS_02 — 4/7

Low-side High Power Output Characteristics:

Resistance: 12 V - vehicle power: R > 8 ohms

Inductivity:

Capacity:

Isink:

≤

800 mH (if valve or relay load)

10 nF

Capable of sinking less than or equal to 2.0 A

3-32

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Low Power Outputs

DO_HP_FLEX-1 – 1/13

DO_HP_FLEX_2 – 2/10

DO_HP_FLEX_3 — 3/10

DO_HP_FLEX_4 — 3/12

DO_HP_FLEX_5 — 3/16

DO_HP_FLEX_6 — 4/6

DO_HP_LS_01 — 1/4

DO_HP_LS_02 — 1/5

Low-side Low Power Output Characteristics:

Resistance:

Inductivity:

12 V - vehicle power: R > 64 ohms

< 1.3 H (if relay load)

Capacity: < 10 nF

Inrush Lamp Current: < 2.5 A

Isink: Capable of sinking less than or equal to 0.25 A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-33

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.2.3 VIH WIRING

The OEM is responsible for wiring four connectors to the CPC, one 21–connector to the MCM, one 31–pin connector to the Engine Harness and a 10–pin Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) connector. The connector and terminal part numbers are listed in the following pages.

Truck Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #1 connector (18–pins) for truck applications islisted in Table 3-22. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are listed in Table 3-23.

Pin

1/1

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/16

1/17

1/18

1/5

1/6

1/7

1/8

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/9

1/10

1/11

Table 3-22

Signal Type

Digital Input_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_05

Digital Output_LP_LS_02

Digital Output_LP_LS_01

Digital Input_SFP_06

SFP_08

SFP_07

PWM_FPO_02

Digital Input_FLEX_20

Digital Input_FLEX_08

Digital Input_FLEX_03

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_04

Digital Input_FLEX_05

Digital Input_FLEX_06

Digital Input_FLEX_07

SFP_01

Function

Dual-speed Axle

Park Brake Interlock

Idle Validation Switch 2 (throttle active)

Throttle Position Sensor Ground

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Idle Validation Switch 1 (idle active)

Throttle Position Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor Supply

Tachometer

Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1

Limiter 0

Set / Coast Enable

MIL Lamp

Cruise Control Enable

Stop Engine Override

Resume / Accel Enable

Not Used

Run Start

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Truck Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-23 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-34

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #2 connector (18–pins) for truck applications is listed in Table 3-24. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-25.

Pin

2/1

2/12

2/13

2/14

2/15

2/16

2/17

2/18

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/10

2/11

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/5

Signal Type

Battery (+) PSU (KL_30)

Battery (-) PSU (KL_31)

Battery (+) Switched PSU

K_DIAG_C

J1708_A_C

J1708_B_C

Digital Input_FLEX_15

Digital Input_FLEX_16

Digital Input_FLEX_09

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_03

Digital Input_FLEX_10

Digital Input_FLEX_11

Digital Input_FLEX_12

Digital Input_FLEX_13

Digital Input_FLEX_14

VCAN_L_C

VCAN_GND_C

VCAN_H_C

Function

Main Battery +12 V

Main Battery Ground

Ignition

K-line

J1587(+)

J1587(–)

Service Brake Released Switch

Remote Throttle Select Switch

Remote PTO Switch

Amber Warning Lamp

Limiter 1

A/C Status

Fan Override

Engine Brake Low

Engine Brake Medium

J1939 (-)

J1939 Shield

J1939 (+)

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-24 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Truck Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-25 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-35

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #3 connector (21–pins) for

truck applications islisted in Table 3-26 . The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #3 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-27.

Pin

3/1

3/12

3/13

3/14

3/15

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/5

3/19

3/20

3/21

Table 3-26

Signal Type

Analog_In_01

Analog_GND

Analog__SUP_5V

Analog_In_02

Analog_Out_01

Analog_Out_02

Digital Output_HP_HS_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_02

Digital Output_HP_LS_01

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02

SFP_14

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04

SFP_09

SF_VGND

Analog_In_SFP_13

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_02

Not Used

Function

OI Thermostat

Sensor Return

Sensor Supply

PTO

Not Used

Top2 Lockout Solenoid/AGS2 PTO Valve

Top2 Shift Solenoid/AGS2 PTO Lamp

AGS 2 Backup Lamp

AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp

Low Coolant Level Sensor

AGS2 Check Trans Lamp

Vehicle Speed (+)

Vehicle Speed (-)

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Red Stop Lamp

OI Alarm

ABS Active (AGS2 Transmission)

Not Populated

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Truck Application

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-27 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-36

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #4 connector (18–pins) for truck applications islisted in Table 3-28. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-29.

Pin

4/1

4/12

4/13

4/14

4/15

4/16

4/17

4/18

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/9

4/10

4/11

4/2

4/3

4/4

4/5

Signal Type

C_ECAN_L

C_ECAN_GND

C_ECAN_H

Digital Input_SFP_11

Digital Input_SFP_12

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06

Digital Output_HP_LS_02

Digital Input_FLEX_E1

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_04

Frequency_SFP_10

PWM_FPO_01

Digital Input__FLEX_19

Digital Input_SFP_03

Digital Input_SFP_04

Digital Input_FLEX_17

Digital Input_FLEX_21

Digital Input_FLEX_18

Function

Engine CAN (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Engine CAN (+)

Not Populated

Wait to Start Lamp (Grid Heater)

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Clutch Released/PTO Request for AGS2

OI Active Lamp

Vehicle Power Shutdown

Not Used

Vehicle Speed Output

—

Not Populated

Trans Neutral Switch

DPF Regeneration Switch

Hood Tilt Switch/AGS2 PTO Feedback

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-28 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Truck Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-29 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

DDC Part Number

018 545 68 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-37

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Vocational Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #1 connector (18–pin) for vocational applications are listed in Table 3-30. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are listed in Table 3-31.

Pin

1/1

1/9

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/5

1/6

1/7

1/8

1/16

1/17

1/18

Table 3-30

Signal Type

Digital Input_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_05

Digital Output_LP_LS_02

Digital Output_LP_LS_01

Digital Input_SFP_06

SFP_08

SFP_07

PWM_FPO_02

Digital Input_FLEX_20

Digital Input_FLEX_08

Digital Input_FLEX_03

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_04

Digital Input_FLEX_05

Digital Input_FLEX_06

Digital Input_FLEX_07

SFP_01

Function

Dual-speed Axle

Park Brake Interlock

Idle Validation Switch 2 (throttle active)

Throttle Position Sensor Ground

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Idle Validation Switch 1 (idle active)

Throttle Position Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor Supply

Tachometer

Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1

Limiter 0

Set / Coast Enable

MIL Lamp

Cruise Enable

Stop Engine Override

Resume / Accel Enable

Throttle Inhibit

Run Start

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-31 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-38

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #2 connector (18–pin) for vocational applications are listed in Table 3-32. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-33.

Pin

2/1

2/12

2/13

2/14

2/15

2/16

2/17

2/18

2/5

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/9

2/10

2/11

Signal Type

Battery (+) PSU (KL_30)

Battery (-) PSU (KL_31)

Battery (+) Switched PSU

K_DIAG_C

J1708_A_C

J1708_B_C

Digital Input_FLEX_15

Digital Input_FLEX_16

Digital Input_FLEX_09

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_03

Digital Input_FLEX_10

Digital Input_FLEX_11

Digital Input_FLEX_12

Digital Input_FLEX_13

Digital Input_FLEX_14

VCAN_L_C

VCAN_GND_C

VCAN_H_C

Function

Main Battery +12 V

Main Battery Ground

Ignition

K-line

J1587 (+)

J1587 (–)

Service Brake Switch

Remote Throttle Select Switch

Remote PTO Select

Amber Warning Lamp

Limiter 1

A/C Status

Fan Override

Engine Brake Low

Engine Brake Medium

J1939-

J1939 Shield

J1939+

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-32 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-33 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-39

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #3 connector (21–pin) for

vocational applications are listed in Table 3-34. The side of the connector shown is looking

into the pins.

The part numbers for the #3 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-35.

3/10

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/19

3/20

3/21

3/11

3/12

3/13

3/14

3/15

Pin

3/1

3/5

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/2

3/3

3/4

Signal Type

Analog_In_01

Analog_GND

Analog__SUP_5V

Analog_In_02

Analog_Out_01

Analog_Out_02

Digital Output_HP_HS_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_02

Digital Output_HP_LS_01

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02

SFP_14

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04

SFP_09

SF_VGND

Analog_In_SFP_13

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_02

Not Used

Table 3-34

Function

Not Used

Sensor Return

Sensor Supply

PTO

Not Used

AGS 2 Backup Lamp/AGS2 PTO Valve

AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp/AGS2

PTO Lamp

Low Coolant Level Sensor

AGS2 Check Trans Lamp

Vehicle Speed (+)

Vehicle Speed (-)

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Red Stop Lamp

Starter Lockout/Run Signal

ABS Active (AGS2 Transmission)

Not Populated

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-35 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-40

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #4 connector (18–pin) for vocational applications are listed in Table 3-36. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

The part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-37.

Pin

4/1

4/12

4/13

4/14

4/15

4/16

4/17

4/18

4/5

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/2

4/3

4/4

4/9

4/10

4/11

Signal Type

C_ECAN_L

C_ECAN_GND

C_ECAN_H

Digital Input_SFP_11

Digital Input_SFP_12

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06

Digital Output_HP_LS_02

Digital Input_FLEX_E1

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_04

Frequency_SFP_10

PWM_FPO_01

Digital Input__FLEX_19

Digital Input_SFP_03

Digital Input_SFP_04

Digital Input_FLEX_17

Digital Input_FLEX_21

Digital Input_FLEX_18

Function

Engine CAN (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Engine CAN (+)

Not Populated

Wait to Start Lamp (Grid Heater)

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Clutch Released/PTO Request for AGS2

Deceleration Lamp

Not Used

Vehicle Speed Output

—

Not Populated

Trans Neutral Switch

DPF Regeneration Switch

AGS2 PTO Feedback

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-36 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Vocational Applications

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-37 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

DDC Part Number

018 545 68 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-41

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Coach Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #1 connector (18–pin) for coach applications are listed in Table 3-38.

The part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are listed in Table 3-39.

Pin

1/1

1/9

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/5

1/6

1/7

1/8

1/16

1/17

1/18

Signal Type

Digital Input_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_05

Digital Output_LP_LS_02

Digital Output_LP_LS_01

Digital Input_SFP_06

SFP_08

SFP_07

PWM_FPO_02

Digital Input_FLEX_20

Digital Input_FLEX_08

Digital Input_FLEX_03

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_04

Digital Input_FLEX_05

Digital Input_FLEX_06

Digital Input_FLEX_07

SFP_01

Function

Transmission Retarder Active

Park Brake Interlock

Idle Validation Switch 2 (throttle active)

Throttle Position Sensor Ground

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Idle Validation Switch 1 (idle active)

Throttle Position Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor Supply

Not Used

Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1

Limiter 0

Set / Coast Enable

MIL Lamp

Cruise Control Enable

Stop Engine Override

Resume / Accel Enable

Throttle Inhibit

Run Start

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-38 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Coach Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-39 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-42

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #2 connector (18–pin) for coach applications are listed in Table 3-40.

The part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-41.

Pin

2/1

2/12

2/13

2/14

2/15

2/16

2/17

2/18

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/10

2/11

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/5

Signal Type

Battery (+) PSU (KL_30)

Battery (-) PSU (KL_31)

Battery (+) Switched PSU

K_DIAG_C

J1708_A_C

J1708_B_C

Digital Input_FLEX_15

Digital Input_FLEX_16

Digital Input_FLEX_09

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_03

Digital Input_FLEX_10

Digital Input_FLEX_11

Digital Input_FLEX_12

Digital Input_FLEX_13

Digital Input_FLEX_14

VCAN_L_C

VCAN_GND_C

VCAN_H_C

Function

Main Battery +12 V

Main Battery Ground

Ignition

K-line

J1587 (+)

J1587 (–)

Service Brake Released Switch

Not Used

Amber Warning Lamp

Limiter 1

A/C Status

Fan Override

Engine Brake Low

Engine Brake Medium

J1939 (-)

J1939 Shield

J1939 (+)

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-40 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Coach Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-41 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-43

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #3 connector (21–pin) for

coach applications are listed in Table 3-42.

The part numbers for the #3 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-43.

Pin

3/1

3/12

3/13

3/14

3/15

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/5

3/19

3/20

3/21

Signal Type

Analog_In_01

Analog_GND

Analog__SUP_5V

Analog_In_02

Analog_Out_01

Analog_Out_02

Digital Output_HP_HS_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_02

Digital Output_HP_LS_01

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02

SFP_14

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04

SFP_09

SF_VGND

Analog_In_SFP_13

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_02

Not Used

Function

Not Used

Sensor Return

Sensor Supply

PTO

Not Used

Low Battery Voltage Lamp

Low Coolant Level Sensor

Not Used

Vehicle Speed (+)

Vehicle Speed (-)

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Red Stop Lamp

Starter Lockout/Run Signal

Not Used

Not Populated

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-42 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Coach Application

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-43 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-44

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #4 connector (18–pin) for coach applications are listed in Table 3-44.

The part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-45.

Pin

4/1

4/12

4/13

4/14

4/15

4/16

4/17

4/18

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/9

4/10

4/11

4/2

4/3

4/4

4/5

Signal Type

C_ECAN_L

C_ECAN_GND

C_ECAN_H

Digital Input_SFP_11

Digital Input_SFP_12

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06

Digital Output_HP_LS_02

Digital Input_FLEX_E1

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_04

Frequency_SFP_10

PWM_FPO_01

Digital Input__FLEX_19

Digital Input_SFP_03

Digital Input_SFP_04

Digital Input_FLEX_17

Digital Input_FLEX_21

Digital Input_FLEX_18

Function

Engine CAN (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Engine CAN (+)

Not Populated

Wait to Start Lamp (Grid Heater)

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Clutch Released

Deceleration Lamp

Vehicle Power Shutdown

Not Used

—

Not Populated

Neutral Switch

DPF Regeneration Switch

Engine Brake Disable

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-44 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Coach Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-45 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

DDC Part Number

018 545 68 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-45

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Fire Truck Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #1 connector (18–pin) for fi re truck applications are listed in Table 3-46.

The part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are listed in Table 3-47.

Pin

1/1

1/9

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/5

1/6

1/7

1/8

1/16

1/17

1/18

Signal Type

Digital Input_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_05

Digital Output_LP_LS_02

Digital Output_LP_LS_01

Digital Input_SFP_06

SFP_08

SFP_07

PWM_FPO_02

Digital Input_FLEX_20

Digital Input_FLEX_08

Digital Input_FLEX_03

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_04

Digital Input_FLEX_05

Digital Input_FLEX_06

Digital Input_FLEX_07

SFP_01

Function

Transmission Retarder Active

Parking Brake

Idle Validation Switch 2 (throttle active)

Throttle Position Sensor Ground

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Idle Validation Switch 1 (idle active)

Throttle Position Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor Supply

Not Used

Limiter 0

Set / Coast Enable

MIL Lamp

Cruise Enable

Stop Engine Override

Resume / Accel Enable

Throttle Inhibit

Run Start

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-46 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-47 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-46

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #2 connector (18–pin) for fi re truck applications are listed in Table 3-48.

The part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-49.

Pin

2/1

2/12

2/13

2/14

2/15

2/16

2/17

2/18

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/10

2/11

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/5

Signal Type

Battery (+) PSU (KL_30)

Battery (-) PSU (KL_31)

Battery (+) Switched PSU

K_DIAG_C

J1708_A_C

J1708_B_C

Digital Input_FLEX_15

Digital Input_FLEX_16

Digital Input_FLEX_09

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_03

Digital Input_FLEX_10

Digital Input_FLEX_11

Digital Input_FLEX_12

Digital Input_FLEX_13

Digital Input_FLEX_14

VCAN_L_C

VCAN_GND_C

VCAN_H_C

Function

Main Battery +12 V

Main Battery Ground

Ignition

K-line

J1587 (+)

J1587 (–)

Not Used

Remote Throttle Select Switch

Remote PTO Select Switch

Amber Warning Lamp

Limiter 1

A/C Status

Fan Override

Engine Brake Low

Engine Brake Medium

J1939 (-)

J1939 Shield

J1939 (+)

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-48 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-49 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-47

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #3 connector (21–pin) for fi re truck

applications are listed in Table 3-50.

The part numbers for the #3 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-51.

Pin

3/1

3/12

3/13

3/14

3/15

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/5

3/19

3/20

3/21

Signal Type

Analog_In_01

Analog_GND

Analog__SUP_5V

Analog_In_02

Analog_Out_01

Analog_Out_02

Digital Output_HP_HS_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_02

Digital Output_HP_LS_01

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02

SFP_14

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04

SFP_09

SF_VGND

Analog_In_SFP_13

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_02

Not Used

Function

Not Used

Sensor Return

Sensor Supply

PTO

Not Used

Engine Brake Active

Coolant Level Low Lamp

Low Coolant Level Sensor

Low Oil Pressure Lamp

Vehicle Speed (+)

Vehicle Speed (-)

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Red Stop Lamp

Starter Lockout

Not Used

Not Populated

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-50 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-51 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-48

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #4 connector (18–pin) for fi re truck applications are listed in Table 3-52.

The part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-53.

Pin

4/1

4/12

4/13

4/14

4/15

4/16

4/17

4/18

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/9

4/10

4/11

4/2

4/3

4/4

4/5

Signal Type

C_ECAN_L

C_ECAN_GND

C_ECAN_H

Digital Input_SFP_11

Digital Input_SFP_12

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06

Digital Output_HP_LS_02

Digital Input_FLEX_E1

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_04

Frequency_SFP_10

PWM_FPO_01

Digital Input__FLEX_19

Digital Input_SFP_03

Digital Input_SFP_04

Digital Input_FLEX_17

Digital Input_FLEX_21

Digital Input_FLEX_18

Function

Engine CAN (+)

Engine CAN Shield

Engine CAN (+)

Not Populated

Wait to Start Lamp (Grid Heater)

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Not Used

—

Not Populated

Neutral Switch

DPF Regeneration Switch

Engine Brake Disable

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-52 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Fire Truck Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-53 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

DDC Part Number

018 545 68 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-49

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Crane Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #1 connector (18–pin) for crane applications are listed in Table 3-54.

The part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are listed in Table 3-55.

Pin

1/1

1/9

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/5

1/6

1/7

1/8

1/16

1/17

1/18

Signal Type

Digital Input_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_05

Digital Output_LP_LS_02

Digital Output_LP_LS_01

Digital Input_SFP_06

SFP_08

SFP_07

PWM_FPO_02

Digital Input_FLEX_20

Digital Input_FLEX_08

Digital Input_FLEX_03

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_04

Digital Input_FLEX_05

Digital Input_FLEX_06

Digital Input_FLEX_07

SFP_01

Function

Transmission Retarder Active

Park Brake Interlock

Idle Validation Switch 2 (throttle active)

Throttle Position Sensor Ground

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Idle Validation Switch 1 (idle active)

Throttle Position Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor Supply

Not Used

Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1

Limiter 0

Set / Coast Enable

MIL Lamp

Cruise Control Enable

Stop Engine Override

Resume / Accel Enable

Throttle Inhibit

Run Start

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-54 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Crane Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-55 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-50

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #2 connector (18–pin) for crane applications are listed in Table 3-56.

The part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-57.

Pin

2/1

2/12

2/13

2/14

2/15

2/16

2/17

2/18

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/10

2/11

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/5

Signal Type

Battery (+) PSU (KL_30)

Battery (-) PSU (KL_31)

Battery (+) Switched PSU

K_DIAG_C

J1708_A_C

J1708_B_C

Digital Input_FLEX_15

Digital Input_FLEX_16

Digital Input_FLEX_09

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_03

Digital Input_FLEX_10

Digital Input_FLEX_11

Digital Input_FLEX_12

Digital Input_FLEX_13

Digital Input_FLEX_14

VCAN_L_C

VCAN_GND_C

VCAN_H_C

Function

Main Battery +12 V

Main Battery Ground

Ignition

K-line

J1587 (+)

J1587 (–)

Service Brake Released Switch

Remote Throttle Select

Remote PTO Enable Switch

Amber Warning Lamp

Limiter 1

A/C Status

Fan Override

Engine Brake Low

Engine Brake Medium

J1939 (-)

J1939 Shield

J1939 (+)

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-56 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Crane Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-57 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-51

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #3 connector (21–pin) for crane

applications are listed in Table 3-58.

The part numbers for the #3 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-59.

Pin

3/1

3/12

3/13

3/14

3/15

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/5

3/19

3/20

3/21

Signal Type

Analog_In_01

Analog_GND

Analog__SUP_5V

Analog_In_02

Analog_Out_01

Analog_Out_02

Digital Output_HP_HS_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_02

Digital Output_HP_LS_01

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02

SFP_14

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04

SFP_09

SF_VGND

Analog_In_SFP_13

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_02

Not Used

Function

—

Sensor Return

Sensor Supply

PTO

Not Used

Engine Brake Active

Low Battery Voltage Lamp

Low Coolant Level Sensor

Cruise Active Lamp

Vehicle Speed (+)

Vehicle Speed (-)

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Red Stop Lamp

Not Used

Not Populated

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-58 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Crane Application

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-59 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-52

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller #4 connector (18–pin) for crane applications are listed in Table 3-60

The part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-61.

Pin

4/1

4/12

4/13

4/14

4/15

4/16

4/17

4/18

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/9

4/10

4/11

4/2

4/3

4/4

4/5

Signal Type

C_ECAN_L

C_ECAN_GND

C_ECAN_H

Digital Input_SFP_11

Digital Input_SFP_12

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06

Digital Output_HP_LS_02

Digital Input_FLEX_E1

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_04

Frequency_SFP_10

PWM_FPO_01

Digital Input__FLEX_19

Digital Input_SFP_03

Digital Input_SFP_04

Digital Input_FLEX_17

Digital Input_FLEX_21

Digital Input_FLEX_18

Function

Engine CAN (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Engine CAN (+)

Not Populated

Wait to Start Lamp (Grid Heater)

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Clutch Released

Deceleration Lamp

Vehicle Power Shutdown

Not Used

—

Not Populated

Trans Neutral Switch

DPF Regeneration Switch

RPM Freeze

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-60 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Crane Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-61 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

DDC Part Number

A 018 545 68 26

A 013 545 76 26

A 013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-53

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Transit Bus Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #1 connector (18–pin) for transit bus applications are listed in Table 3-62.

The part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are listed in Table 3-63.

Pin

1/1

1/9

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/2

1/3

1/4

1/5

1/6

1/7

1/8

1/16

1/17

1/18

Signal Type

Digital Input_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_05

Digital Output_LP_LS_02

Digital Output_LP_LS_01

Digital Input_SFP_06

SFP_08

SFP_07

PWM_FPO_02

Digital Input_FLEX_20

Digital Input_FLEX_08

Digital Input_FLEX_03

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01

Digital Input_FLEX_04

Digital Input_FLEX_05

Digital Input_FLEX_06

Digital Input_FLEX_07

SFP_01

Function

Transmission Retarder Active

Park Brake Interlock

Idle Validation Switch 2 (throttle active)

Throttle Position Sensor Ground

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Idle Validation Switch 1 (idle active)

Throttle Position Sensor

Throttle Position Sensor Supply

Not Used

Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1

Limiter 0

Not Used

MIL Lamp

Not Used

Stop Engine Override

Not Used

Throttle Inhibit

Run Start

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-62 Connector #1 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-63 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-54

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #2 connector (18–pin) for transit bus applications are listed in Table 3-64.

The part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-65.

Pin

2/1

2/12

2/13

2/14

2/15

2/16

2/17

2/18

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/10

2/11

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/5

Signal Type

Battery (+) PSU (KL_30)

Battery (-) PSU (KL_31)

Battery (+) Switched PSU

K_DIAG_C

J1708_A_C

J1708_B_C

Digital Input_FLEX_15

Digital Input_FLEX_16

Digital Input_FLEX_09

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_03

Digital Input_FLEX_10

Digital Input_FLEX_11

Digital Input_FLEX_12

Digital Input_FLEX_13

Digital Input_FLEX_14

VCAN_L_C

VCAN_GND_C

VCAN_H_C

Function

Main Battery +12 V

Main Battery Ground

Ignition

K-line

J1587 (+)

J1587 (–)

Not Used

Amber Warning Lamp

Limiter 1

A/C Status

Not Used

J1939 (-)

J1939 Shield

J1939 (+)

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-64 Connector #2 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-65 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-55

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #3 connector (21–pin) for

transit bus applications are listed in Table 3-66.

The part numbers for the #3 connector, Key A and terminals are listed in Table 3-67.

Pin

3/1

3/12

3/13

3/14

3/15

3/16

3/17

3/18

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/5

3/19

3/20

3/21

Signal Type

Analog_In_01

Analog_GND

Analog__SUP_5V

Analog_In_02

Analog_Out_01

Analog_Out_02

Digital Output_HP_HS_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_02

Digital Output_HP_LS_01

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02

SFP_14

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04

SFP_09

SF_VGND

Analog_In_SFP_13

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02

Digital Input_SFP_02

Not Used

Function

Not Used

Sensor Return

Sensor Supply

PTO

Not Used

Coolant Level Low Lamp

Low Coolant Level Sensor

Low Oil Pressure Lamp

Vehicle Speed (+)

Vehicle Speed (-)

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Red Stop Lamp

Starter Lockout/Run Signal

Not Used

Not Populated

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-66 Connector #3 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-67 Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

3-56

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC) #4 connector (18–pin) for

transit bus applications are Table 3-66, and listed in Table 3-68.

The part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are listed in Table 3-69.

Pin

4/1

4/12

4/13

4/14

4/15

4/16

4/17

4/18

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/9

4/10

4/11

4/2

4/3

4/4

4/5

Signal Type

C_ECAN_L

C_ECAN_GND

C_ECAN_H

Digital Input_SFP_11

Digital Input_SFP_12

Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06

Digital Output_HP_LS_02

Digital Input_FLEX_E1

Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01

Digital Output_HP_HS_04

Frequency_SFP_10

PWM_FPO_01

Digital Input__FLEX_19

Digital Input_SFP_03

Digital Input_SFP_04

Digital Input_FLEX_17

Digital Input_FLEX_21

Digital Input_FLEX_18

Function

Engine CAN (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Engine CAN (+)

Not Populated

Wait to Start Lamp (Grid Heater)

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Not Used

Deceleration Lamp

Vehicle Power Shutdown

Not Used

—

Not Populated

Neutral Switch

DPF Regeneration Switch

Not Used

Connector

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Table 3-68 Connector #4 Pin Assignments – Transit Bus Application

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-69 Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

DDC Part Number

A 018 545 68 26

A 013 545 76 26

A 013 545 78 26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-57

HARDWARE AND WIRING

VIH to MCM Connector Wiring

The wiring for the 21–pin MCM connector is listed in Table 3-70. The side of the connector shown is looking into the pins.

Connector Pin

21/1

21/9

21/10

21/11

21/12

21/13

21/14

21/15

21/2

21/3

21/4

21/5

21/6

21/7

21/8

21/16

21/17

21/18

21/19

21/20

21/21

Signal Type

CAN2L

CAN2GND

CAN2H

CAN2GND

KL31

KL15

KL31

CAN1GND

KL30

CAN1H

KL30

CAN1GND

Not Used

KDiag_S

CAN1L

KL50

START_B

Table 3-70 21–Pin Connector to the MCM

Function

Not Used

Battery (-)

IGN

Battery (-)

Engine CAN Shield

Battery (+)

Engine CAN +

Battery (+)

Not Used

Engine CAN –

Crank Start Input

Crank Activation Output

Front

Looking into the Pins on the Harness

Part

Connector

1.0 – 2.5 mm Contact (single)

0.5 – 1.0 mm Contact (single)

Seal (2.2 – 3.0 mm 2 insulation diameter)

Seal (1.2 – 2.1 mm 2 insulation diameter)

Backshell

Cavity Plug

Table 3-71 21–Pin Connector to the MCM Part Numbers

DDC Part Number

024 545 76 26

014 545 82 26

014 545 83 26

000 545 29 39

000 545 28 39

001 545 79 83

000 545 62 80

3-58

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The part numbers for the 31–pin MCM pigtail connector are listed in Table 3-72.

Part

Connector

Terminal

Seals

Cavity Plugs

Backshell

Table 3-72 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector Part Numbers

DDC Part Number

008 545 31 26

006 545 52 26

000 545 72 80

000 545 62 80

000 546 99 35

The pinout for the 31–pin pigtail on the Engine Harness is listed in Table 3-73. The OEM is

responsible for wiring to this connector.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-59

HARDWARE AND WIRING

31–pin 120–pin

31/5

31/6

31/7

31/8

31/1

31/2

31/3

31/4

31/9

31/10

31/11

31/12

31/13

31/14

31/15

31/16

31/17

—

120/70

120/33

120/98

—

120/71

120/67

120/96

120/29

Function

Spare

Power Supply (IGN)*

Fuel Heater Supply #1†

Spare

Fuel Heater Supply #2†

Spare

Power Supply Ground*

Ether Start

Fan Control #2 – High of Two-speed

Fan or Variable Speed Fan

Single Speed Fan or Low for

Two-speed Fan

Fuel Heater Ground #1†

Spare

Water-in-Fuel Sensor Supply

Water-in-Fuel Sensor Ground

Engine Brake Solenoid Control

DOC Outlet Temp Sensor (Exhaust Gas

Temperature in Front of Particulate Trap)

DOC Inlet Temp Sensor

Series

—

31/18 120/89 X

31/19

31/20

31/21

31/22

31/23

31/24

31/25

120/115

—

120/91

120/47

120/88

—

31/26

31/27

120/57

120/86

31/28 120/114

31/29 120/85

DPF Outlet Temp Sensor( Exhaust Gas

Temperature After Particulate Trap)

Fuel Heater Ground #2†

Spare

Power Supply (Eng Brk, Fan, Ether)

Fan Speed

Sensor Ground

Spare

Water-in-Fuel Sensor

TCI Temp

Sensor Ground

Sensor Supply

—

31/30 120/30

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust

Gas Pressure After Particulate Filter)

31/31 120/118

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor (Exhaust

Gas Pressure Before Particulate Filter)

*Fused at 15 amps

† Optional for MBE 900 and HDE. Must use 14 AWG wire and fuse at 20A.

Table 3-73 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector

MBE 900

—

HDE

—

MBE 4000

—

3-60

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

VIH Power Wiring

The OEM-supplied VIH power wiring (see Figure 3-11) supplies 12 volts to the CPC and MCM.

The system must be sourced directly from the battery. The terminals are designed to accept 14

AWG wire with an insulation diameter of 3.2 mm minimum and 5.6 mm maximum.

Figure 3-11 Power Wiring

Power and ground must be sourced directly from the battery. An electrically solid connection to the battery or bus bar is required so the battery can fi lter electrical noise from the power lines. Power for other vehicle systems must not be sourced from the VIH power wires.

Do not use chassis ground.

NOTE:

The ground wire must be electrically separate from chassis ground.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-61

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Power and ground bus bars may be used. The bus bar must be connected to the battery posts with

0 AWG or larger wire depending upon the total vehicle current requirement. The connecting wires must be as short as possible to minimize circuit resistance.

Do not connect the ground wire to the chassis ground. The bus bar and all related MCM and CPC ground circuity must not be any part of the chassis ground circuit.

Provide maximum physical separation of the VIH power wiring from other vehicle electrical systems. Other electrical system wires should ideally be at least three feet away from the VIH power wiring and should not be parallel to the VIH power wiring. This will eliminate coupling electromagnetic energy from other systems into the VIH power wiring.

NOTICE:

Connection to reverse polarity will damage the system if not properly fused.

A 40 amp fuse must be used and installed as close to the battery as possible.

The conductor must be annealed copper not aluminum and must comply with the industry standard,

SAE J1128 JAN 95 Low Tension Primary Cable

. Contact the Society of Automotive

Engineers to obtain documents, refer to Appendix for their address.

Splices must be soldered and sealed with a waterproof insulator. Alpha FIT-300, Raychem

TAT-125 or any equivalent heat shrink - dual wall epoxy encapsulating adhesive polyole fi n is required.

Detroit Diesel Corporation recommends color coding. Alternatively, wires may be hot stamped with the cavity number.

3-62

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Wire Resistances

VIH power terminals require 14 AWG wire. The total resistance of the power harness cannot exceed 60 m Ω . The characteristics for Te fl on coated and GXL type wire gauges are listed in listed in Table 3-74.

SAE Wire

Gauge

Metric

Gauge #

Area mm 2

1.129

1.859

2.929

4.663

7.277

Resistance m Ω /m

15.300

9.290

5.900

3.720

2.400

Table 3-74 Wire Characteristics

Resistance m Ω /ft @ 20°C

4.66

2.83

1.80

1.13

0.73

Resistance m Ω /ft

@ 120°C

6.50

3.94

2.50

1.58

1.02

Diameter mm

0.72

1.18

1.86

2.97

4.63

Total power harness resistance is determined by shorting together the eight terminals in the ECU connector, and then measuring the resistance from the battery (+) to battery (-) terminal at the maximum operating temperature (105°C). Disconnect the harness from the batteries before measuring the resistance.

Communications – SAE J1939 Data Link

SAE J1939 Data Link+, SAE J1939 Data Link-, and SAE J1939 Data Link Shield are used as the

J1939 communication link. J1939 cable is required for the J1939 data link. Termination resistors are required per the SAE speci fi cation. Refer to SAE J1939–11 for speci fi c requirements.

NOTICE:

The communication system operation will degenerate if the wrong cable is used.

The CPC connector pin assignments for SAE J1939 are listed in Table 3-75.

Pin

2/18

2/17

2/16

Signal Type

Data Link

Table 3-75 J1939 CPC to VIH Connector Pin Assignments

Function

SAE J1939 (+)

J1939 Shield

SAE J1939 (-)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-63

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The following SAE documents cover the SAE J1939 Data Link. Contact the Society of

Automotive Engineers to obtain documents, refer to Appendix C for their address.

SAE J1939

SAE J1939/11

Top Layer (Overview)

Physical Layer

SAE J1939/21

Data Link Layer

SAE J1939/71

Vehicle Application Layer

SAE J1939/01

Truck and Bus Applications

SAE J1939/73

Application Layer — Diagnostics

J1939 cable is available from the following sources:

Belden Electronics Division

2200 U.S. 27 South

Richmond, IN 47374

Phone: 1–800–235–3361 www.belden.com

Tyco Electronics Corporation

Raychem Wire & Harnessing

300 Constitution Drive

Menlo Park, CA 94025 www.raychem.com

3-64

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Communications – Proprietary Engine-CAN Data Link

The low speed proprietary Engine-CAN link between the MCM and the CPC must be a twisted shielded cable with 0.75 mm diameter wire (approximately 20 AWG), bundle shielded with drain wire and 30 twists per meter. The insulation is rated to 105°C. Termination resistors for the

Engine-CAN link are located in the CPC and MCM. The wiring for the MCM 21–pin connector and the CPC 18–pin #4 connector are listed in Table 3-76.

CPC 18–Pin #4 Connector

4/3

4/1

4/2

Function

Engine-CAN Data Link (+)

Engine-CAN Data Link (-)

Engine-CAN Data Link (Shield)

Table 3-76 Propriety Engine-CAN Data Link

MCM 21–Pin Connector

21/13

21/19

21/10

3.2.4 POWER SUPPLY – 12 VOLT SYSTEM

Normal operating voltage on a 12 V system for the CPC and MCM is 11-16 VDC.

NOTICE:

Operating the CPC or MCM over the voltage limits of 16 volts will cause damage to the CPC or MCM.

Operating the CPC and/or MCM between 8 and 11 volts may result in degraded engine operation.

(Transient operation in this range during engine starting is considered normal for 12 volt systems.)

NOTICE:

Reversing polarity will cause damage to the CPC and/or MCM if the Power Harness is not properly fused.

NOTE:

All output loads, ignition and CPC power must be powered from the same battery voltage source.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-65

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Average Current Draw

The maximum average current draw is listed in Table 3-77. This information should be used

to size the alternator.

System

MCM – Engine Loads

CPC – Vehicle Loads*

Crank

1.0 A avg

18.0 A peak

Maximum Average Current Draw

(12 V Nominal Supply)

Idle Full Load/Rated Speed

21.0 A avg

55.0 A peak

25.0 A avg

55.0 A peak

* Vehicle loads are controlled by the OEMs who can best determine the total maximum current draw for their installation.

Table 3-77 Maximum Average Current Draw

The current draw for a CPC con fi guration is listed in Table 3-78.

Con fi guration

CPC

Table 3-78

Condition

Ignition Off

Ignition On and Engine Stopped

Current Draw for CPC Con fi guration

Current

<1 mA

120 mA

The current draw for a MCM is listed in Table 3-79.

Con fi guration

Table 3-79

MCM

Condition

Ignition Off

Ignition On and Engine Stopped

Current Draw for MCM Con fi guration

Current

<1 mA

400 mA

Battery Isolator

A battery isolator is not required. However, some applications require a battery that is dedicated to the engine and completely isolated from the rest of the vehicle. Commercially available battery isolators can be used.

3-66

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Main Power Shutdown

The main power supply shutdown schematic shows the DDC approved method for main power

switch implementation. See Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Main Power Supply Shutdown

NOTE:

Switches must remain closed for 30 seconds after ignition is off for the MCM and CPC to write non-volatile data.

NOTE:

It is recommended that both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads be disconnected.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-67

HARDWARE AND WIRING

NOTE:

Disconnecting positive power is not suf fi cient to isolate the CPC for welding purposes.

NOTICE:

When welding, the following must be done to avoid damage to the electronic controls or the engine:

□ Both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads must be disconnected before welding.

□ The welding ground wire must be in close proximity to welding location - the engine must never be used as a grounding point.

□ Welding on the engine or engine mounted components is

NEVER recommended.

NOTE:

The alternator should be connected directly to the battery for isolation purposes.

3.2.5 FUSES

A Battery (+) fuse and an ignition circuit fuse must be provided by the vehicle wiring harness.

Blade-type automotive fuses are normally utilized; however, manual or automatic reset circuit breakers which meet the following requirements are also acceptable. The fuse voltage rating must be compatible with the CPC – MCM's maximum operating voltage of 16 volts.

FIRE

To avoid injury from fi re, additional loads should not be placed on existing circuits. Additional loads may blow the fuse (or trip the circuit breaker) and cause the circuit to overheat and burn.

3-68

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

FIRE

To avoid injury from fi re, do not replace an existing fuse with a larger amperage fuse. The increased current may overheat the wiring, causing the insulation and surrounding materials to burn.

The ignition fuse current rating must be sized for the loads utilized in each application; however, a rating of between 5 and 10 amps is usually suf fi cient.

The Battery (+) fuse current rating must satisfy two criteria:

□ Must not open during normal operation

□ Must open before the MCM or CPC is damaged during a reverse battery condition

Bussmann ATC-30 and Delphi Packard Electric Systems MaxiFuse 30 amp rated fuses or equivalent will satisfy these requirements. Acceptable blow times versus current and temperature derating characteristics are listed in Table 3-80 and Table 3-81.

% of Rated Fuse Current

100%

135%

200%

Minimum Blow Time

100 hours

1 minutes

6 seconds

Table 3-80 Fuse Current and Blow Time

Maximum Blow Time

30 minute

40 seconds

Temperature

-40°C

+25°C

+120°C

Table 3-81 Fuse Temperature and Current

% of Rated Fuse Current

110% max

100%

80% min

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-69

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.2.6 CONNECTORS

There are three 18–pin connectors and one 21–pin connector to the CPC. The OEM is responsible for the four connectors at the CPC, the 21–pin connector at the MCM, the 31–pin MCM pigtail connector and the 10–pin DPF connector.

NOTE:

The CPC connectors are not water tight and cannot be subject to water spray.

The part numbers for the CPC connectors, the 21–pin connector at the MCM, the 31–pin MCM pigtail connector and the 10–pin DPF connector are listed in the following tables.

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - B Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-82 Connector #1, 18–pin Connector, B Key

DDC Part Number

018 545 67 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

Table 3-83 Connector #2, 18–pin Connector, A Key

DDC Part Number

013 545 64 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

Part

CPC - 21 Pin Connector - A Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

DDC Part Number

013 545 65 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

Table 3-84 CPC Connector #3, 21–pin Connector, Key A

Part

CPC - 18 Pin Connector - C Key

CPC - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single)

CPC - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (single)

DDC Part Number

018 545 68 26

013 545 76 26

013 545 78 26

Table 3-85 CPC Connector #4, 18–pin Connector, Key C

3-70

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Part

Connector

1.0 – 2.5 mm Contact (single)

0.5 – 1.0 mm Contact (single)

Seal (2.2 – 3.0 mm 2 insulation diameter)

Seal (1.2 – 2.1 mm 2 insulation diameter)

Backshell

Cavity Plug

Table 3-86 21–Pin Connector to the MCM Part Numbers

DDC Part Number

024 545 76 26

014 545 82 26

014 545 83 26

000 545 29 39

000 545 28 39

001 545 79 83

000 545 62 80

Part

Connector

Terminal

Seals

Cavity Plugs

Backshell

Table 3-87 31–pin MCM Pigtail Connector Part Numbers

DDC Part Number

008 545 31 26

006 545 52 26

000 545 72 80

000 545 62 80

000 546 99 35

Part

10-Pin Connector

Terminal (Male)

Plug

2-Pin Connector

Terminal (Female)

DDC Part Numbers

23531613

23531614

23531615

23537171

23531617

Table 3-88 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin and 2–pin Connector —

Horizontal Mount ATD

Part

Connector

Terminal

Plug

DDC Part Numbers

23531613

23531614

23531615

Table 3-89 DDC Part Numbers for the DPF 10-pin Connector — Vertical Mount

ATD

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-71

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Data Link Connector

The SAE J1708/J1587 nine-pin data link connector is required. DDC recommends that the

OEM-supplied Data Link Connector be conveniently positioned in a well protected location facilitating subsequent DDDL 7.0 usage (i.e., reprogramming, diagnostics, etc.).

REQUIRED: The J1939 data link must be wired to this connector.

The components listed in Table 3-90 are required to incorporate a SAE J1939/J1587 Data Link in a VIH for diagnostic and reprogramming devices.

Component

Nine-pin Deutsch Connector

Connector Cover

Two (2) Cavity Plugs

Seven (7) Terminals

DDC Part Number

23529496

23529497

23507136

23507132

Deutsch Part Number

HD10-9-1939P

HDC 16–9

114017

0460-202-16141

Table 3-90 VIH Components to Incorporate an SAE J1939/J1587 Data Link

The following illustration shows the wiring for the nine-pin connector (see see Figure 3-13).

Figure 3-13 Wiring for 9-pin Data Link Connector

The SAE J1587/J1708 Data Link must be twisted pairs. The twists are a minimum of 12 turns per foot (305 mm). The maximum length for the SAE J1587/J1708 Data Link is 130 ft (40 m).

3-72

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.3 WIRES AND WIRING

Detroit Diesel Corporation recommends color coding and hot stamping wire numbers in contrasting colors at intervals of four inches or less.

3.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

NOTE:

Avoid renumbering DDC circuits since all troubleshooting guides reference the circuit numbers shown in the schematic. DDC suggests including a pre fi x or suf fi x with the

DDC circuit numbers when con fl icts exist.

3.3.2 GENERAL WIRE

All wires used in conjunction with DDEC VI must meet the following criteria:

NOTICE:

DDC does not recommend using any type of terminal lubricant or grease compounds. These products may cause dirt or other harmful substances to be retained in the connector. DDC has not tested these products and cannot stand behind their use.

NOTICE:

Insulation must be free of nicks.

Criteria: Wires

Tape, conduit, loom or a combination thereof must be used to protect the wires.

Refer to sections 3.4 and 3.5.

All wires must be annealed copper wire (not aluminum).

All wires must comply with SAE J1128.

All wires must be insulated with cross-link polyethylene (XLPE) such as GXL, or any self-extinguishing insulation having a minimum rating of -40°C (-40°F) to 125°C (257°F).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-73

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.3.3 CRIMP TOOLS

The part numbers for the crimp tools for working with the MCM and CPC connectors are listed in Table 3-91.

Description

Extraction Tool

Hand Crimp Tool

Crimp Dies for 0.5 mm – 1.0 mm Terminals

Crimp Dies for 1.0 mm – 2.5 mm Terminals

Table 3-91 Crimp Tools

Part Number

726503–1

169400–0

734262–0

169917–0

3.3.4 DEUTSCH TERMINAL INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

The method of terminal installation and removal varies. The following sections cover Deutsch terminal installation and removal.

Deutsch Terminal Installation Guidelines

Deutsch connectors have cable seals molded into the connector. These connectors are push-to-seat connectors with cylindrical terminals. The diagnostic connector terminals are gold plated for clarity.

NOTICE:

Improper selection and use of crimp tools have varying adverse effects on crimp geometry and effectiveness. Proper installation of terminals require specialized tools. Do not attempt to use alternative tools.

The crimp tool to use in Deutsch terminal installation is J–34182 (Kent-Moore part number).

NOTICE:

Terminal crimps must be made with the Deutsch crimp tool P/N:

HDT-48-00 to assure gas tight connections.

NOTICE:

If a separate seal is required, be sure to install the seal onto the wire before stripping the insulation.

3-74

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Use the following instructions for installing Deutsch terminals:

1. Strip approximately .25 inch (6 mm) of insulation from the cable.

2. Remove the lock clip, raise the wire gage selector, and rotate the knob to the number matching the gage wire that is being used.

3. Lower the selector and insert the lock clip.

4. Position the contact so that the crimp barrel is 1/32 of an inch above the four indenters.

See Figure 3-14. Crimp the cable.

Figure 3-14 Setting Wire Gage Selector and Positioning the Contact

5. Grasp the contact approximately one inch behind the contact crimp barrel. Hold the

connector with the rear grommet facing you. See Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Pushing Contact Into Grommet

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-75

HARDWARE AND WIRING

6. Push the contact into the grommet until a positive stop is felt. See Figure 3-15. A slight

tug will con fi

rm that it is properly locked into place. See Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 Locking Terminal Into Connector

Deutsch Terminal Removal

The appropriate size removal tool should be used when removing cables from connectors. The proper removal tools are listed in Table 3-92.

Table 3-92

Tool

Removing (12 AWG)

Removing (16-18 AWG)

Kent-Moore Part Number

J–37451

J–34513-1

Removal Tools for Deutsch Terminals

3-76

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Remove Deutsch terminals as follows:

1. With the rear insert toward you, snap the appropriate size remover tool over the cable of

contact to be removed. See Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Removal Tool Position

2. Slide the tool along the cable into the insert cavity until it engages and resistance is felt.

Do not twist or insert tool at an angle. See Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18 Removal Tool Insertion

3. Pull contact cable assembly out of the connector. Keep reverse tension on the cable and forward tension on the tool.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-77

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.3.5 SPLICING GUIDELINES

The following are guidelines which may be used for splices. The selection of crimpers and splice connectors is optional. Select a high quality crimper equivalent to the Kent-Moore tool,

J–38706, and commercially available splice clips.

The recommended technique for splicing and repairing circuits (other than power and ignition circuits) is a clipped and soldered splice. Alternatively, any method that produces a high quality, tight (mechanically and electronically sound) splice with durable insulation is considered to be acceptable.

Clipped and Soldered Splicing Method

The tools required are listed in Table 3-93.

Tool

Heat Gun

Sn 60 solder with rosin core fl ux

Wire Stripper

Splice Clips (commercially available)

Heat Shrink Tubing

Table 3-93 Recommended Splicing Tools

Part Number

Kent-Moore J–35615 or equivalent

Wire size dependent

Raychem HTAT or equivalent

Criteria: Splicing Straight Leads

No more than one strand in a 16 strand wire may be cut or missing.

Use Sn 60 solder with rosin core fl ux.

The exposed wire must be clean before the splice is soldered.

3-78

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Soldering splice connectors is optional. To solder splice connectors:

1. Position the leads, so one overlaps the other. See Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19 Positioning the Leads

2. Secure the leads with a commercially available clip and hand tool. See Figure 3-20.

Figure 3-20 Securing the Leads With a Clip

3. Use a suitable electronic soldering iron to heat the wires. Apply the solder to the heated wire and clip (not to the soldering iron) allowing suf fi cient solder fl ow into the splice joint.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-79

HARDWARE AND WIRING

4. Pull on wire to assure crimping and soldering integrity. The criteria listed in Table 3-94 must be met.

Table 3-94

Wire Gage

14 AWG

16 AWG

18 AWG

Must Withstand Applied Load

45 lb (200 N)

27 lb (120 N)

20 lb (90 N)

Applied Load Criteria for Terminals

5. Loop the lead back over the spliced joint and tape. See Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-21 Recommended Strain Relief of Spliced Joint

Splicing and Repairing Straight Leads-Alternate Method 1

The tools required are listed in Table 3-95.

Tool

Heat Gun

Wire Stripper

Splice Clips (commercially available)

Heat Shrink Tubing

Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (12 AWG)

Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (18 AWG)

Terminal Crimper for Weather Pack

Terminal Crimper for Deutsch

Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 150

Table 3-95 Recommended Splicing Tools

Part Number

Kent-Moore J–35615 or equivalent

Wire size dependent

Raychem HTAT or equivalent

Kent-Moore J–38125-6

Kent-Moore J–39848

Kent-Moore J–35606

Kent-Moore J–34182

Kent-Moore J–35123

3-80

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Criteria: Splicing Straight Leads

No more than one strand in a 16 strand wire may be cut or missing.

The recommended method to splice straight leads follows:

1. Locate broken wire.

2. Remove insulation as required; be sure exposed wire is clean and not corroded.

3. Insert one wire into the splice clip until it butts against the clip. Stop and crimp (see

Figure 3-22, A).

4. Insert the other wire into the splice clip until it butts against the clip stop (see Figure

3-22, B).

NOTICE:

Any terminal that is cracked or ruptured is unacceptable as malfunctions may occur.

5. Visually inspect the splice clip for cracks, rupture, or other crimping damage. Remove and replace damaged clips before proceeding.

6. Pull on wire to ensure the splice integrity. The criteria listed in Table 3-96 must be met.

Wire Gage

14 AWG

16 AWG

18 AWG

Must Withstand Applied Load

45 lb (200 N)

27 lb (120 N)

20 lb (90 N)

Table 3-96 Applied Load Criteria for Terminals

7. Shrink the splice clip insulative casing with a heat gun to seal the splice (see Figure

3-22, C).

NOTICE:

Splices may not be closer than 12 in. (.3 m) apart to avoid degradation in circuit performance. Replace wire to avoid having splices closer than 12 in. (.3 m) apart.

8. Loop the lead back over the spliced joint and tape. See Figure 3-21.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-81

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Figure 3-22 Splicing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 1

3-82

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Splicing and Repairing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 2

This method is not allowed or recommended for power or ignition circuits. The tools required are listed in Table 3-97.

Tool

Heat Gun

Wire Stripper

Splice Clips (commercially available)

Heat Shrink Tubing

Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (12 AWG)

Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (18 AWG)

Terminal Crimper for Weather Pack

Terminal Crimper for Deutsch

Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 150

Table 3-97 Recommended Splicing Tools

Part Number

Kent-Moore J–35615 or equivalent

Wire size dependent

Raychem HTAT or equivalent

Kent-Moore J–38125-6

Kent-Moore J–39848

Kent-Moore J–35606

Kent-Moore J–34182

Kent-Moore J–35123

Criteria: Splicing Straight Leads

No more than one strand in a 16 strand wire may be cut or missing.

An acceptable option for splicing straight leads is:

1. Locate broken wire.

2. Remove insulation as required; be sure exposed wire is clean and not corroded.

3. Slide a sleeve of glue lined, shrink tubing (Raychem HTAT or equivalent) long enough to cover the splice clip on the wire and overlap the wire insulation, about .25 in. (6 mm) on

both sides (see Figure 3-23, A).

4. Insert one wire into splice clip until it butts against the splice clip. Stop and crimp (see

Figure 3-23, B).

5. Insert the remaining wires into the splice clip one at a time until each butts against the

splice clip; stop and crimp (see Figure 3-23, B).

NOTICE:

Any terminal that is cracked or ruptured is unacceptable as malfunctions may occur.

6. Visually inspect the terminal for cracks, rupture, or other crimping damage. Remove and replace damaged terminal before proceeding.

7. Slide the shrink tubing over the crimped splice clip (see Figure 3-23, C).

8. Shrink tubing with a heat gun to seal the splice (see Figure 3-23, D).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-83

HARDWARE AND WIRING

NOTICE:

A minimum of two layers of heat shrink tubing must be applied to splices that have more than one lead in or out.

9. Loop the lead back over the spliced joint and tape. See Figure 3-21.

Figure 3-23 Splicing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 2

3-84

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Shrink Wrap

Shrink wrap is required when splicing non insulated connections. Raychem HTAT or any equivalent heat shrink dual wall epoxy encapsulating adhesive polyole fi n is required. Shrink wrap must extend at least .25 in. (6 mm) over wire insulation past splice in both directions.

Alpha Wire Corporation

711 Lidgerwood Ave

P.O. Box 711

Tyco Electronics Corporation

Raychem Cable Identi fi cation and Protection

300 Constitution Drive

Elizabeth, New Jersey 07207-0711 Menlo Park, CA 94025

1-800-52ALPHA Phone: 1–800–926–2425 www.alphawire.com

www.raychem.com

To heat shrink wrap a splice:

NOTICE:

The heat shrink wrap must overlap the wire insulation about .25

in. (6 mm) on both sides of the splice.

1. Select the correct diameter to allow a tight wrap when heated.

2. Heat the shrink wrap with a heat gun; do not concentrate the heat in one location, but apply the heat over the entire length of shrink wrap until the joint is complete.

3. Repeat step 2 to apply a second layer of protection (if required by splicing guidelines).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-85

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Staggering Wire Splices

Position spliced wires properly as follows:

NOTICE:

You must stagger positions to prevent a large bulge in the harness and to prevent the wires from cha fi ng against each other.

1. Stagger the position of each splice (see Figure 3-24) so there is at least a 2.5 in. (65

mm) separation between splices.

Figure 3-24 The Correct and Incorrect Method of Staggering Multiple Splices

NOTICE:

A minimum of two layers of heat shrink tubing extending .25 in. (6 mm) past the splice must be used to complete the splice.

2. Heat shrink a minimum of two layers of heat shrink tubing.

3. Tape the spliced wires to each other. Refer to section 3.4.

3-86

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.4 CONDUIT AND LOOM

Conduit must be used to protect the harness cable and cable splices.

NOTICE:

The conduit must not cover any connectors, switches, relays, fuses, or sensors.

The following guidelines should be used when designing a harness:

NOTICE:

Wires should be sized and cut to near equal length prior to installing conduit.

□ The distance between the back of the connector or other listed devices to the end of the conduit should not exceed:

□

1.0 in. (25 mm) for a single connector/device

3 in. (75 mm) for multiple connectors/devices

□ All cable breakouts and conduit ends must be secured in place with conduit outlet rings or tape.

Criteria: Conduit and Loom

Due to the wide variety of operating conditions and environments, it is the responsibility of the OEM to select a conduit that will survive the conditions of the speci fi c applications. Flame retardant convoluted polypropylene conduit or equivalent may be used for most installations. Heat retardant nylon conduit or oil, water, acid, fi re, and abrasion resistant non-metallic loom conforming to SAE J562A

* is also acceptable. The diameter of conduit should be selected based on the number of wires being protected.

* If non-metallic loom is used, secure the ends with tightly wrapped nylon straps to prevent unraveling.

Conduit should cover the wires without binding and without being excessively large.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-87

HARDWARE AND WIRING

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3-88

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.5 TAPE AND TAPING

Tape must be used when conduit is utilized. Be sure to follow the tape manufacturers' guidelines.

The harness manufacturer may use tape under the harness covering (conduit or loom) to facilitate harness building. Tape must be tightly wrapped at all conduit interconnections with a minimum of

two layers (refer to section 3.4). Be sure to

fi rmly secure the start and fi nish ends of tape.

Criteria: Tape

NOTICE:

Black vinyl electrical tape should not be used in applications where the temperature exceeds 176°F (80°C).

In applications where the temperature doesn't exceed 176°F (80°C), black vinyl electrical tape that is fl ame retardant and weather resistant may be used.

In applications where temperature exceeds 176°F (80°C), vinyl electrical tape should not be used. For these applications, adhesive cloth backed, fl ame retardant polyethylene or fi ber glass tape (Delphi #PM-2203, Polikan #165 or equivalent) is recommended.

Criteria: Taping

The tape must extend a minimum of 1 in. (25 mm) past the conduit.

The tape must be crossed over butted conduit ends.

The tape must be extended a minimum of 1 in. (25 mm) in each direction at all branches.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-89

HARDWARE AND WIRING

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3-90

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.6 SENSORS

DDEC is designed to operate with several types of sensors as listed in Table 3-98.

Sensor Type

Variable Reluctance/Magnetic Pick-up

Thermistor

Variable Capacitance

Description

Used to monitor the crankshaft position, engine speed, turbo speed, and vehicle speed.

Used to monitor temperatures.

Used to monitor manifold, and oil gallery pressures.

Variable Resistance (Potentiometer) Used to sense throttle position.

Switch Used to signal coolant level.

Table 3-98 Sensor Types

The sensors integrated into the Engine Harness are factory-installed (refer to section 3.6.1). The

sensors integrated into the Vehicle Interface Harness are installed by the OEM (refer to section

3.6.2).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-91

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.6.1 FACTORY-INSTALLED SENSORS

The sensors integrated into the factory-installed Engine Harness are listed in Table 3-99.

Sensor Function

Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP Sensor) Indicates a speci fi c cylinder in the fi ring order.

Crankshaft Position Sensor

(CKP Sensor)

DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor

DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor

DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor

DOC Inlet Temperature

DOC Outlet Temperature

Senses crankshaft position and engine speed for functions such as fuel control strategy.

Sensor measures pressure between the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst

(DOC) and the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) in the aftertreatment assembly located in the exhaust system of the vehicle.

Sensor measures pressure on the outlet of the after-treatment device in the exhaust system of the vehicle. Located after the DPF that is within the aftertreatment device.

Temperature measured at the outlet of the after-treatment system that is installed within the exhaust system of the vehicle. It's located after the DPF that is within the aftertreatment unit.

DOC Temperature In - Temperature measured at the inlet of the after-treatment device in the exhaust system of the vehicle.

Located before the DOC that is within the after-treatment device.

Temperature measured between the DOC and the DPF in the aftertreatment assembly located in the exhaust system of the vehicle.

EGR Delta Pressure Sensor

EGR Delta P Sensor

Senses EGR pressure for EGR control.

EGR Temperature Sensor

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

(ECT Sensor)

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

(EOP Sensor)

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor

(EOT Sensor)

Senses EGR exhaust temperature after EGR cooler. Used for

EGR system diagnosis.

Senses coolant temperature for functions such as engine protection, fan control and engine fueling.

Senses gallery oil pressure for functions such as engine protection.

Senses oil temperature for functions such as reducing variation in fuel injection and fan control.

Fuel Line Pressure Sensor Senses fuel line pressure

Fuel Compensation Pressure Sensor

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

(IMP Sensor)

Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor

(IMT Sensor)

Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor

(SFT Sensor)

Turbo Compressor Temperature

Out Sensor

Turbo Speed Sensor (TSS)

Water-in-Fuel Sensor

(MBE 900 only)

Compensates fuel line pressure

Senses turbo boost for functions such as smoke control and engine protection.

Senses boost temperature

Senses fuel temperature for functions such as engine fueling.

Senses turbo out air temperature.

Monitors turbo speed.

Detects water in the fuel fi lter that alerts the owner/driver that the fuel fi lter needs to be dried out.

Table 3-99 Function of Factory-installed Sensors

3-92

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

See Figure 3-25 for the location of the sensors for the DOC and DPF.

Figure 3-25 Sensor Location for the DOC and DPF

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-93

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.6.2 OEM-INSTALLED SENSORS

All sensors must be of the proper type and continuously monitor vehicular and environmental conditions, so the MCM can react to changing situations.

The OEM is responsible for installing the sensors listed in Table 3-100.

Sensor

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

(AAT Sensor)

Part Number

23518328

Function

Senses ambient air temperature speci fi cally for the Ambient

Air Temperature Override Disable feature or for OI.

Refer to section 3.6.3.

Engine Coolant Level Sensor

(ECL Sensor)

23526906

23526905

23526907

Senses coolant level for engine protection. Refer to section

3.6.4.

Turbo Compressor In

Temperature Sensor

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

23527831

Senses the temperature of the turbo compressor inlet.

Refer to section 3.6.5.

Senses vehicle speed for Cruise Control and Vehicle Speed

Limiting. Refer to section 3.6.6.

* Available in some applications

Table 3-100 Function and Guidelines for OEM-installed Sensors

NOTE:

The OEM harness must be securely fastened every six (6) in. It is required that the harness be fastened within six (6) in. of the sensor.

3-94

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.6.3 AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The AAT Sensor is a thermistor type sensor with a variable resistance that produces an analog signal between 0 and 5 V, representing the temperature of the ambient air. The AAT Sensor

(see Figure 3-26) is used with the Idle Shutdown Timer, speci

fi cally for the Ambient Air

Temperature Override Disable feature or for Optimized Idle. For additional information on these features refer to Chapter 5.

NOTE:

This sensor is optional.

Figure 3-26 Ambient Air Temperatures Sensor Dimensions

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-95

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Installation

Install the AAT Senaor where ambient air temperature can be read. A protected location on the frame rails where it will not be splattered with dirt and grime and is removed from any heat source

such as exhaust is preferred. See Figure 3-27 for AAT Sensor installation.

Figure 3-27 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Installation

The parameter for the AAT Sensor are listed in Table 3-101.

Parameter Group

Parameter

Ambient Air Temp

Sensor Enable

Options

0 – Not Available

1 – Hardwired

2 – Reserved for J1939

3 – J1587

4 – ECAN

MID for Ambient

Air Temp

0 — 255

Table 3-101 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Parameters

Default

0 – Not Available

Access

VEPS, DRS

3-96

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.6.4 ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR

The ECL Sensor provides an input to the engine protection system and warn the operator if a low coolant level has been reached.

NOTE:

This sensor is required.

The main component of the ECL Sensor consists of a conductivity probe, which connects to

the CPC (see Figure 3-28).

NOTICE:

The probe has an operational temperature range of -40 to 257°F

(-40 to 125°C). Exposure to temperatures beyond this range may result in unacceptable component life, or degraded sensor accuracy.

Figure 3-28 Engine Coolant Level Sensor Speci fi cations

The connector listed in Table 3-102 is a Metri-Pack 280 series push-to-seat connector.

Connector

Terminal

Seal

Secondary Lock

Coolant Level Sensor Connector

P/N: 15300027

P/N: 12077411

P/N: 12015323

P/N: 15300014

Table 3-102 Metri-Pack 280 Connectors and Part Numbers

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-97

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The OEM must connect the ECL Sensor probe as shown in the next illustration (see Figure 3-29).

Polarity of the ground and signal must be correct for proper operation.

Figure 3-29 Engine Coolant Level Sensor Installation for CPC

3-98

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The probe should be located in either the radiator top tank or a remote mounted surge tank. It should be mounted horizontally in the center of the tank and must be in a position to signal low coolant before aeration occurs. Typically, this is a height representing 98% of the drawdown quantity. The probe should be located so that it is not splashed by deaeration line, stand pipe or coolant return line fl ows. The insulated portion of the probe should be inserted into the coolant

1/2 in. or more past the inside wall of the tank. See Figure 3-30.

Figure 3-30 Engine Coolant Level Sensor Location - Top of Radiator Tank

Determine proper location for low coolant level sensor while running the drawdown test. It must actuate a warning before the satisfactory drawdown level is reached.

The ECL Sensor components are OEM supplied hardware and can be purchased as kits or individual components, depending on OEM requirements.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-99

HARDWARE AND WIRING

The following kits listed in Table 3-103 and Table 3-104 provide all the necessary hardware for proper installation of the ECL Sensor. Kits are available through the DDC parts distribution network.

Component

ECL Sensor

Metri-Pack Connector Kit

Metri-Pack Terminals

Secondary Lock wire Seal

Terminal

Part Number

23526905

15300027

12077411

15300014

12015323

12103881

Table 3-103 ECL Sensor Installation Kit 1/4 in. NPTF P/N: 23515397

Component

ECL Sensor

Metri-Pack Connector Kit

Metri-Pack Terminals

Secondary Lock

Wire Seal

Terminal

Part Number

23526906

15300027

12077411

15300014

12015323

12103881

Table 3-104 ECL Sensor Installation Kit 3/8 in. NPTF P/N: 23515398

The sensor must be enabled with VEPS or the DRS as listed in Table 3-105.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

Cool Level Sensor

Input Enable

0 = Disabled

1 = Dual Level Probe Sensor (IMO), fi xed threshold*

2 = Single Level Probe Sensor, temp dependent

3 = Dual Level Float Sensor (FTL), fi xed threshold/FTL Gentec

4 = Single Level Probe Sensor, fi xed threshold

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 3-105 Enabling the Engine Coolant Level Sensor

Default

3-100

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.6.5 TURBO COMPRESSOR IN TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The TCI Sensor produces a signal representing the temperature of the turbo compressor inlet.

See Figure 3-31 and Figure 3-32 for installation.

NOTE:

This sensor is required for the Series 60.

Figure 3-31 Turbo Compressor In Temperature Sensor

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-101

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Figure 3-32 Turbo Compressor In Temperature Sensor Installation

3.6.6 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

The CPC can calculate vehicle speed providing that it is properly programmed and interfaced

with a Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) that meets requirements. The VSS (see Figure 3-33) provides

a vehicle speed signal for use in Cruise Control and Vehicle Speed Limiting. The VSS signal type can be changed.

NOTE:

DDC does not approve of the use of signal generator sensors.

Figure 3-33 Vehicle Speed Sensor

3-102

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

To obtain accurate vehicle mileage, the parameters listed in Table 3-106 must be programmed with VEPS, DRS, or DDDL 7.0.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Axle Ratio

Number of Output Shaft Teeth

Tire Revs per Unit Distance

Top Gear Ratio

Second Highest Gear Ratio

Two Spd Axle Second Axle Ratio

Anti Tamper

Range

0 = No Sensor

1 = C3 Sensor

2 = Square Wave (Hall Sensor)

3 = J1939 (ETC1)

4 = Magnetic Pickup

5 = J1939 (TCO1)

6 = J1939 (CCVS Source 1)

7 = J1939 (CCVS Source 2)

8 = J1939 (CCVS Source 3)

1 – 20.0

0 – 250

160 – 1599 l/km

0.1 – 2.55

0.1 – 5.75

1 – 20.0

0 = Disable

1 = Enable VSS Anti Tamper Function via ABS

2 = Enable Anti Tamper Function via Gear Ratio

Table 3-106 Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters

Default

4 = Magnetic

5.29

312

2.54

5.29

0 = Disable

Magnetic Pickup

The magnetic pickup requirements are listed in Table 3-107. Magnetic Pickup size is determined by installation requirements.

Parameters

Frequency Range

Low Threshold Voltage

Range

0 - 10 kHz

>1.8 Volts Peak to Peak

Table 3-107 Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor Requirements

The Vehicle Speed Sensor is wired to the 21–pin #3 connector of the CPC as listed in Table 3-108.

CPC Connector/Pin

3/13

3/14

Table 3-108 Vehicle Speed Sensor Wiring

Function

VSS (+)

VSS (-)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-103

HARDWARE AND WIRING

See Figure 3-34 for the installation of the Magnetic VSS.

Figure 3-34 Magnetic Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation – CPC

3-104

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

SAE J1939 Data Link

A VSS wired to the CPC is not required if the transmission output shaft speed message is being transmitted over the SAE J1939 Data Link. To obtain accurate vehicle mileage, the parameters listed in Table 3-109 must be programmed with VEPS.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Axle Ratio

Tire Revs per Unit Distance

Top Gear Ratio

Second Highest Gear Ratio

Two Spd Axle Second

Axle Ratio

Anti Tamper

Range

0 = No Sensor

1 = C3 Sensor

2 = Square Wave (Hall Sensor)

3 = J1939 (ECT1)

4 = Magnetic Pickup

5 = J1939 (TCO1)

6 = J1939 (CCVS Source 1)

7 = J1939 (CCVS Source 2)

8 = J1939 (CCVS Source 3)

1 – 20.0

160 – 1599 l/km

0.1 – 2.55

0 — 5.75

1 – 20.0

0 = Disable

1 = Enable VSS ABS Anti Tampering

Function

2 = Enable VSS without ABS Anti

Tampering Function

Table 3-109 Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters for J1939 Option

Default

4 = Magnetic

5.29

312

2.54

5.29

0 = Disable

VSS Anti-tamper

If the sensor appears to be working improperly, but the vehicle speed is not zero, VSS

Anti-Tamper will log a VSS fault.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-105

HARDWARE AND WIRING

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3-106

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7 LAMPS

The instrument panel warning lamps, the Amber Warning Lamp (AWL) and the Red Stop

Lamp (RSL), are supplied by the OEM. The functionality of each lamp along with the wiring requirements are covered separately in the following sections.

3.7.1 AMBER WARNING LAMP

The AWL is controlled by DDEC VI.

The AWL remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When an electronic system fault occurs (This indicates the problem should be diagnosed as soon as possible.)

The AWL fl ashes:

□ When the Diagnostic Request Switch is used to activate the AWL to fl ash inactive codes

□ During last 90 seconds before Idle Shutdown if programmed for override

□ When Idle Shutdown occurs or the Optimized Idle system shutdown occurs

AWL and PasSmart

AWL is active with PasSmart. When the Passing Speed Duration time expires, the Amber

Warning Lamp on the dashboard will begin to fl ash one minute prior to ramping the Vehicle Limit

Speed (VLS) back down to the normal VLS limit. The rampdown event always takes 5 seconds regardless of the Passing Speed Increment programmed into the ECU. The rampdown alert can be distinguished from an engine fault warning in that the AWL fl ashes for the former and remains on constantly for the latter.

PasSmart still operates when there is an active engine fault. In this situation the Amber Warning

Lamp goes from constant illumination to fl ashing one minute before the VLS limit ramps down.

At the end of the passing event when PasSmart is deactivated, the Amber Warning Lamp will return to constant illumination if the engine fault is still active.

Amber Warning Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the AWL:

□ The AWL is required.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

□ The AWL must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the equipment operator.

□ The lens color must be amber.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-107

HARDWARE AND WIRING

□ The words CHECK ENGINE must appear on or near the AWL lamp.

Wiring Requirements

The AWL is connected to pin 2/10 in the CPC.

See Figure 3-35 for the recommended AWL wiring.

Figure 3-35

3.7.2

Amber Warning Lamp Wiring

RED STOP LAMP

The RSL is controlled by DDEC VI.

The RSL remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When a potential engine damaging fault is detected

The RSL fl ashes:

□ When Engine Protection Shutdown occurs

□ When the Diagnostic Request Switch is used to activate the RSL to fl ash active codes

3-108

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Red Stop Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the RSL:

□ The RSL is required.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 (DC) current.

□ The RSL must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the equipment operator.

□ The lens color must be red.

□ The words STOP ENGINE must appear on or near the RSL lamp.

Red Stop Lamp Wiring

The RSL is connected to pin 3/16 in the CPC.

See Figure 3-36 for the recommended RSL wiring.

Figure 3-36 Red Stop Lamp Wiring

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-109

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.7.3 DPF REGENERATION LAMP

This lamp is controlled by DDEC VI.

The DPF Regeneration Lamp remains ON when

□ Stationary regeneration is required.

□ At the start of every ignition cycle, the lamp turns ON for approximately fi ve (5) seconds (a bulb check).

The DPF Regeneration Lamp fl ashes when a stationary regeneration is required immediately. If the lamp fl ashing is ignored, derate and/or shutdown could occur.

DPF Regeneration Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the DPF Regeneration Lamp:

□ The DPF Regeneration Lamp is required.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The DPF Regeneration Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ The lens color must be amber.

□ This output is wired to pin 1/5 of the CPC.

□ This lamp can be multiplexed on J1939.

□ The DPF Regeneration symbol shown above is required.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters for the DPF Regeneration Lamp are listed in Table 3-110.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

1 05 Fault

Detection

DPF Lamp Con fi g

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

0 = Hardwired

1 = J1939 PTC1

Table 3-110 DPF Regeneration Lamp Options

Default

0 = Disabled

0 = Hardwired

Access

VEPS, DRS

3-110

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7.4 HIGH EXHAUST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE LAMP

The HEST Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI.

The HEST Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check).

□ When the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph and the DPF outlet temperature is greater than 525°C.

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the HEST Lamp:

□ The HEST Lamp is optional and must be supplied by the OEM.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 2.0 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

□ The HEST Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ The lens color must be amber.

□ This output is wired to pin 4/7 of the CPC.

□ This lamp can be multiplexed on J1939.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters for the High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp are listed in Table 3-111..

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-111

HARDWARE AND WIRING

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options Default

4 07 DO

Selection

4 07 Fault

Detection

Hi Exhaust Temp

Lamp Con fi g

* Not supported in NAFTA

0 = Disabled

1 = Accelerator Pedal Kick Down*

2 = Actual Torque*

3 = Road Speed*

4 = Engine Speed*

5 = Coolant Temperature*

6 = Pedal Torque*

7 = Boost Temperature*

8 = Oil Pressure (MCM threshold)*

9 = Coolant Temperature (MCM threshold)*

10 = Vehicle Power Shutdown/ignition relay

11 = Optimized idle ACC Bus (ignition relay)

12 = Split Valve 1*

13 = High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

0 = Hardwired

1 = J1939 PTC1

13 = High

Exhaust System

Temperature

Lamp

0 = Disabled

0 = Hardwired

Table 3-111 High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Options

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

3.7.5 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is controlled by DDEC VI.

The MIL remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ For any emission related fault, the light will go out when the fault is inactive

Malfunction Indicator Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the MIL:

□ The MIL is required.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The MIL must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ The lens color must be amber.

□ This output is wired to pin 1/13 of the CPC.

□ This lamp can be multiplexed on J1939.

3-112

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3.7.6

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

LOW OIL PRESSURE LAMP

The Low Oil Pressure Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The Low Oil Pressure Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When a low oil pressure fault is detected

Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Low Oil Pressure Lamp:

□ The Low Oil Pressure Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The Low Oil Pressure Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-112.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 12 DO

Selection

3 = Oil

Pressure

Low Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Oil Level Lamp*

2 = AGS2 Check Transmission Indication

Lamp

3 = Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 = Cruise Active Lamp

5 = FUSO Retarder Control 2*

3 12

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-112 Low Oil Pressure Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-113

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.7.7 CRUISE ACTIVE LAMP

The Cruise Active Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The Cruise Active Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When Cruise Control is active

Cruise Active Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Cruise Active Lamp:

□ The Cruise Active Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The Cruise Active Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-113.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 12 DO

Selection

4 = Cruise

Active Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Oil Level Lamp*

2 = AGS2 Check Transmission Indication

Lamp

3 = Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 = Cruise Active Lamp

5 = FUSO Retarder Control 2*

3 12

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-113 Cruise Active Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

3-114

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7.8 DECELERATION LAMP

The Deceleration Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI.

The Deceleration Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle (a bulb check)

□ When percent throttle is zero and Cruise Control is inactive

Deceleration Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Deceleration Lamp:

□ The Deceleration Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The Deceleration Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 4/09 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-114.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

4 09 DO

Selection

11 = Deceleration

Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Accelerator Pedal Idle Position*

2 = Actual Torque*

3 = Road Speed*

4 = Engine Speed*

5 = Coolant Temp*

6 = Pedal Torque*

7 = Boost Temp*

8 = Oil Pressure (MCM Threshold)*

9 = Coolant Temp (MCM Threshold)*

10 = OI Active Lamp

11 = Deceleration Lamp

12 = FUSO Ground Starter Lockout

Relay*

4 09

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-114 Deceleration Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-115

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.7.9 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE LAMP

The Low Battery Voltage Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI.

The Low Battery Voltage Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle (a bulb check)

□ When a low battery voltage is detected

Low Battery Voltage Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Low Battery Voltage Lamp:

□ The Low Battery Voltage Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 2.0 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

□ The Low Battery Voltage Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/10 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-115.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 10 DO

Selection

3 = Battery

Voltage Low

Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Air Filter Lamp*

2 = AGS2 Transmission Temp Indication

Lamp

3 = Battery Voltage Low Lamp

4 = Coolant Level Low Lamp

5 = FUSO Retarder Control 1*

3 10

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-115 Low Battery Voltage Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

3-116

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7.10 LOW COOLANT LEVEL LAMP

The Low Coolant Level Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The Low Coolant Level Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When a low coolant level is detected

Low Coolant Level Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Low Coolant Level Lamp:

□ The Low Coolant Level Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 2.0 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

□ The Low Coolant Level Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/10 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-116.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 10 DO

Selection

4 = Coolant

Level Low

Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Oil Level Lamp*

2 = AGS2 Check Transmission Indication

Lamp

3 = Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 = Coolant Level Low Lamp

5 = FUSO Retarder Control 1*

3 10

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-116 Low Coolant Level Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-117

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.7.11 OPTIMIZED IDLE ACTIVE LAMP

The Optimized Idle Active Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The Optimized Idle Active Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When Optimized Idle is active

Optimized Idle Active Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Optimized Idle Active Lamp:

□ The Optimized Idle Active Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 2.0 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

□ The Optimized Idle Active Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 4/09 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-117.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

4 09 DO

Selection

10 = OI

Active Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Accelerator Pedal Idle Position*

2 = Actual Torque*

3 = Road Speed*

4 = Engine Speed*

5 = Coolant Temp*

6 = Pedal Torque*

7 = Boost Temp*

8 = Oil Pressure (MCM Threshold)*

9 = Coolant Temp (MCM Threshold)*

10 = OI Active Lamp

11 = Deceleration Lamp

12 = FUSO Ground Starter Lockout

Relay*

4 09

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-117 Optimized Idle Active Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

3-118

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7.12 WAIT TO START LAMP

The Wait to Start Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The Wait to Start Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When the grid heater system is active; the driver should not start the engine when the light is on

Wait to Start Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Wait to Start Lamp:

□ The Wait to Start Lamp is required for grid heater applications.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The Wait to Start Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 4/06 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-116.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

4 06 DO

Selection

1 = Grid

Heater

Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Grid Heater Lamp

2 = Accelerator Pedal Idle Position*

3 = Run Signal Starter Lockout

4 06

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-118 Wait to Start Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

1 = Grid

Heater

Lamp

VEPS or

DRS

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-119

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.7.13 AGS2 BACKUP LAMP

The AGS2 Backup Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI.

The AGS2 Backup Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle (a bulb check)

□ When the AGS2 transmission is in reverse

AGS2 Backup Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the AGS2 Backup Lamp:

□ The AGS2 Backup Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The AGS2 Backup Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/09 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-119.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 09 DO

Selection

2 = AGS2

Backup

Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Grid Heater Wired*

2 = AGS2 Backup Lamp

3 = Engine Brake Active

4 = Not Used

5 = FUSO Engine Brake Active Lamp*

3 09

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-119 AGS2 Backup Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

3-120

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

3.7.14 AGS2 CHECK TRANS LAMP

The AGS2 Check Trans Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The AGS2 Check Trans Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When the AGS2 transmission ECU sends a diagnostic trouble code with an SPN 2003

AGS2 Check Trans Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the AGS2 Check Trans Lamp:

□ The AGS2 Check Trans Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The AGS2 Check Trans Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-120.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 12 DO

Selection

2 = AGS2

Check

Transmission Indication Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Oil Level Lamp

2 = AGS2 Check Transmission Indication

Lamp

3 = Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 = Cruise Active Lamp

5 = FUSO Retarder Control 2*

3 12

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-120 AGS2 Check Trans Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

3-121

HARDWARE AND WIRING

3.7.15 AGS2 TRANS TEMP LAMP

The AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp is controlled by DDEC VI..

The AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp remains ON:

□ For approximately fi ve (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle

(a bulb check)

□ When transmission temp is high

AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp:

□ The AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp is optional.

□ A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.

Digital output circuits are designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.

□ The AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

□ This output is wired to pin 3/10 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 3-121.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 10 DO

Selection

2 = AGS2

Check

Transmission Indication Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Air Filter Lamp*

2 = AGS2 Transmission Temp Indication

Lamp

3 = Battery Voltage Low Lamp

4 = Coolant Level Low Lamp

5 = FUSO Retarder Control 1*

3 10

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

–

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Table 3-121 AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 =

Disabled

0 =

Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

3-122

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Section Page

4.1

INPUTS ...................................................................................................

4-3

4.2

SWITCH INPUTS RECEIVED OVER J1939 DATA LINK .......................

4-27

4.3

DIGITAL OUTPUTS – CPC .....................................................................

4-29

4.4

ANALOG OUTPUTS – CPC ...................................................................

4-49

4.5

PWM OUTPUT — CPC ..........................................................................

4-51

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-1

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1 INPUTS

The input functions and their associated pins are listed in Table 4-1.

Digital Input Functions

A/C Status

ABS Active

Aux Shutdown #1

Clutch Released Switch

Cruise Control Enable

Cruise Control Set/Coast

Cruise Control Resume/Accel

Diagnostic Request Switch

Dual Speed Axle

Engine Brake Disable

Engine Brake Low

Engine Brake Medium

Fan Control Override

Fast Engine Heat Up Switch

Idle Validation 1

Idle Validation 2

Limiter 0 (LIM0)

Limiter 1 (LIM1)

Optimized Idle Hood Tilt Switch

Optimized Idle Thermostat

Park Brake Interlock

Regen Switch

Remote Throttle Select Switch

Remote PTO Switch

RPM Freeze

Service Brake Released Switch

Stop Engine Override/Diagnostic Request Switch

Throttle Inhibit

Transmission Neutral Switch

Transmission Retarder Active

Table 4-1 DDEC VI Inputs

These inputs can be either a switch or an OEM interlock depending on the function.

The following sections contain a description of the available options.

CPC Connector / Pin

2/12

2/11

4/18

3/1

1/2

4/17

2/8

2/9

2/14

2/15

2/13

4/18

1/06

1/03

1/11

4/18

2/7

1/15

1/17

4/16

1/1

1/12

1/16

1/15

1/1

4/18

3/18

1/10

4/8

1/14

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-3

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.1 AIR CONDITION STATUS

This digital input indicates that the air conditioner is inactive. When the digital input is open, then the fan is turned on if con fi gured (Air Condition Enable Auto Fan). There is a 10 second delay when the digital input is grounded before returning to regular idle.

The AC Enable Switch or the AC High Pressure Switch can be used for this input.

Installation

The Air Conditioner Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 2/12.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

This digital input's parameters are listed in Table 4-2.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Setting

Mode of A/C

Status Input

Fast Idle Spd

Air Cond

Input

Air Condition

Enable Auto

Fan

Selects Mode for

A/C Switch

0 – Disabled

1 – A/C Active Closed

2 – A/C Active Open

3 – LIM Active Closed

4 – LIM Active Open

Fast Idle speed used when A/C is activated

Enables/disables the fan when the

A/C is on

500 – 3000 RPM

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

Table 4-2 Air Condition Status Programming Options

Default

2 – A/C Active

Open

VEPS or

DRS

600 RPM

1 – Enable

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.2 ABS ACTIVE

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) input is used with AGS2 transmissions for ABS indication to the CPC.

Installation

This switch is wired to pin 3/18 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for the ABS digital input are listed in Table 4-3.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 18 DI

Selection

1 — Enable

ABS Input

0 — Disable

1 — Enable ABS Input

2 — Enable Transmission Retarder Input

3 — Enable Tempo Set*

4 — Enable Grid Heater Detection*

5 — Switchable Torque Demand*

6 — Drive On Super Structure*

7 — Throttle Inhibit Super Structure*

8 — Split Select*

9 — FUSO Engine Brake Stage 2 Cancel

Switch*

10 — DPF Inhibit Switch

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-3 ABS Programming Options

Default Access

0 —

Disable

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-5

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.3 AUXILIARY SHUTDOWN #1

The auxiliary shutdown input (auxiliary shutdown #1) are used by other vehicle systems when it is desirable to use the CPC's engine protection function. For example, the engine protection function may be used to protect a transmission or pump against failure. When a vehicle system needs the engine to shutdown, an input port con fi gured as auxiliary shutdown is switched to sensor return.

Installation

The Aux Shutdown #1 Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/10.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for the auxiliary shutdown #1 digital input are listed in Table 4-4.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

1 10 DI

Selection

1 — Enable Aux

Shutdown

0 — Disable

1 — Enable Aux Shutdown

2 — FUSO Accelerator Switch*

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-4 Aux Shutdown #1 Programming Options

Default Access

0 —

Disable

VEPS,

DRS

4-6

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.4 CLUTCH SWITCH

This input indicates that the clutch is released and is used for suspending Cruise Control and Auto

Resume. When the clutch is released, the input is at battery ground. Cruise Control is suspended if the clutch is pressed once if Auto Resume is enabled. If the clutch is released within three seconds, Cruise Control is automatically resumed.

The digital input logic for the Clutch Switch disables Cruise Control in the unlikely event of a broken clutch switch wire.

If the transmission type is set to a two pedal system, the engine will know that there is no clutch on the vehicle and will ignore the clutch switch input.

The Clutch Switch is a normally closed switch. It is customer selectable and is normally disabled.

Installation

The Clutch Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 4/8. Alternatively the Clutch switch may be

multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section 4.2, “Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link”

for additional information.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-5.

Parameter Group

Parameter

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Options

0 – No Clutch Switch

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

2 – 2 Clutch Switch

3 – CCVS1

4 – CCVS2

5 – CCVS3

6 – ETC1

0 – Disable

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

2 – PTO Request for AGS2

Default

0 – No Clutch

Switch

Access

VEPS or DRS

1 – 1 Clutch Switch VEPS or DRS

Table 4-5 Clutch Switch Programming Options

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-7

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.5 CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF SWITCH

Cruise Control is enabled but not active when the Cruise Control Master switch digital input is switched to battery ground.

The Cruise Control Master switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

The Cruise Control Master Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/14. Alternatively, this input may

be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section 4.2, “Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link”

for additional information on multiplexing this input.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-6.

Parameter Group

Table 4-6

Parameter

CC ON OFF Switch

Con fi g

Options

0 – Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

Default

0 – Hardwired

Cruise Control On/Off Switch Programming Options

Access

VEPS or DRS

4-8

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.6 CRUISE CONTROL RESUME/ACCEL SWITCH AND SET/COAST

SWITCH

RESUME

– If Cruise Control has been disabled with the service brake or the clutch switch, momentary contact to the ON position (switching to battery ground) restores the previously set cruise speed.

ACCEL

– When Cruise Control is active, the Resume/Accel input can be used to increase the power and speed by toggling the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the Resume/Accel switch will increase the set point by 1 MPH increments. Holding the Resume/Accel will increase the set point by 1 MPH per second. When released, the cruise control set point will be at the new speed.

The Resume/Accel Switch is a momentary normally open switch.

SET

– Cruise Speed is set by momentarily contact the switch to the ON position (switching the digital input to battery ground). Cruise Control will become active and maintain the vehicle speed present at the time.

COAST

– When Cruise Control is active, the Set/Coast input can be used to reduce power and speed by toggling the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the Set/Coast switch will decrease the set point by 1 MPH increments. Holding the Set/Coast will decrease the set point by

1 MPH per second. When released the Cruise Control set point will be at the new speed.

The Set/Coast Switch is a momentary normally open switch.

Installation

The Resume/Accel Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/16. The Set/Coast Switch is wired to the

CPC on pin 1/12. Alternatively, either may be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section 4.2, “Switch

Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link” for additional information on multiplexing this input.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-7.

Parameter Group

Table 4-7

Parameter

CC Set Cst Res

Accel Sw Con fi g

Options

0 – Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

Default

0 – Hardwired

Access

VEPS or DRS

Cruise Control Resume/Accel Switch Programming Options

Diagnostics

If both the Cruise Control Set/Coast and Resume/Accel switches are grounded for more than a programmed number of consecutive samples, a diagnostic fault is logged. All cruise control switch functions will be disabled.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-9

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.7 DIAGNOSTIC REQUEST SWITCH

This digital input allows the fl ashing of diagnostic codes using the AWL and RSL. This is a momentary normally open switch.

Installation

The Diagnostic Request Switch is wired to #1 connector of the CPC on pin 1/15.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-8.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options Default

1 15 DI

Selection

0 – Disabled

1 – Stop Engine Override Switch

/Diagnostic Request Switch (fault code fl ashing)

2 – CC Cancel (FUSO)*

3 – Diagnostic Request Switch

(fault code fl ashing)

1 – Stop Engine Override Switch

/Diagnostic Request Switch (fault code fl ashing)

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-8 Diagnostic Request Switch Programming Options

Access

VEPS or

DRS

4-10

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.8 DUAL-SPEED AXLE SWITCH

This input indicates that the dual-speed axle ratio has been switched when the input is grounded.

When the switch is open, the dual speed axle ratio is normal.

The Dual-speed Axle Switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

The Dual-speed Axle Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/1. Alternatively, it may be multiplexed

on J1939. Refer to section 4.2, “Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link” for additional

information.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-9.

Parameter Group

Parameter

2nd Axle Speed

Switch Con fi g

1 01 DI Selection

Options

0 – Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

0 – Disable

1 – Enable Dual Speed Axle

2 – Enable Transmission

Retarder Input

3 – FUSO Auxiliary Brake

Cut Switch*

Default

0 – Hardwired

0 – Disable

* Not Supported in NAFTA

Table 4-9 Dual-speed Axle Switch Programming Options

Access

VEPS or DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-11

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.9 ENGINE BRAKE DISABLE

Engine Brake Disable is a digital input which is switched to battery ground whenever a vehicle system such as a traction control device does not want engine braking to occur.

The CPC, which controls the Engine Brake directly, will not allow engine braking when the input is switched to battery ground. DDEC VI supports the J1939 message to disable engine brake (TSC1 command to source address 15).

Installation

The Engine Brake Disable Switch is wired to pin 4/18 on the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-10.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

13 4 18 DI Selection

0 — Disable

1 — Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 — Enable Engine Hood

3 — AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 — RPM Freeze

5 — Engine Brake Disable

6 — Fast Engine Heat Up Switch

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-10 Engine Brake Disable Programming Options

Default Access

0 — Disable VEPS, DRS

4-12

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.10 ENGINE BRAKE LOW & MEDIUM

The Engine Brake Low and Engine Brake Medium switches select the level of engine braking as listed in Table 4-11.

Engine Brake Low Digital Input

OPEN

GND

OPEN

GND

Engine Brake Medium

Digital Input

OPEN

GND

Table 4-11 Level of Engine Braking

Engine Brake Status

OFF

LOW

MEDIUM

HIGH

The Engine Brake Low and Engine Brake Medium switches are normally open switches.

Installation

The Engine Brake Low Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 2/14 and Engine Brake Medium

Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 2/15.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-12.

Parameter Group

Parameter

Engine Brake Switch

Con fi g

Options

0 – Hardwired

1 — Info from J1939

255 – Not Available

Default

0 – Hardwired

Table 4-12 Engine Brake Switch Programming Options

Access

VEPS or DRS

4.1.11 FAN OVERRIDE

This digital input is used to activate the fan when the input is switched to battery ground.

The fan override switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

The Fan Override Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 2/13.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-13

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.12 FAST ENGINE HEAT UP SWITCH

This feature is available for MBE900 engines. The engine goes into thermal management mode to increase heat rejection into the coolant to improve the in-cab heating when the following conditions are met: .

□ Fast Idle Heat Up Switch is ON (grounded)

□ Clutch is engaged (grounded if con fi gured)

□ Transmission in neutral (grounded if con fi gured)

□ Park Brake is ON (grounded)

□ PTO is not active

This is a normally open switch.

Installation

The Fast Engine Heat Up Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 4/18.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-13.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options Default Access

13 4 18 DI Selection

0 — Disable

1 — Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 — Enable Engine Hood

3 — AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 — RPM Freeze

5 — Engine Brake Disable

6 — Fast Engine Heat Up Switch

0 — Disable VEPS, DRS

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-13 Fast Engine Heat Up Switch Programming Options

4-14

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.13 IDLE VALIDATION 1 & IDLE VALIDATION 2

The Idle Validation Switch consists of two contacts. Idle Validation 1 is normally closed and indicates that the accelerator pedal is in the idle position when the input is grounded. Idle

Validation 2 is normally open and indicates that the accelerator pedal is not in the idle position when it is grounded.

NOTE:

An Idle Validation Switch is required.

Installation

The Idle Validation 1 Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/6. The Idle Validation 2 Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/3.

4.1.14 LIMITERS FOR TORQUE, ENGINE SPEED, AND VEHICLE SPEED

These inputs indicate that the engine is being limited to a torque, engine speed or vehicle speed.

These limiters are Limiter 0 (LIM0) and Limiter 1 (LIM1).

Installation

Limiter 0 is wired to the CPC on pin 1/11, Limiter 1 on pin 2/11.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

Refer to section 5.16, “Limiters,” for more information.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-15

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.15 OPTIMIZED IDLE HOOD TILT SWITCH

The Hood Tilt Switch digital input indicates when the hood is opened or closed for Optimized

Idle operation.

The Hood Tilt Switch is a normally open switch and is required for Optimized Idle.

Installation

The Hood Tilt Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 4/18.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-14.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

13 4 18 DI Selection

0 = Disable

1 — Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 — Enable Engine Hood

3 — AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 — RPM Freeze

5 — Engine Brake Disable

6 — Fast Engine Heat Up Switch

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-14 Hood Tilt Switch Programming Options

Default

0 = Disable

Access

VEPS,

DRS

4-16

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.16 OPTIMIZED IDLE THERMOSTAT

The OI thermostat input indicates when the engine should run to heat/cool the cab when operating in Optimized Idle mode. This input is normally open.

Installation

The OI thermostat is wired to the CPC on pin 3/1.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-15.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

13 3 01 AI Selection

0 = No Sensor

1 = Air Filter Restriction Sensor*

2 = OI Thermostat

3 = FUSO Clutch Pedal Sensor

Input*

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-15 OI Thermostat Programming Options

Default

0 = No Sensor

Access

VEPS, DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-17

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.17 PARK BRAKE SWITCH

This input indicates that the Park Brake is engaged when switched to battery ground.

The Park Brake Switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

This input is wired to the CPC pin 1/2. Alternatively, this input may be multiplexed on J1939.

Refer to section 4.2, “Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link” for additional information

on multiplexing this input.

This input is required.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

This digital input can be con fi

gured as listed in Table 4-16.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

1 02 DI Selection

Park Brake Switch Con fi g

0 – Disable

1 – Enable Park Brake Interlock

2 – FUSO Auxiliary Brake Cut Switch*

0 – Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-16 Con fi guring the Park Brake Switch Input

Default

1 – Enable

Park Brake

Interlock

0 – Hardwired

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4-18

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.18 REGEN SWITCH

The Regen Switch is used by the operator to initiate a parked regeneration. If “DPF J1939 Regen

SW Enable” is active, the CPC will no longer process the hardwired DPF Regen Switch requests.

The CPC must receive regular periodic switch status messages over J1939.

The Regen Switch is a momentary normally open switch. Refer to section 5.19 for additional

information.

Installation

The Regen Switch is wired to the CPC #4 connector pin 4/17. A switch is required or wiring must be available to connect an external switch.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-17.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

13 4 17 DI Selection

DPF J1939 Regen

Sw Enable

* Not supported in NAFTA

0 – Disable

1 – 2 Clutch Switch*

2 – DPF Regeneration Switch

3 — FUSO Air Suspension Speed Limit

Switch*

0 – Not Active

1 – Active

Table 4-17 Regen Switch Programming Options

Default

2 – DPF

Regeneration

Switch

0 – Not Active

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-19

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.19 REMOTE THROTTLE SELECT SWITCH

This digital input when switched to battery ground indicates that the remote throttle is active. The switch information will only be used if the remote accelerator input is con fi gured.

The remote accelerator enable switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

This input is wired to the CPC pin 2/8.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

This digital input can be con fi

gured as listed in Table 4-18.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options Default

13 2 08 DI Selection

0 – Disable

1 – Remote Throttle Enable

2 – Service Brake Active*

1 – Remote Throttle

Enable

* Not supported in NAFTA

Remote

Accelerator

Enable

Table 4-18

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0 – Disable

Con fi guring the Remote Accelerator Select Input

Access

VEPS or DRS

4.1.20 REMOTE PTO SWITCH

The Remote PTO Switch allows the use of a customer selected high idle speed instead of the hot idle engine speed.

The Remote PTO speed is active when a digital input is switched to battery ground and the parking brake is enabled. The preset speeds are selected by enabling the remote PTO switch once for PTO speed #1, twice for PTO speed #2 or three times for PTO speed #3. These PTO speeds can be set with VEPS. The Remote PTO will override the Cab PTO mode and cab throttle unless “PTO Throttle Override” is disabled.

The Remote PTO Switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

This input is wired to the CPC pin 2/9.

4-20

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.21 RPM FREEZE

The RPM Freeze input (when grounded) allows the operator to request that PTO maintain the current engine speed. Locking on to a fi xed engine speed is desirable in applications where the input is subjected to electrical noise which in turn causes the engine speed to fl uctuate. The

RPM Freeze Switch is normally open.

Installation

This input is wired to pin 4/18 on the CPC.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-19.

Parameter Group

Parameter

4 18 DI Selection

Options

0 – Disable

1 — Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 — Enable Engine Hood

3 — AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 – RPM Freeze

5 — Engine Brake Disable

6 — Fast Engine Heat Up Switch

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-19 RPM Freeze Programming Options

Default

0 – Disable

Access

VEPS, DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-21

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.22 SERVICE BRAKE RELEASED SWITCH

This input indicates that the brake is released when switched to battery ground. If the brake is activated, then the input is open. This input will suspend cruise control when the brake is activated.

The service brake switch is a normally closed switch.

This input is required.

Installation

This input is wired to the CPC pin 2/7. Alternatively, this input may be multiplexed on J1939.

Refer to section 4.2, “Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link” for additional information

on multiplexing this input.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

This digital input can be con fi gured as listed in Table 4-20.

Parameter Group

Table 4-20

Parameter

Service Brake Switch

Con fi g

Options

0 – Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

Con fi guring the Service Brake Switch Input

Default

0 – Hardwired

Access

VEPS or DRS

4-22

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.23 STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE

The Stop Engine Override Switch is a momentary normally open switch. When the input is switched to battery ground, a shutdown override is enabled.

Shutdown Override Switch is a momentary normally open switch.

Installation

This input is wired to the CPC pin 1/15.

This digital input can be con fi

gured as listed in Table 4-21.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options Default

1 15 DI

Selection

0 – Uncon fi gured

1 – Stop Engine Override Switch

/Diagnostic Request Switch (fault code fl ashing)

2 – CC Cancel (FUSO)*

3 – Diagnostic Request Switch

(fault code fl ashing)

1 – Stop Engine Override Switch

/Diagnostic Request Switch (fault code fl ashing)

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-21 Diagnostic Request Switch Programming Options

Access

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-23

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.1.24 THROTTLE INHIBIT

If the Throttle Inhibit Switch is switched to battery ground, the engine will not respond to the foot pedal or remote throttle.

If the Throttle Inhibit Switch is grounded while the vehicle speed is greater than X mph, the throttle inhibit function will be disabled until the switch is validated again.

The Throttle Inhibit Switch is a normally open switch.

Installation

The Throttle Inhibit Switch is wired to the CPC on pin 1/17.

4.1.25 TRANSMISSION NEUTRAL SWITCH

This digital input when switched to battery ground indicates that the transmission is in neutral.

An open circuit indicates in gear.

NOTE:

This input is required for Optimized Idle.

Installation

This input is wired to the CPC pin 4/16.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

This digital input can be con fi gured as listed in Table 4-22.

Parameter Group

Table 4-22

Parameter

Trans Neutral Input

Con fi g

Options

0 – Hardwired

1 — Info from J1939

255 – Not Available

Default

0 – Hardwired

Con fi guring the Transmission Neutral Switch Input

Access

VEPS or DRS

4-24

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.1.26 TRANSMISSION RETARDER ACTIVE

This input indicates that the transmission retarder is active. When the input is switched to ground, the fan is turned off. When the input is open, the fan will be turned on. The fan will be on for a minimum of 30 seconds. Refer to the transmission manufacturers documentation to determine when to connect this input.

Installation

The transmission retarder input is wired to pin 1/1.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-23.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

13 1 01 DI Selection

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Dual Speed Axle

2 = Enable Transmission

Retarder Input

3 = FUSO Auxiliary Brake

Cut Switch*

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-23 Transmission Retarder Input Options

Default

0 = Disable

Access

VEPS or DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-25

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4-26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.2 SWITCH INPUTS RECEIVED OVER J1939 DATA LINK

Multiplexing is available for several switch inputs over the SAE J1939 Data Link. The CPC supports this feature for the following switch inputs:

□ Cruise Control On/Off Switch

□ Cruise Control Set/Coast

□ Cruise Control Resume/Accel

□ Cruise Pause Switch

□ Service Brake Switch

□ Park Brake Switch

□ Clutch Brake Switch

□ Engine Brake Switches – EBC1 Message

□ Dual-Speed Axle Switch

To use the multiplexing feature with the CPC, the parameters must be set up correctly. There are three different source addresses (SA) possible for receiving the Cruise Control message.

Every switch in this message must be programmed to react on one programmed SA. The SA is programmed by the vehicle OEM.

If an error is detected (wrong data on J1939 CC message or the message is not sent) an error is logged. If the error is caused by wrong data or missing data, the error will be logged and will be held active until the ignition is switched off. Cruise Control will also be disabled.

The options for each source address are listed in Table 4-24. The multiplexing parameters are

listed in Table 4-25.

Parameter Group

Parameter

EBC1 Source Address J1939

CC1 Source Address SAE J1939

CC2 Source Address SAE J1939

CC3 Source Address SAE J1939

TSC1 Source Address SAE J1939

Table 4-24 Source Address Options

Options

0-255

0 – 255

Default

231

Access

VEPS, DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-27

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

CC On Off Switch Con fi g

CC Set Cst Res Accel

Sw Con fi g

Service Brake Switch Con fi g

Park Brake Switch Con fi g

Clutch Switch Con fi g

2nd Axle Speed Switch Con fi g

Engine Brake Switch Con fi g

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

CC Pause Switch Con fi g

Cab PTO Switch Con fi g

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-25 Parameters for Multiplexing

0 - Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

0 - Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

0 - Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

0 - Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

0 - Not Con fi gured

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

2 – 2 Clutch Switch*

3 – CCVS1

4 – CCVS2

5 – CCVS3

6 – ETC1

0 - Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

0 — Hardwired

1 — Info from J1939

255 — Not Available

0 — Hardwired

1 — Info from J1939

255 — Not Available

0 - Disabled

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

4 – CCVS1 or CCVS2

5 – CCVS2 or CCVS3

6 – CCVS1 or CCVS3

7 — CCVS1 or CCVS2 or CCVS3

0 - Hardwired

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

4 – CCVS1 or Hardwired

5 – CCVS2 or Hardwired

6 – CCVS1 or Hardwired

4-28

Default Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS – CPC

The CPC has 15 digital output pins, 12 low side and three high side. The CPC digital output functions and their associated pins are listed in Table 4-26.

Digital Output Function

AGS2 Backup Lamp

AGS2 Check Trans Lamp

AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp

Amber Warning Lamp

Cruise Active Lamp

Deceleration Lamp

DPF Regeneration Lamp

Engine Brake Active

Ether Start

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Low Battery Voltage Lamp

Low Coolant Level Lamp

Low Oil Pressure Lamp

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Optimized Idle Active Lamp

Optimized Idle Alarm

Red Stop Lamp

Starter Lockout/Run Signal

Top2 Shift Solenoid

Top2 Lockout Solenoid

Vehicle Power Shutdown

Wait to Start Lamp

Table 4-26 Digital Outputs – CPC

Driver

Low Side

High Side

Low Side

CPC Connector/Pin

3/09

3/08

3/07

4/10

4/06

3/12

1/13

4/09

3/17

3/16

3/17

4/09

1/05

3/09

31/8

3/12

3/10

2/10

3/12

4/07

3/10

The digital outputs wired to the MCM are listed in Table 4-27.

Digital Output Function

Ether Start

Table 4-27 Digital Outputs – CPC

Driver

Low Side

MCM Connector/Pin

31/8

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-29

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.1 AGS2 BACKUP LAMP

This digital output is used for non-multiplexed applications with the AGS2 transmission.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more that 2.0 A (DC) current.

The AGS2 Backup Lamp is wired to pin 3/9 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-28.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 09 DO

Selection

3 09 DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

2 – AGS2 Backup

Lamp

—

0 – Disabled

1 — Grid Heater Hard Wired*

2 – AGS2 Backup Lamp

3 – Engine Brake Active

4 – Not Used

5 — FUSO Engine Brake

Active Lamp*

0 – Disabled

1 – Enabled

Table 4-28 AGS2 Backup Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

4-30

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.2 AGS2 CHECK TRANS LAMP

This digital output is used for non-multiplexed applications with the AGS2 transmission.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more that 250 mA (DC) current.

The AGS2 Check Trans Lamp is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-29.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default Access

3 12 DO

Selection

2 – AGS2 Check

Transmission

Indication Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Oil Level Lamp

2 – AGS2 Check

Transmission Indication

Lamp

3 – Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 – Cruise Active Lamp

5 – FUSO Retarder Control

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

3 12

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

—

0 – Disabled

1 – Enabled

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

Table 4-29 AGS2 Check Transmission Indication Lamp Programming Options

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-31

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.3 AGS2 TRANS TEMP LAMP

This digital output is used for non-multiplexed applications with the AGS2 transmission.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more that 250 mA (DC) current.

The AGS2 Transmission Temp Indication Lamp is wired to pin 3/10 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-30.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default Access

3 10 DO

Selection

2 – AGS2

Transmission Temp

Indication Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Air Filter Lamp*

2 – AGS2 Transmission

Temp Indication Lamp

3 – Battery Voltage Low

Lamp

4 – Coolant Level Low Lamp

5 – FUSO Retarder Control

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

3 10

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-30

—

0 – Disabled

1 – Enable

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

AGS2 Transmission Temp Indication Lamp Programming Options

4.3.4 AMBER WARNING LAMP

The Amber Warning Lamp is illuminated for all active faults. The AWL will also fl ash when an engine shutdown occurs.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The AWL is wired to pin 2/10 of the CPC.

NOTE:

This digital output is REQUIRED.

4-32

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.5 CRUISE ACTIVE LAMP

When Cruise Control's Cruise Switch PTO is active, this digital output is switched to ground.

This digital output can be used to drive a lamp indicating the active state of Cruise Control.

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more that 250 mA (DC) current. The Cruise

Active Lamp is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-31.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

35 3 12 DO Selection

3 12 DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

4 — Cruise

Active Lamp

—

0 — Disabled

1 – Oil Level Lamp*

2 — AGS2 Check Trans Lamp

3 — Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 — Cruise Active Lamp

5 — FUSO Retarder Control 2*

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-31 Cruise Active Lamp Programming Options

Default

0 — Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-33

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.6 DECELERATION LAMP

The Deceleration Lamp options a lamp in the back of the vehicle to warn that the vehicle is slowing down. This digital output could be used to drive a deceleration lamp or more typically a relay which drives the deceleration lamps. This digital output is switched to ground whenever the percent throttle is zero and Cruise Control is inactive.

NOTE:

This feature is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 mA (DC) current. The Deceleration

Lamp is wired to pin 4/9 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-32.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

4 09 DO

Selection

11 – Deceleration

Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Accelerator Pedal Idle

Position*

2 – Actual Torque*

3 – Road Speed*

4 – Engine Speed*

5 – Coolant Temp*

6 – Pedal Torque*

7 – Boost Temp*

8 – Oil Pressure (MCM

Threshold)*

9 – Coolant Temp (MCM

Threshold)*

10 – OI Active Lamp

11 – Deceleration Lamp

12 – FUSO Ground Starter

Lockout Relay*

4 09

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-32

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Deceleration Lamp Programming Options

Default

0 – Disabled

0 — Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4-34

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.7 DPF REGENERATION LAMP (HARDWIRED AND J1939)

The purpose of this lamp is to let the operator know that a parked regeneration is required. This lamp can be hardwired or multiplexed. Solid illumination indicates a manual regeneration is required.

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The DPF Lamp is wired to pin 1/5 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-33.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

1 05

DO Fault

Detection

DPF Lamp

Con fi g

Setting

—

Options

0 – Disabled

1 – Enabled

0 – Hardwired

1 – J1939 PTC1

Table 4-33 DPF Regeneration Lamp Programming Options

Default

0 — Disabled

0 – Hardwired

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-35

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.8 ENGINE BRAKE ACTIVE

This digital output is switched to ground whenever the Engine Brake is active. This digital output could be used to drive an Engine Brake Active Lamp or give an engine brake active indication to another vehicle system

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

Engine Brake Active is wired to pin 3/9 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-34.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 09 DO

Selection

3 – Engine Brake

Active

0 – Disabled

1 – Grid Heater Hard Wired*

2 – AGS2 Backup Lamp

3 – Engine Brake Active

4 – Not Used

5 – FUSO Engine Brake Active

Lamp*

3 09

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-34

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Engine Brake Active Programming Options

Default

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4-36

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.9 ETHER START

This digital output is switched to ground when ether should be injected into the engine for cold start purposes.

NOTE:

This output is used on a Series 60 engine only.

Installation

This function is wired to pin 31/8 of the 31-pin connector. The power supply for the ether system should be wired to pin 31/22 of the 31-pin connector.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

The options for this digital input are listed in Table 4-35.

Parameter

Group

MCM – 1

MCM – 8

Parameter

SW6

Con fi guration

Cold Start Type

Options

0 – Disable

24 – Ether Start

0 – No Function

1 – Grid Heater

3 – Ether Injection

Table 4-35 Ether Start Options

Default

0 - Disable

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 – No Function VEPS, DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-37

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.10 HIGH EXHAUST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE LAMP (HARDWIRED

AND J1939)

The purpose of this lamp is to let the operator know that the exhaust temperature is at an elevated condition with low vehicle speed. It can be hardwired or multiplexed.

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The HET Lamp is wired to pin 4/7 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital input listed in Table 4-36.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options Default

35 4 07 DO Selection

4 07 Fault

Detection

Hi Exhaust Temp

Lamp Con fi g

* Not Available in NAFTA

0 = Disabled

1 = Accelerator Pedal Kick Down*

2 = Actual Torque*

3 = Road Speed*

4 = Engine Speed*

5 = Coolant Temperature*

6 = Pedal Torque*

7 = Boost Temperature*

8 = Oil Pressure (MCM threshold)*

9 = Coolant Temperature (MCM threshold)*

10 = Vehicle Power Shutdown /

Ignition Relay*

11 = Optimized Idle ACC Bus

(ignition relay)*

12 = Split Valve 1*

13 = High Exhaust Temp Lamp

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

0 = Hardwired

1 = 1939 PTC1

13 = High

Exhaust Temp

Lamp

0 = Disabled

0 = Hardwired

Table 4-36 High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Options

Access

VEPS, DRS

4-38

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.11 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE LAMP

This digital output is switched to ground when a low battery voltage fault is detected.

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

The Low Battery Voltage Lamp is wired to pin 3/10 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-37.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default

3 10 DO

Selection

3 – Battery Voltage

Low Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Air Filter Lamp*

2 – AGS2 Transmission Temp

Indication Lamp

3 – Battery Voltage Low Lamp

4 – Coolant Level Low Lamp

5 – FUSO Retarder Control 1*

0 – Disabled

3 10

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

0 – Disabled

Table 4-37 Low Battery Voltage Lamp Programming Options

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-39

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.12 LOW COOLANT LEVEL LAMP

This digital output is switched to ground when a low coolant level fault is detected.

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The Low Coolant Level Lamp is wired to pin 3/10 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-38.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default

3 10 DO

Selection

4 – Coolant Level

Low Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Air Filter Lamp*

2 – AGS2 Transmission Temp

Indication Lamp

3 – Battery Voltage Low Lamp

4 – Coolant Level Low Lamp

5 – FUSO Retarder Control 1*

0 – Disabled

3 10

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-38

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Coolant Level Low Lamp Programming Options

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4-40

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.13 LOW OIL PRESSURE LAMP

This digital output is switched to ground when a low oil pressure fault is detected.

NOTE:

This function is optional.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The Low Oil Pressure Lamp is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-39.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 12 DO

Selection

3 – Oil Pressure

Low Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Oil Level Lamp*

2 – AGS2 Check Transmission

Indication Lamp

3 – Oil Pressure Low Lamp

4 – Cruise Active Lamp

5 – FUSO Retarder Control 2*

3 12

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-39 Low Oil Pressure Lamp Programming Options

Default

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4.3.14 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)

This amber warning lamp is illuminated for all active engine emission related faults including but not limited to after-treatment devices. The MIL may illuminate at the same time as the

Amber Warning Lamp.

This is a required lamp. It can be hardwired or multiplexed.

NOTE:

This digital output is REQUIRED.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp is wired to pin 1/13 of the CPC.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-41

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.15 OPTIMIZED IDLE ACTIVE LAMP

The Optimized Idle Active lamp digital output will fl ash at a rate of once every half second while the idle timer is counting down, after the system has initialized. The digital output is switched to sensor return after the idle timer has timed out and Optimized Idle has become active. The output will be activated along with the AWL and the RSL when the ignition is cycled ON for the bulb

check. For more information on Optimized Idle, refer to section 5.18, “Optimized Idle.”

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current. The OI Active

Lamp is wired to the CPC on pin 4/09.

NOTE:

This output is required for Optimized Idle.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-40.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default

4 09 DO

Selection

10 – Optimized Idle

Active Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Accelerator Pedal

Position*

2 – Actual Torque*

3 – Road Speed*

4 – Engine Speed*

5 – Coolant Temp*

6 – Pedal Torque*

7 – Boost Temp*

8 – Oil Pressure (MCM

Threshold)*

9 – Coolant Temp (MCM

Threshold)*

10 – Optimized Idle Active

Lamp

11 – Deceleration Lamp

12 – FUSO Ground Starter

Lockout Relay*

0 – Disabled

4 09

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-40

1 — Enabled

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

0 – Disabled

Optimized Idle Active Lamp Programming Options

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Diagnostics

A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged for an open or shorted circuit.

4-42

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.16 OPTIMIZED IDLE ALARM

The Optimized Idle Alarm digital output is switched to sensor return to turn on the Optimized Idle

Alarm. The alarm will sound for fi ve seconds prior to any Optimized Idle engine start. For more

information on Optimized Idle, refer to section 5.18, “Optimized Idle.”

Installation

This digital output is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current. The OI Alarm is wired to the CPC on pin 3/17. The DDC part number for the OI Alarm is 23517899.

NOTE:

This output is required for Optimized Idle.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-41.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 17 DO

Selection

4 – Optimized Idle

Alarm

0 – Disabled

1 – Enable Starter Lockout

2 – Enable Kickdown Output*

3 – Not Used

4 – Optimized Idle Alarm

5 – Split Valve*

6 – Starter Lockout and AGS2

Run Signal/Starter Lockout

7 – Engine Brake Disabled for

Overspeed*

3 17

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-41 Optimized Idle Alarm Programming Options

Default

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Diagnostics

A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged for an open or shorted circuit.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-43

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.17 RED STOP LAMP

The Red Stop Lamp (RSL) is illuminated for all active serious faults, which require the engine to be shutdown immediately. The AWL will also fl ash when an engine shutdown occurs.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The RSL is wired to pin 3/16 of the CPC.

NOTE:

This digital output is REQUIRED.

4.3.18 STARTER LOCKOUT

This digital output drives a normally closed relay which interrupts the starting signal when the output has been activated.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

The Starter Lockout digital output is wired to pin 3/17 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-42.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 17 DO

Selection

1 – Enable Starter

Lockout

0 – Disabled

1 – Enable Starter Lockout

2 – Enable Kickdown Output*

3 – Not Used

4 – Optimized Idle Alarm

5 – Split Valve*

6 – Starter Lockout and AGS2

Run Signal/Starter Lockout

7 – Engine Brake Disabled for

Overspeed*

3 17

DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

—

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-42 Starter Lockout Programming Options

Default

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

4-44

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.19 TOP2 SHIFT SOLENOID

The shift solenoid is used to command an automatic shift between the top two gears in an Eaton®

Top2 transmission. When the digital output is switched to power, the shift solenoid commands a shift to the top gear position. When the output is not activated, the shift solenoid commands a shift to the gear one lower than the top position. The correct transmission type must be selected

when this digital output is programmed. For additional information on Top2, refer to section 5.26,

"Transmission Interface."

Installation

This circuit is a high-side digital output. The Top2 Shift solenoid is wired to pin 3/8 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output listed in Table 4-43.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 08 DO

Selection

3 08 DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

6 — Top2 Shift

Solenoid

—

0 — Disable

1 — Exhaust Brake Only*

2 — Exhaust Brake and

Decompression Brake via

Single Valve*

3 — Port Extension Turbo

Brake*

4 — PTO Stationary for

AGS2

5 — PTO Mobile for AGS2

6 — Top2 Shift Solenoid

7 — FUSO Starter Lockout

Relay*

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-43 Top2 Shift Solenoid Programming Options

Default

0 — Disable

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Diagnostics

A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged for an open or shorted circuit.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-45

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.20 TOP2 SHIFT LOCKOUT SOLENOID

The shift lockout solenoid is used to disable the driver splitter position switch in an Eaton Top2 transmission. When the digital output is switched to power, the splitter position control is taken away from the driver and controlled by the ECU. The correct transmission type must be selected.

For additional information on Top2, refer to section 5.26, "Transmission Interface."

Installation

This circuit is a high-side digital output. The Top2 Shift lockout solenoid is wired to pin 3/7 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-44.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default

3 07 DO

Selection

3 07 DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

3 — Top2 Lockout

Solenoid

—

0 — Disable

1 — Decompression Valve*

2 — Grid Heater*

3 — Top2 Lockout Solenoid

4 — Modulation Output for

Allison Transmission without

J1939 Interface (Gear1)*

5 — PTO Valve for AGS2

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-44 Top2 Shift Lockout Solenoid Programming Options

0 — Disable

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Diagnostics

A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged for an open or shorted circuit.

4-46

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.3.21 VEHICLE POWER SHUTDOWN

This digital output actuates a relay that shuts down the rest of the electrical power to the vehicle when an idle shutdown or engine protection shutdown occurs.

Installation

The Vehicle Power Shutdown is wired to pin 4/10 of the CPC. This is a high side digital output.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-45.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

4 10 DO

Selection

4 10 DO Fault

Detection

Setting Options

3 — Vehicle Power

Shutdown

—

0 — Disable

3 — Vehicle Power

Shutdown/Ignition Relay

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Table 4-45 Vehicle Power Shutdown Programming Options

Default

0 — Disable

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-47

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

4.3.22 WAIT TO START LAMP

This digital output is switched to battery ground when the Wait to Start (Cold Start) system is active. This output is used to drive a light to alert the operator. As long as the lamp is illuminated the engine should not be started.

This output is used for grid heater applications on the MBE 900 and MBE 4000.

NOTE:

The status of this output is also broadcast over J1939 — SPN 1081.

Installation

This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.

The Wait to Start Lamp is wired to pin 4/06 of the CPC.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in Table 4-46.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

Table 4-46

4 06 DO

Selection

4 06 DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

1 – Grid Heater

Lamp

—

0 – Disabled

1 – Grid Heater Lamp

2 – Accelerator Pedal Idle

Position*

3 – Run Signal Starter Lockout

0 — Disabled

1 — Enabled

Wait to Start Lamp Programming Options

Default Access

1 – Grid

Heater Lamp

VEPS or

DRS

0 – Disabled

VEPS or

DRS

4-48

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.4 ANALOG OUTPUTS – CPC

The CPC has two analog outputs that can be used for various functions.

4.4.1 PIN 3/05 – ANALOG OUTPUT

This pin can be con fi gured for the functions listed in Table 4-47.

Function

Oil Pressure Lamp

5 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge

10 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge

Description

This output will be turned on when MCM detects a pre-warning or warning based on oil pressure.

The oil pressure will be converted to the proper pulse width for a 5 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge.

The oil pressure will be converted to the proper pulse width for a 10 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge.

Table 4-47 Analog Output Selections for CPC Pin 3/05

4.4.2 PIN 3/06 – ANALOG OUTPUT

This pin can be con fi gured for the functions listed in Table 4-48.

Function

Coolant Temp Lamp

Coolant Temperature Gauge

OI Thermostat

Description

This output will be turned on when MCM detects a pre-warning or warning based on coolant temperature.

The coolant temperature will be converted to the proper pulse width for a coolant temperature gauge.

Can be used for the input for the OI thermostat.

Table 4-48 Analog Output Selections for CPC Pin 3/06

Option

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-49

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for the analog outputs are listed in Table 4-49.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

3 05 AO Selection

3 06 AO Selection

0 – Disabled

1 – Oil Pressure Lamp

2 – 5 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge

3 – 10 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge

4 – Fuel Filter Sensor*

0 – Disabled

1 – Coolant Temperature Lamp

2 – Coolant Temperature Gauge

3 – OI Thermostat Input*

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-49 Analog Output Options

Default Access

0 – Disabled VEPS, DRS

4-50

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

4.5 PWM OUTPUT — CPC

There is one PWM output on the CPC.

4.5.1 PWM OUTPUT — PIN 4/12 PWM SELECTION

This selection is pin 4/12. This pin can be used for a Road Speed PWM output as listed in Table

4-50.

Frequency

6.76

173.5

333.30

Table 4-50 Frequency vs. Speed

Road Speed km/h

1.00

3.00

78.125

150.000

156.250

Road Speed mph

0.622

1.865

173.50

333.30

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for the PWM outputs are listed in Table 4-51.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

4 12 PWM Output

Selection

0 – Disabled

1 – Throttle Torque 10%..90%

2 – Difference Torque

3 – Throttle Torque 90%..10%

4 – Actual Torque

5 – Load Torque (no idle torque for automatic transmission)

6 – Road Speed

7 – Demand Speed

8 – Demand Speed CC+

9 – AGS2 Transmission Temp

Indication Lamp

10 – FUSO Accelerator PWM Output*

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 4-51 PWM Output Options

Default

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS, DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

4-51

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4-52

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

FEATURES

Section Page

5.1

ACCELERATION LIMITER .....................................................................

5-3

5.2

COLD START – MBE900 AND MBE4000 ...............................................

5-5

5.3

CRUISE CONTROL ................................................................................

5-9

5.4

DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................

5-15

5.5

DUAL SPEED AXLE ...............................................................................

5-19

5.6

ENGINE BRAKE CONTROLS – MBE900 AND MBE4000 .....................

5-21

5.7

ENGINE BRAKE CONTROLS – SERIES 60 ..........................................

5-37

5.8

ENGINE PROTECTION ..........................................................................

5-45

5.9

ENGINE STARTER CONTROL ..............................................................

5-49

5.10 ETHER STARTING – SERIES 60 ...........................................................

5-51

5.11

FAN CONTROL .......................................................................................

5-53

5.12 FLEET MANAGEMENT ..........................................................................

5-77

5.13 FUEL ECONOMY INCENTIVE ...............................................................

5-85

5.14 IDLE ADJUST .........................................................................................

5-87

5.15 IDLE SHUTDOWN TIMER AND PTO SHUTDOWN ...............................

5-89

5.16 LIMITERS ................................................................................................

5-97

5.17 LOW GEAR TORQUE REDUCTION ...................................................... 5-101

5.18 OPTIMIZED IDLE .................................................................................... 5-105

5.19 PARKED REGENERATION .................................................................... 5-113

5.20 PASSMART ............................................................................................. 5-117

5.21 PASSWORDS ......................................................................................... 5-121

5.22 PROGRESSIVE SHIFT ........................................................................... 5-123

5.23 STARTER LOCKOUT ............................................................................. 5-129

5-1

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

FEATURES

5.24 TACHOMETER DRIVE ........................................................................... 5-131

5.25 THROTTLE CONTROL/GOVERNORS .................................................. 5-133

5.26 TRANSMISSION INTERFACE ................................................................ 5-149

5.27 VEHICLE SPEED LIMITING ................................................................... 5-161

5.28 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ANTI-TAMPERING .................................... 5-163

5-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.1 ACCELERATION LIMITER

TBD

5.1.1 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The parameters and options for Acceleration Limiter are listed in Table 5-1.

Parameter

Group

Table 5-1

Parameter Description Options Default

Noise Max

Engine Speed

Noise Min

Engine Speed

AL Min Engine

Torque

Enable Noise

Control

AL Ramp Up

Rate

Maximum engine speed for noise trigger control

Minimum engine speed for noise trigger control

Minimum engine torque during accelerations

Enable noise control function

Sets acceleration rate while in noise control

0 – 4000 rpm

0 – 100%

0 – VCU Style

1 – DDEC Style

0 – 8191 rpm/s

1600 rpm

1400 rpm

1 – DDEC

Style

160 rpm/s

Acceleration Limiter Parameters and Options

100%

Series

Setting

Access

1800 rpm

VEPS,

DRS

1350 rpm

15%

1 –

DDEC

Style

120 rpm/s

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-3

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.2 COLD START – MBE900 AND MBE4000

The MCM has optional support for an electric Grid Heater for use as a cold start aid. The Grid

Heater element is operated by a high current relay. If the heater is enabled, the MCM will turn the Grid Heater relay on and off as required.

5.2.1 OPERATION

The cold start procedure has several states. The cold start states and outputs during a successful engine start are listed in Table 5-2 and described in the following sections.

State

Initialization

Preheating

Ready for Engine Start

Engine Starting

Post-heating

Cooling Off

OFF

Table 5-2

Wait to Start Lamp

Off

Grid Heater

Grid Heater Relay

Off

On - Preheat Time

Off

On - Post Heat Time

Off

Cold Start States and Outputs

NOTE:

If ignition switch off is detected, the MCM remains in the current state for 5 seconds.

If the ignition is switched on again, cold start proceeds. Otherwise the MCM changes to the cooling off state.

Initialization

When ignition is switched on and engine speed is 0 rpm, the MCM determines preheating time, post-heating time and the coolant switch off temperature. The preheating time is shortened when the cold start device is not cold.

A preheating time of 0 indicates, that no cold start is needed for the following engine start. If the preheating time is greater than 0, the MCM enters the preheating state.

Preheating State

Engine cranking detection during preheating will stop the Preheating process and the canceling of the Cold Start function. The Cold Start function will also be canceled when low battery voltage codes are active.

When the Preheat time has elapsed, the Wait to Start lamp will go off and the engine is ready to start.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-5

FEATURES

Waiting for Engine Start

A cranking detection before the end of time waiting for start leads to the engine starting state. If the engine does not start then Cold Start is canceled.

Engine Start

If engine start is successful or if the engine starting time ends, the post-heating state starts.

Post-heating State

When the engine start is successful, the grid heater will be switched on until the post-heating time expires or the coolant temperature exceeds the switch off temperature.

Cooling Off

This time is used to determine the preheating time at the beginning of the next cold start.

Off

End of the Cold Start procedure, all outputs are switched off.

5.2.2 INSTALLATION

The Engine Harness has the grid heater connector. The OEM is responsible for wiring power and ground to the grid heater. See Figure 5-1 for the MBE4000, Figure 5-2 for the MBE900 and

Figure 5-3 for the heavy-duty engine.

1. Battery Ground

2. Connector to MCM (included in on-engine harness)

Figure 5-1 Grid Heater – MBE4000

3. Battery Supply (+12 V)

5-6

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

1. Battery Supply (+12 V)

2. Possible Battery Ground Connection

Figure 5-2 Grid Heater – MBE900

3. Connector to MCM (included in on-engine harness)

1. Battery Ground

2. Connector to MCM

Figure 5-3

3. Battery Supply (+12 V)

Grid Heater – Heavy-duty Engine

The Wait to Start Lamp is driven by a low side output on CPC pin 4/6.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-7

FEATURES

5.2.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The Cold Start parameters are listed in Table 5-3.

Parameter

Group

MCM – 8

MCM – 1

Table 5-3

Parameter

Cold Start

Type

1 – Grid Heater

PWM3

Con fi guration

3 – Grid Heater

4 06 DO

Selection

Setting

1 – Grid Heater

Lamp

4 06 Fault

Detection

1 – Enabled

Cold Start Parameters

Options

0 – Disabled

1 – Grid Heater

2 – Ether Injection

0 – No Function

3 – Grid Heater

0 – Disabled

1 – Grid Heater Lamp

2 – Accelerator Pedal Idle Position

3 – Starter Lockout/Run Signal

0 – Disabled

1 – Enabled

Default

0 – Disabled

0 – No

Function

1 – Grid

Heater Lamp

0 – Disabled

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

5.2.4 DIAGNOSTICS

The digital output for the grid heater relay is monitored for high/low state conformity. At the beginning of the preheating state and the starting state, and the fi rst two seconds of the preheating state, the intake air manifold temperature is measured to check if the cold start device works.

A fault code (PID 45) is recorded if one of the errors listed in Table 5-4 occurs.

Failure

Output relay grid heater is not valid

Voltage drop below switch off voltage

No increase of intake air manifold temperature during preheating state

Table 5-4 Cold Start Failures and Action Taken

Action Taken

Cold Start is cancelled

5-8

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.3 CRUISE CONTROL

Cruise Control maintains a targeted speed (MPH) by increasing or decreasing fueling. The targeted speed can be selected and adjusted with dash-mounted switches. Up to fi ve digital inputs are required (four for automatic transmission) for Cruise Control operation. A Vehicle

Speed Sensor (VSS) or an output shaft speed message over the J1939 data link is required for

Cruise Control.

5.3.1 OPERATION

Cruise Control operates to control vehicle speed. A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be installed or output shaft speed is received over J1939. Engine speed and power are varied under Cruise

Control to maintain the set vehicle speed. The vehicle speed must be above “Min Cruise Set

Speed” and below “Max Cruise Set Speed.” It is recommended that “Max Cruise Set Speed” be set to the default to allow proper operation of other features such as Fuel Economy Incentive and

PasSmart. The “Max Road Speed” should be used to limit vehicle throttle speed.

Cruise Control can be overridden at any time with the throttle pedal if the vehicle is operating at less than the programmed Max Road Speed.

Clutch pedal and service brake pedal, if con fi gured, are monitored to abort fueling the engine in

Cruise Control Active Mode if there is driver action.

NOTE:

DDEC must see a change of state of the Cruise Master Switch, Clutch Switch (if con fi gured) and Service Brake Switch before Cruise Control can become active upon every ignition cycle.

There are three Cruise Control operation modes as listed in Table 5-5.

Cruise

Control

Mode

Conditions Set Speed

Engine Fuel

Controlled

By Cruise

Control

Off

Active

Standby

Table 5-5

Cruise Control ON/OFF switch is in OFF position or Cruise

Control ON/OFF is switched to ON position although Cruise

Control is not initiated.

Cruise Control ON/OFF switch in ON position and Cruise

Control is initiated and set speed has already been set.

The set speed can be increased or decreased by using the

Resume/Accel and Set/Coast switches.

Cruise Control ON/OFF switch in On position and Cruise

Control formerly active but not allowed anymore or no set speed has been set after switching Cruise Control On and

Cruise Control is initiated.

Three Cruise Control Operation Modes

0 MPH

Set Speed (+/-)

Last Set speed on Hold in

Memory

Yes

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-9

FEATURES

Engine Brakes in Cruise Control (Optional)

If driving conditions cause the vehicle speed to exceed the Cruise Control set speed, engine brakes

(if con fi gured) are activated to keep the desired road speed based on engine brake dash switches.

Cruise Auto Resume (Optional)

The Cruise Auto Resume feature will resume Cruise Control based on the calibration setting.

1 = Cruise Control is resumed immediately after the clutch pedal is released.

2 = Cruise Control is resumed if the clutch has been pushed twice and released within three

(3) seconds.

Adaptive Cruise (Optional)

Adaptive Cruise systems will send a "heart beat" message on the SAE J1939 Data Link. Manual

Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise will be disabled if the message is not received over the data link or the message indicates that there is a failure in Adaptive Cruise. To enable standard Cruise

Control, the driver must toggle the Cruise Master Switch twice within 10 seconds.

Adaptive Cruise uses a third party system to maintain a range between vehicles.

Cruise Enable

Cruise Control is in standby, but not active when the Cruise Control Enable digital input is switched to battery ground.

The Cruise Enable switch is a normally open switch.

Set / Coast

The Set/Coast switch is a momentary switch.

Set: Cruise Speed is set by momentarily contacting the switch to the ON position

(switching the digital input to battery ground). Cruise Control will become active and maintain the vehicle speed present at the time.

Coast: When Cruise Control is active, the Set/Coast input can be used to reduce power and speed by toggling the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the

Set/Coast switch will decrease the set point by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments for Cruise Control. Holding the Set/Coast will decrease the set point by 1 mph

(1.6 km/hr) per second. When released the Cruise Control set point will be at the current speed.

5-10

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Resume / Accel

The Resume/Accel switch is a momentary switch.

Resume: If Cruise Control has been disabled with the service brake or the clutch switch, momentary contact to the ON position (switching the input to battery ground) restores the previously set cruise speed.

Accel: When Cruise Control is active, the Resume/Accel input can be used to increase power and speed by toggling the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the

Resume/Accel switch will increase the set point by 1.24 mph (2 km/hr) increments for Cruise Control. Holding the Resume/Accel will increase the set point by 1.24

mph (2 km/hr) per second. When released the Cruise Control set point will be at the current speed.

Clutch Released (Manual Transmissions)

This input indicates that the clutch is released and is used for suspending Cruise Control and

Auto Resume.

When the clutch is released, the input is at battery ground.

The digital input logic for the Clutch Switch disables Cruise Control in the unlikely event of a broken clutch switch wire.

This switch is a normally closed switch.

Service Brake Released (Automatic and Manual Transmissions)

This input indicates that the brake is released when switched to battery ground. If the brake is activated, then the input is not grounded and Cruise Control is suspended. Cruise Control is resumed by using the Resume/Accel Switch.

The input logic for the Brake Switch disables Cruise Control in the unlikely event of a broken brake switch wire.

This switch is a normally closed switch.

5.3.2 INSTALLATION

The following is a list of switches and CPC sensors that are required for Cruise Control operation.

□ Cruise Control ON/OFF (Switch or J1939)

□ Service Brake (Switch or J1939)

□ Clutch Released for Manual Transmission (Switch or J1939)

□ Set/Coast (Switch or J1939)

□ Resume/Accel (Switch or J1939)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-11

FEATURES

□ Vehicle Speed Sensor (or J1939)

See Figure 5-4 for a diagram of the Cruise Control circuit.

Figure 5-4 Cruise Control Circuit

5-12

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.3.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

To con fi

gure an engine for Cruise Control, the digital inputs listed in Table 5-6 must be selected.

These parameters can be set with VEPS or DRS. Refer to section 4.1, “Digital Inputs,” for more

information.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

Service Brake Switch

Con fi g

CC ON OFF Switch

Con fi g

CC Set Cst Res Accel

Con fi g

Clutch Switch Con fi g

CC Pause Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input

Con fi g

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = No Clutch Switch

1 = 1 Clutch Switch

2 = 2 Clutch Switch*

3 = CCVS1

4 = CCVS2

5 = CCVS3

6 = ETC1

0 = Disabled

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

4 – CCVS1 or CCVS2

5 – CCVS2 or CCVS3

6 – CCVS1 or CCVS3

7 — CCVS1 or CCVS2 or CCVS3

0 = Disable

1 = 1Clutch Switch

2 = PTO Request for AGS2

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = Not Available

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 5-6 Cruise Control Input Con fi guration

Default

0 = Hardwired

0 = No Clutch

Switch

0 = Disabled

1 = 1Clutch

Switch

0 = Hardwired

Access

VEPS, DRS

A Vehicle Speed Sensor must be con fi

gured for Cruise Control. Refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle

Speed Sensor," for additional information.

For multiplexed inputs, refer to section 4.2, “Switch Inputs Received Over the J1939 Data Link,”

for additional information.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-13

FEATURES

The Cruise Control parameters are listed in Table 5-7.

Parameter

Group

Table 5-7

Parameter

Min Cruise Set

Speed

Max Cruise Set

Speed

Increment

Cruise Set

Speed

Decrement

Cruise Set

Speed

Description

Minimum road speed for Cruise Control

Cruise Control vehicle set speed cannot be faster than this value.

Set Speed increment for every

Resume/Accel switch momentary press.

Set Speed decrement for every Set/Coast switch momentary press.

Options

16 – 152 km/hr

48–152 km/hr

0–10 km/hr

Enable Cruise

Auto Resume

Cruise Power

Cruise Control

Enable Engine

Brk

Adaptive Cruise

Control

Enables or disables the auto resume feature.

Enables Cruise Power function

Enables or disables the engine brakes during Cruise Control.

Enables/Disables the feature.

Cruise Control Parameters

0 – Disable

1 – Enable automatic cruise resume function after clutch has been released once

2 – Enable after clutch released twice

0 – High Power

1 – Low Power Only

2 – Cruise Power Enabled

0 – Disable

1 – Enable automatic engine brake operation with Cruise Control

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

Default

32 km/hr

152 km/hr

1.6 km/hr

0 – High

Power

Access

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

5.3.4 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

Cruise Control will be disabled for the following:

□ Throttle Inhibit Switch is grounded

□ VSS fault is detected

□ Hard deceleration, failure of the brake switch

□ Resume/Accel and Set/Coast switches are both grounded

If LIM0 OR LIM1 are grounded and programmed for a vehicle speed limit, the “Cruise Max Set speed” will be limited to this value.

5-14

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.4 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics is a standard feature of DDEC VI. The purpose of this feature is to provide information for problem identi fi cation and problem solving in the form of a code. The MCM and

CPC continuously perform self diagnostic checks and monitors the other system components.

Information for problem identi fi cation and problem solving is enhanced by the detection of faults, retention of fault codes and separation of active from inactive codes.

5.4.1 OPERATION

The engine-mounted MCM includes control logic to provide overall engine management. System diagnostic checks are made at ignition on and continue throughout all engine operating modes.

Sensors provide information to the MCM and CPC regarding various engine and vehicle performance characteristics. The information is used to regulate engine and vehicle performance, provide diagnostic information, and activate the engine protection system.

The instrument panel lamps are listed in Table 5-8.

NOTE:

The MCM and CPC save error codes into memory after the ignition is turned off. The codes will not be stored if there is an interruption of battery power or recycling of the ignition.

The AWL is illuminated and a code is stored if an electronic system fault occurs. This indicates the problem should be diagnosed as soon as possible. The CPC illuminates the AWL and RSL and stores a malfunction code if a potentially engine damaging fault is detected. These codes can be accessed in one of three ways:

□ Commercially available J1587/J1939 diagnostic tools

□ Detroit Diesel Diagnostic Link® (DDDL 7.0)

□ Flashing the AWL and RSL with the SEO/Diagnostic Request Switch

There are two types of diagnostic codes:

□ An active code

- a fault present at the time when checking for codes

□ An inactive code

- a fault which has previously occurred; inactive codes are logged into the CPC and time stamped with the following information:

The dashboard panel lamps listed in Table 5-8 alert the driver of different conditions.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-15

FEATURES

Lamp Lamp Name Description Driver Action

Amber Warning Lamp

(AWL)

Indicates a fault with the engine controls.

Truck can be driven to end of shift. Call for service.

Table 5-8

Red Stop Lamp (RSL)

Indicates a major engine fault that may result in engine damage

Engine derate and / or shutdown sequence will be initiated.

Move the truck to the nearest safe location and shutdown the engine. Call for service

DPF Regeneration Lamp

High Exhaust System

Temperature Lamp (HEST)

Solid yellow indicates a manual regeneration is required.

Blinking yellow and derate or shutdown are possible if back pressure exceeds limits. Blinking yellow during stationary regeneration

Lamp may be red or yellow. Indicates exhaust temperature is above a preset limit. Illuminates during regeneration process if speed below 30 mph and during stationary regeneration

Truck may be driven to end of shift. Call for service.

Blinking light indicates attention required now.

Truck may be driven. If lamp remains illuminated for an extended period – longer than 40 minutes call for service.

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

Yellow lamp Indicates a failure of an Emission

Control device. May illuminate at the same time as the Amber Warning

Lamp

Truck may be driven to end of the shift. Call for service

Instrument Panel Lamps

5-16

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Flashing Fault Codes with AWL / SEL

The Stop Engine Override (SEO)/Diagnostic Request Switch is used to activate the AWL/RSL to fl ash codes. Active codes are fl ashed on the RSL and inactive codes are fl ashed on the AWL.

All codes (inactive and active) are fl ashed in numerical order. Active faults are fl ashed fi rst, followed by inactive.

Flashing codes provide a four digit number (see Figure 5-5). Each fault code is

fl ashed twice in order to help with counting the fl ashes.

If there are no active faults or if there are no inactive faults the number “3” is fl ashed once followed by an ~3s delay.

Figure 5-5 Flashing Fault Codes

The SEO/Diagnostic Request is used to fl ash codes in the following circumstances:

□ Engine Speed is < 100 RPM and the SEO switch is transitioned from the OFF to the ON position

□ Idle governor is ACTIVE and the SEO switch is transitioned from the OFF to the ON position

□ Vehicle Speed is < 3 mph and the Park Brake is activated and the SEO switch is transitioned from the OFF to the ON position

□ The engine is not running and ignition is ON

□ The engine is idling and not in an "engine protection" condition

The feature is deactivated once the SEO switch is returned to the OFF position or the above conditions are no longer satis fi ed.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-17

FEATURES

In the applications where SEO is a momentary push-button, the button shall have to be pressed and held in the ON position for an uninterrupted period of three seconds in order to activate the feature. The feature can be deactivated after the SEO push-button is fi rst released (off) for three seconds and then held in the on position for another three seconds.

Programming Requirements & Flexibility

The fl

ashing fault code parameters are listed in Table 5-9.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

Fault Code

Flashing

Enable

Enables /

Disables the fault code fl ashing feature.

0 – Disabled

1 – Enabled

1 15 DI

Selection

Digital Input function for

Diagnostic

Request feature

0 – Disabled

1 – Stop Engine Override

Switch / Diagnostic Request

Switch

2 – CC Cancel*

3 – Diagnostic Request

Switch

* Not available in NAFTA

Table 5-9 Flashing Fault Code Parameters

Default

1 – Enabled

1 – Stop Engine

Override Switch

/ Diagnostic

Request Switch

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

5-18

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.5 DUAL SPEED AXLE

The Dual Speed Axle feature allows a digital input to be con fi gured to switch between two axle ratios for calculation of vehicle speed.

5.5.1 OPERATION

When the digital input is open the fi rst axle ratio will be used. When the switch is grounded, the second axle ratio will be used. The vehicle must be stopped before switching the axle ratios.

5.5.2 INSTALLATION

The Dual Speed Axle Switch is pin 1/1 on the CPC.

5.5.3 PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY & REQUIREMENTS

The digital input listed in Table 5-10 can be con fi gured by VEPS or DRS.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

2nd Axle Speed Switch

Con fi g

1 01 DI Selection

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Dual Speed Axle

2 = Enable Transmission Retarder Input

3 = FUSO Auxiliary Brake Cut Switch

Table 5-10 Dual Speed Axle Digital Input

Default

0 = Hardwired

0 = Disable

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

Both axle ratios listed in Table 5-11 must also be programmed with VEPS, DRS or DDDL 7.0.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Axle Ratio

Two Spd Axle

Second Axle Ratio

Indicates the fi rst axle ratio of the vehicle.

Indicates the second axle ratio of the vehicle.

Table 5-11 Programming the Axle Ratios

Range

1.0 – 20.00

Default

5.29

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-19

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-20

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.6 ENGINE BRAKE CONTROLS – MBE900 AND MBE4000

The Engine Brake option converts a power-producing diesel engine into a power-absorbing air compressor. This is accomplished by opening the constant throttle valve over all cylinders near the top of the normal compression stroke and releasing the compressed cylinder charge to exhaust.

The release of the compressed air to atmospheric pressure prevents the return of energy to the engine piston on the expansion stroke, the effect being a net energy loss. Fueling is cut off when this occurs. The constant throttle valves are open over all cycles, not just the exhaust cycle.

5.6.1 OPERATION

A dash mounted On/Off Switch is used to enable the Engine Brake option. Engine Brake operations are allowed only when all of the following conditions are met:

□ Percent throttle <4%

□ Driveline open – engine speed >1100 rpm

□ Driveline closed – engine speed >800 rpm

□ Road Speed > 0 mph (programmable)

□ ABS not active

□ Clutch pedal released (if equipped)

□ Engine not fueling

□ Engine not in PTO mode

□ Torque converter locked up (automatic transmission)

If all of these conditions are met, engine brake can be activated when the engine brake switches are on. Engine brakes will be deactivated when at least one of these conditions is no longer met or the engine brake switch is turned back to the OFF position.

The following are features and options for Engine Brake:

□ Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake

□ Engine Brake Disable

□ Engine Brake Active

□ Engine Fan Braking

□ Clutch Released Input

□ Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes

□ Min MPH for Engine Brakes

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-21

FEATURES

Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake

The Engine Brake option can also provide Engine Brake capability when the vehicle is in Cruise

Control or Road Speed Limit. For example, if the vehicle is going down hill in Cruise Control while the engine brake is selected, the ECU will control the amount of Engine Brake with respect to the Cruise Control set speed. The level of Engine Brake (low, medium, high) selected with the dash switches will be the maximum amount of engine braking the ECU allows.

Each engine braking level has a hysteresis for actuating the engine brake or for deactuating the engine brake.

Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes

This option allows the engine brakes switches to be ON but not engage the engine brakes until the service brake is pressed.

Engine Brake Active

The Engine Brake Active option uses a digital output that can be used to drive an Engine Brake

Active Lamp. This output is switched to battery ground whenever the engine brake is active.

Engine Brake Disable

The Engine Brake Disable option uses an input which is switched to ground whenever a vehicle system, such as a traction control device, does not allow engine braking to occur. This option is required for most automatic transmissions.

DDEC VI also supports the J1939 message to disable engine brakes (TSC1 command to source address 15).

Engine Fan Braking

The Engine Fan Braking option turns on the cooling fan when the engine brake level is high and

DDEC fan control is enabled. This creates about 20 to 40 hp additional engine braking power

depending on the size of the cooling fan. For additional information, refer to section 5.11, "Fan

Controls."

Clutch Released Input

The Clutch Released input will prevent the engine brakes from being turned on when the clutch is

pressed. This input is required for use with manual transmissions. Refer to section 4.1, "Digital

Inputs," for additional information.

5-22

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Min Vehicle Speed for Engine Brakes

This option will disable the engine brakes until a minimum vehicle speed is reached. A Vehicle

Speed Sensor (VSS) is required. Refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle Speed Sensor," for additional

information.

5.6.2 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

Engine Brake must be speci fi ed at the time of engine order or by contacting Detroit Diesel

Technical Service.

Con

guration for MBE900 Exhaust Flap Applications

The MCM

Exhaust Flap con fi guration parameters are listed in Table 5-12.

MCM

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default Access

PWM7

Con fi guration

SW4

Con fi guration

0 – No Function

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or Brake Gate

0 – No Function

6 – Jake Brake 1 or

Decompression Valve

0 – No Function

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust

Flap or Brake Gate

0 – No Function

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Table 5-12 MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Exhaust Flap Applications -

MBE900 Engine

The CPC

Exhaust Flap con fi guration parameters are listed in Table 5-13.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Options

Engine Brake

Con fi guration

Stage 1 Mask

Engine Brake

Enables the type of engine brake required

Mask determines which device turns on for low braking

0 = No Engine Brake

1 = Decompression Valve Only or

Exhaust Flap Only

2 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

3 = Jake Compression Brake or Brake

Gate

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Setting Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-23

FEATURES

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Options

Stage 1

Factor Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of low braking

Stage 2 Mask

Engine Brake

Stage 2

Factor Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of medium braking

0 – 100%

Mask determines which device turns on for medium braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0 – 100%

Stage 3 Mask

Engine Brake

Mask determines which device turns on for high braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Stage 3

Factor Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0 – 100%

Trans Mask

Engine Brake

—

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Trans Factor

Engine Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0–100%

4 18 DI

Selection

(Optional)

—

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 = Enable Engine Hood Tilt Switch

3 = AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 = RPM Freeze

5 = Engine Brake Disable

6 = Fast Engine Heat-up Switch

Setting Access

100

0 =

Disable

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

5-24

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Setting Access

Engine Brake

Switch Con fi g

J1939 Steps

Engine Brake

J1939 Engine

Retarder

Con fi g

—

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = Not Available

0 = Variable Controlled Brake

1 = 1 Step

2 = Low/High Steps

3 = Low/Med/High Steps

255 = Not Con fi gured

3 = Jake or Constant Throttle Brake

4 = Exhaust Flap

255 = Not Con fi gured

0 = Hardwired

1 = 1 Step

4 =

Exhaust

Flap

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Table 5-13 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Exhaust Flap Applications -

MBE900 Engine

See Figure 5-6 for the MBE900 exhaust

fl ap only schematic.

Figure 5-6 Exhaust Flap Only – MBE900

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-25

FEATURES

Con

guration for MBE900 Compression Brake Only Applications

The MCM

Compression Brake con fi guration parameters are listed in Table 5-14.

MCM

Parameter

Group

Table 5-14

Parameter Setting Options Default Access

PWM7

Con fi guration

SW4

Con fi guration

6 – Jake

Brake 1 or

Decompression

Valve

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or Brake Gate

0 – No Function

6 – Jake Brake 1 or

Decompression Valve

0 – No Function

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or

Brake Gate

0 – No Function

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Compression Brake Applications

- MBE900 Engine

The CPC

Compression Brake con fi

guration parameters are listed in Table 5-15.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Options

Engine Brake

Con fi guration

Enables the type of engine brake required

Stage 1 Mask

Engine Brake

Mask determines which device turns on for low braking

0 = No Engine Brake

1 = Decompression Valve Only or

Exhaust Flap Only

2 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

3 = Jake Compression Brake or Brake

Gate

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Stage 1

Factor Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of low braking

0 – 100%

Stage 2 Mask

Engine Brake

Mask determines which device turns on for medium braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Setting Access

100

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

5-26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Options Setting Access

Stage 2

Factor Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of medium braking

Trans Factor

Engine Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0 – 100%

Stage 3 Mask

Engine Brake

Mask determines which device turns on for high braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Stage 3

Factor Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0 – 100%

Trans Mask

Engine Brake

—

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0–100%

4 18 DI

Selection

(Optional)

Engine Brake

Switch Con fi g

—

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 = Enable Engine Hood Tilt Switch

3 = AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 = RPM Freeze

5 = Engine Brake Disable

6 = Fast Engine Heat-up Switch

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = No Available

100

0 =

Disable

0 = Hardwired

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-27

FEATURES

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Setting Access

J1939 Steps

Engine Brake

—

0 = Variable Controlled Brake

1 = 1 Step

2 = Low/High Steps

3 = Low/Med/High Steps

255 = Not Con fi gured

1 = 1 Step

VEPS or

DRS

J1939 Engine

Retarder

Con fi g

—

3 = Jake or Constant Throttle Brake

4 = Exhaust Flap

255 = Not Con fi gured

3 =

Jake or

Constant

Throttle

Brake

VEPS or

DRS

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 5-15 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Compression Brake Applications -

MBE900 Engine

See Figure 5-7 for the MBE900 compression brake only schematic.

Figure 5-7 Compression Brake Only – MBE900

5-28

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Con

guration for MBE900 Compression and Exhaust Brake Applications

The MCM

Compression and Exhaust Brake con fi guration parameters are listed in Table 5-16 .

MCM

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options Default Access

PWM7

Con fi guration

SW4

Con fi guration

6 – Jake

Brake 1 or

Decompression

Valve

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or Brake Gate

0 – No Function

6 – Jake Brake 1 or

Decompression Valve

0 – No Function

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or

Brake Gate

0 – No Function

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

Table 5-16 MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Compression and Exhaust Brake

Applications - MBE900 Engine

The CPC Compression and Exhaust Brake con fi

g parameters are listed in Table 5-17.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Description

Options

Engine

Brake Confi guration

Stage 1

Mask Engine

Brake

Enables the type of engine brake required

Mask determines which device turns on for low braking

0 = No Engine Brake

1 = Decompression Valve Only or Exhaust fl ap Only

2 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

3 = Jake Compression Brake or Brake Gate

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Stage 1

Factor

Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of low braking

0 – 100%

Stage 2

Mask Engine

Brake

Mask determines which device turns on for medium braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Setting Access

100

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-29

FEATURES

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Description

Options Setting

Stage 2

Factor

Engine

Brake

Stage 3

Factor

Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of medium braking

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0 – 100%

Stage 3

Mask Engine

Brake

Mask determines which device turns on for high braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0 – 100%

Trans Mask

Engine

Brake

—

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Trans Factor

Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0–100%

4 18 DI

Selection

(Optional)

Engine

Brake Switch

Con fi g

—

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Engine Door Bus*

2 = Enable Engine Hood

3 = AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 = RPM Freeze

5 = Engine Brake Disable

6 = Fast Engine Heat-up Switch

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = Not Available

100

0 =

Disable

0 = Hardwired

Access

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

5-30

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Description

Options Setting Access

J1939 Steps

Engine

Brake

—

0 = Variable Controlled Brake

1 = 1 Step

2 = Low/High Steps

3 = Low/Med/High Steps

255 = Not Con fi gured

2 =

Low/High

Steps

VEPS or

DRS

J1939

Engine

Retarder

Con fi g

* Not supported in NAFTA

—

3 = Jake or Constant Throttle Brake

4 = Exhaust Flap

255 = Not Con fi gured

4 =

Exhaust

Flap

VEPS or

DRS

Table 5-17 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Compression and Exhaust Brake

Applications - MBE900 Engine

See Figure 5-8 for a schematic of the MBE900 compression brake and exhaust

fl ap.

Figure 5-8 Compression Brake and Exhaust Flap – MBE900

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-31

FEATURES

Con

guration for MBE4000 Compression Brake and Brake Gate Applications

The MCM

Compression Brake and Brake Gate con fi guration parameters are listed in Table

5-18.

MCM

Parameter

Group

Table 5-18

Parameter Setting Options Default Access

PWM7

Con fi guration

SW4

Con fi guration

6 – Jake

Brake 1 or

Decompression

Valve

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or Brake Gate

0 – No Function

6 – Jake Brake 1 or

Decompression Valve

0 – No Function

7 – Jake Brake 2 or Exhaust Flap or

Brake Gate

0 – No Function

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

MCM Con fi guration Parameter for Compression and Brake Gate

Applications - MBE4000 Engine

The CPC

Compression Brake and Brake Gate con fi guration parameters are listed in Table 5-19.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Engine

Brake Confi guration

Stage

1 Mask

Engine

Brake

Stage 1

Factor

Engine

Brake

Stage

2 Mask

Engine

Brake

Options

Enables the type of engine brake required

Mask determines which device turns on for low braking

0 = No Engine Brake

1 = Decompression Valve Only or Exhaust

Flap Only

2 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

3 = Jake Compression Brake or Brake Gate

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Factor determines the amount of low braking

0 – 100%

Mask determines which device turns on for medium braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Settings Access

100

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

5-32

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Options

Stage 2

Factor

Engine

Brake

Stage

3 Mask

Engine

Brake

Stage 3

Factor

Engine

Brake

Trans Mask

Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of medium braking

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0 – 100%

Mask determines which device turns on for high braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0 – 100%

—

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Trans Factor

Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0–100%

ACC Mask

Engine

Brake

OI Mask

Engine

Brake

4 18 DI

Selection

(Optional)

—

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

64 = Decompression Valve Only or Jake

Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake Gate or

Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Engine Door Bus

2 = Enable Engine Hood Tilt Switch

3 = AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 = RPM Freeze

5 = Engine Brake Disable

6 = Fast Engine Heat-up Switch

Settings Access

100

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-33

FEATURES

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Eng Brake

Switch

Con fi g

—

J1939 Steps

Engine

Brake

J1939

Engine

Retarder

Con fi g

—

Options

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = Not Available

0 = Variable Controlled Brake

1 = 1 Step

2 = Low/High Steps

3 = Low/Med/High Steps

255 = Not Con fi gured

3 = Jake or Constant Throttle Brake

4 = Exhaust Flap

255 = Not Con fi gured

Table 5-19

Settings Access

3 =

Steps

4 =

Exhaust

Flap

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

CPC Con fi guration Parameter for MBE4000 Compression Brake and

Brake Gate Applications

See Figure 5-9 for a schematic of the MBE4000 compression brake and brake gate.

Figure 5-9 Compression Brake and Brake Grate – MBE4000

5-34

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Cruise Control of Engine Brake Option

The parameters listed in Table 5-20 are options for the Engine Brake with Cruise Control.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Default Access

Cruise Control

Enable Eng Brk

Hi Eng Brk Max

Cruise RSL Spd

Allows the engine brake to be used while on cruise control or the road speed limit if the vehicle exceeds the cruise set speed or road speed limit. Automatic engine brake operation with

Cruise Control.

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 3 activation

Hi Eng Brk Min

Cruise RSL Spd

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 3 deactivation

Low Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Low Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

Med Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Med Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

Min Eng Spd for

Engine Brakes

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 1 activation

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 1 deactivation

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 2 activation

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 2 deactivation

Minimum engine speed for Engine

Brake operation.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0–48 km/h

0 — 4000 rpm

0 = Disable

10 km/h

6 km/h

5 km/h

2 km/h

7 km/h

5 km/h

1100 rpm

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

Table 5-20 Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine Brake Parameters

The optional digital output listed in listed in Table 5-21 can be used to drive an Engine Brake

Active Lamp.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 09 DO

Selection

3 = Engine Brake

Active

0 = Disabled

1 = Grid Heater

Hardwired*

2 = AGS2 Backup Lamp

3 = Engine Brake Active

4 = Not Used

5 = FUSO Engine Brake

Active Lamp*

*Not Supported in NAFTA

Table 5-21 Optional Digital Output for Engine Brakes

Default

0 = Disabled

Access

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-35

FEATURES

The Engine Fan Braking option parameter is listed in Table 5-22.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Table 5-22

Options

Eng Brake

Enable Auto

Fan

Provides additional engine braking by activating the DDEC controlled fan whenever the engine brakes are active in high. This function requires both DDEC engine brake controls and

DDEC fan controls.

Optional Fan Braking for Engine Brakes

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Engine Brake Option with Service Brake

The Service Brake control of Engine Brake parameter is listed in Table 5-23.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

Service Brk

Enable Eng

Brakes

When this function is enabled, an input from the service brake is required in order to activate the engine brake.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable automatic engine brake when applied service brake

2 = Operator selection and service brake for engine brake activation

Table 5-23 Service Brake Control of Engine Brake Parameter

Default

0 = Disable

VEPS,

DRS, or

DDDL 7.0

Default Access

Access

VEPS,

DRS, or

DDDL

7.0

Engine Brakes Option with Minimum Vehicle Speed

The minimum vehicle speed for the Engine Brakes option is listed in Table 5-24.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Default Access

Min Road Spd Eng

Brk Operation

The minimum vehicle speed required before engine braking will occur.

0-200 km/hr 0 km/hr

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

Table 5-24 Minimum Vehicle Speed for Engine Brakes Option

5.6.3 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

DDEC VI will respond to requests from other vehicle systems via the J1939 data link to disable or enable engine brake.

5-36

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.7 ENGINE BRAKE CONTROLS – SERIES 60

The Engine Brake option converts a power-producing diesel engine into a power-absorbing air compressor. This is accomplished by opening the cylinder exhaust valves near the top of the normal compression stroke and releasing the compressed cylinder charge to exhaust. The release of the compressed air to atmospheric pressure prevents the return of energy to the engine piston on the expansion stroke, the effect being a net energy loss. Fueling is cut off when this occurs.

5.7.1 OPERATION

A dash mounted On/Off Switch is used to enable the Engine Brake option. DDEC VI will directly control the engine brake solenoids and turbocharger VGT position to produce the desired low, medium, or high braking power. This braking power is based on the driver selected intensity switch for a Series 60 engine.

The following conditions must be met for engine brakes to be activated:

□ Percent throttle <4%

□ Driveline open – engine speed >1100 rpm

□ Driveline closed – engine speed >800 rpm

□ Road Speed > 0 mph (programmable)

□ ABS not active

□ Clutch pedal released (if equipped)

□ Engine not fueling

□ Engine not in PTO mode

□ Torque converter in lockup (automatic transmission)

The following are features and options for Engine Brake:

□ Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake

□ Engine Brake Disable

□ Engine Brake Active

□ Engine Fan Braking

□ Clutch Released Input

□ Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes

□ Min. MPH for Engine Brakes

Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes

This option allows the engine brakes switches to be ON but not engage the engine brakes until the service brake is pressed.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-37

FEATURES

Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake

The Engine Brake option can also provide Engine Brake capability when the vehicle is in Cruise

Each engine braking level has a hysteresis for actuating the engine brake or for deactivating the engine brake.

Engine Brake Disable

DDEC VI also supports the J1939 message to disable engine brakes (TSC1 command to source address 15).

Engine Brake Active

The Engine Brake Active option uses a digital output that can be used to drive an Engine Brake

Active lamp. This output is switched to battery ground whenever the engine brake is active.

Engine Fan Braking

The Engine Fan Braking option turns on the cooling fan when the engine brake level is high and

DDEC fan control is enabled. This creates about 20 to 40 hp additional engine braking power

depending on the size of the cooling fan. For additional information, refer to section 5.11, "Fan

Controls."

Clutch Released Input

The Clutch Released input will prevent the engine brakes from being turned on when the clutch is

pressed. This input is required for use with manual transmissions. Refer to section 4.1, "Digital

Inputs," for additional information.

Min Vehicle Speed for Engine Brakes

This option will disable the engine brakes until a minimum vehicle speed is reached. A Vehicle

Speed Sensor (VSS) is required. Refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle Speed Sensor," for additional

information.

5-38

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.7.2 INSTALLATION

See Figure 5-10 for a DDEC VI internal engine brake schematic.

Figure 5-10 Engine Brake for DDEC VI – Series 60

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-39

FEATURES

5.7.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

Engine Brake must be speci fi ed at the time of engine order. This enables the two digital outputs required in the MCM. The

Jake Brake con fi guration parameters are listed in Table 5-25.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Engine

Brake Confi guration

Stage

1 Mask

Engine

Brake

Stage 1

Factor

Engine

Brake

Stage

2 Mask

Engine

Brake

Stage 2

Factor

Engine

Brake

Stage

3 Mask

Engine

Brake

Stage 3

Factor

Engine

Brake

Options

Enables the type of engine brake required

Mask determines which device turns on for low braking

0 = No Engine Brake

1 = Decompression Valve Only or

Exhaust Flap Only

2 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

3 = Jake Compression Brake or Brake

Gate

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or

Jake Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake

Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Factor determines the amount of low braking

0 – 100%

Mask determines which device turns on for medium braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or

Jake Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake

Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Factor determines the amount of medium braking

0 – 100%

Mask determines which device turns on for high braking

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or

Jake Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake

Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0 – 100%

Settings Access

100

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

5-40

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Settings Access

Trans Mask

Engine

Brake

—

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

17 = Jake Brake 2nd Stage

64 = Decompression Valve Only or

Jake Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake

Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

Trans

Factor

Engine

Brake

Factor determines the amount of high braking

0–100% 100

4 18 DI

Selection

(Optional)

Eng Brake

Switch

Con fi g

J1939 Steps

Engine

Brake

J1939

Engine

Retarder

Con fi g

ACC Mask

Engine

Brake

OI Mask

Engine

Brake

—

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Engine Door Bus

2 = Enable Engine Hood

3 = AGS2 PTO Feedback

4 = RPM Freeze

5 = Engine Brake Disable

6 = Fast Engine Heat-up Switch

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = Not Available

0 = Variable Controlled Brake

1 = 1 Step

2 = Low/High Steps

3 = Low/Med/High Steps

255 = Not Con fi gured

3 = Jake or Constant Throttle Brake

4 = Exhaust Flap

255 = Not Con fi gured

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

64 = Decompression Valve Only or

Jake Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake

Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

0 = No Engine Brake

16 = Exhaust Flap Only

64 = Decompression Valve Only or

Jake Brake 1st Stage

80 = Decompression Valve & Exhaust

Flap

81 = Decompression Valve & Brake

Gate or Jake Brake 3rd Stage

2 or 3

Table 5-25 CPC Con fi guration Parameter for Jake Brake Applications

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-41

FEATURES

The parameters listed in Table 5-26 are for the Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine

Brake option.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Default Access

Cruise Control

Enable Eng Brk

Hi Eng Brk Max

Cruise RSL Spd

Allows the engine brake to be used while on cruise control or the road speed limit if the vehicle exceeds the cruise set speed or road speed limit. Automatic engine brake with Cruise Control.

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 3 activation

Hi Eng Brk Min

Cruise RSL Spd

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 3 deactivation

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0–48 km/h

Low Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Low Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

Med Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Med Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

Min Eng Spd for

Engine Brakes

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 1 activation

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 1 deactivation

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 2 activation

CC/RSL vehicle-over-speed for engine brake stage 2 deactivation

Minimum engine speed for Engine

Brake operation.

0–48 km/h

0–4000 rpm

0 = Disable

10 km/h

6 km/h

5 km/h

2 km/h

7 km/h

5 km/h

1100 rpm

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

Table 5-26 Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine Brake Parameters

The optional digital output listed in Table 5-27 can be used to drive an Engine Brake Active Lamp.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

3 09 DO

Selection

3 = Engine Brake

Active

0 = Disabled

1 = Grid Heater

Hardwired*

2 = AGS2 Backup Lamp

3 = Engine Brake Active

4 = Oil Temp High Lamp*

5 = FUSO Engine Brake

Active Lamp*

*Not Supported in NAFTA

Table 5-27 Optional Digital Output for Engine Brakes

Default

0 = Disabled

Access

VEPS,

DRS

5-42

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The Engine Fan Braking option parameter is listed in Table 5-28.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

Provides additional engine braking by activating the DDEC controlled fan whenever the engine brakes are active in high. This function requires both DDEC engine brake controls and

DDEC fan controls.

Table 5-28 Optional Fan Braking for Engine Brakes

Options

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

Default

0 = Disable

The parameter listed in Table 5-29 is for Service Brake Control of the Engine Brakes option.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

Service Brk

Enable Eng

Brakes

When this function is enabled, an input from the service brake is required in order to activate the engine brake.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable automatic engine brake when applied service brake

2 = Operator selection and service brake for engine brake activation

Table 5-29 Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes Parameter

Default

0 = Disable

The parameter listed in Table 5-30 is the Minimum Vehicle Speed needed for engine braking to occur.

CPC

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Min Road Spd Eng

Brk Operation

Description

The minimum vehicle speed required before engine braking will occur.

Table 5-30 Minimum MPH for Engine Brakes Option

Options

0–200 KPH

Default

0 KPH

5.7.4 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

DDEC will respond to requests from other vehicle systems via SAE J1939 Data Link to disable the engine brakes.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-43

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-44

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.8 ENGINE PROTECTION

The DDEC VI Engine Protection system monitors all engine sensors and electronic components, and recognizes system malfunctions. If a critical fault is detected, the Amber Warning Lamp

(AWL) and Red Stop Lamp (RSL) illuminate. The malfunction codes are logged into the CPC's memory.

The standard parameters which are monitored for engine protection are:

□ Low coolant level

□ High coolant temperature

□ Low oil pressure

□ High soot level (DPF)

□ Uncontrolled DPF Regeneration

5.8.1 OPERATION

Engine Protection is a vital part of MCM/CPC programming and software. DDEC VI monitors coolant level, various pressures and temperatures, and compares these parameters against the allowable limits to determine when a critical fault is reached. The AWL is illuminated and a code logged if there is an electronic system fault. This indicates the problem should be diagnosed as soon as possible. The CPC illuminates the AWL and RSL and stores a malfunction code if a potentially engine damaging fault is detected. Once a critical fault is reached, the AWL and

RSL are illuminated and a 60 (coolant temp, coolant level, oil level) or 30 (oil pressure) second timer starts a countdown to the desired level of protection. The AWL will fl ash for 20 seconds and the RSL will fl ash for 10 seconds before the engine shuts down. The fl ashing will occur only if protection shutdown is enabled. Temperature and pressure limits are established in the engine calibration and may differ slightly from one engine model to another.

Engine Protection consists of different protection levels:

□ Warning

□ Shutdown

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-45

FEATURES

Warning

The AWL illuminates when the parameter value falls below the pre-warning level. Speed and/or torque may be limited based on the engine protection parameter.

Shutdown

The AWL and RSL are illuminated if shutdown is enabled, the engine shuts down 60 seconds after the RSL is illuminated for coolant level or coolant temperature. The engine shuts down 30 seconds after the RSL is illuminated for oil pressure or DPF shutdown. The Stop Engine Override

Switch is available to prevent engine shutdown at the operator's discretion.

An SEO Switch is required when this engine protection option is selected. Refer to section 5.8.2.

The SEO options are available to prevent engine shutdown at the operator's discretion.

5.8.2 STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE OPTION

The Stop Engine Override Switch is used for a momentary override. DDEC VI will record the number of times the override is activated after a fault occurs.

Momentary Override

- An SEO switch is used to override the shutdown sequence. This override resets the 60 second (30 seconds for oil pressure) shutdown timer. The switch must be recycled after fi ve seconds to obtain a subsequent override.

NOTE:

The operator has the responsibility to take action to avoid engine damage.

An additional override will occur when a DPF soot load or diagnostic shutdown is in progress and the CPC is requesting a DPF regeneration. This will give a blocked or sooty DPF the chance to be cleared before determining whether to shutdown the engine.

5-46

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.8.3 PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY

DDEC VI is programmed with pressure, temperature, and level protection limits for each parameter monitored. Rampdown is always enabled. Shutdown can be con fi gured for certain parameters.

DDEC VI engine protection system parameters are listed in Table 5-31 .

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Coolant Temp Eng

Protect Shtn

Coolant Level Eng

Protect Shtn

Description

Enable/Disable shutdown for high coolant temperature

Enable/Disable shutdown for low coolant level

Options

0 = Warning

1 = Engine Shutdown

0 = Warning

1 = Engine Shutdown

Default

1 = Engine

Shutdown

1 = Engine

Shutdown

Oil Press Eng

Protect Shtn

Oil Level Eng

Protect Shtn

Enable/Disable shutdown for low oil pressure

Enable/Disable shutdown for low oil level

0 = Warning

1 = Engine Shutdown

0 = Warning

1 = Engine Shutdown

1 = Engine

Shutdown

1 = Engine

Shutdown

Access

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

Table 5-31 Engine Protection

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-47

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-48

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.9 ENGINE STARTER CONTROL

Engine starters may be enabled by either the ignition-run key switch (KL-50) (see Figure 5-11) or the MCM (see Figure 5-12).

Figure 5-11 Key Switch Starter Control

Figure 5-12 MCM Starter Control

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-49

FEATURES

5.9.1 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The Engine Starter Control settings are listed in Table 5-32.

Parameter

Starter Type

Control

Table 5-32

Options

0 = Starter activated via key switch

1 = Starter activated via MCM

Engine Starter Control Settings — MCM

Default

NOTE:

If the parameter is set for MCM Starter Control and the starter is wired for Key Switch control, the engine will crank but will not start.

5-50

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.10 ETHER STARTING – SERIES 60

Information not available at this time.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-51

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-52

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.11 FAN CONTROL

The purpose of the Fan Control feature is to electronically control engine cooling fan activation and to provide a load for vehicle retardation, when required. DDEC VI Fan Controls are designed to optimally control the engine cooling fan(s) based on engine cooling requirements.

Fan Controls are designed to use other system inputs such as A/C pressure switches and operator requested fan operation.

5.11.1 OPERATION

DDEC VI continuously monitors and compares the coolant and intake manifold air temperature, engine torque, engine operation mode, and various optional inputs to calibrated levels stored within DDEC VI. These limits are factory con fi gured based on application.

When these temperature levels exceed the preset fan ON temperature value, DDEC VI will enable the fan control output(s) that activate the fan. The fan will remain on, cooling the engine with the increased air fl ow until the temperature levels reach the preset fan OFF temperature.

DDEC VI provides fan control for four different fan con fi gurations:

□

Single-speed fan (two outputs) (refer to section 5.11.2)

□

Single-speed fan (one output) (refer to section 5.11.3)

□

Dual fans (refer to section 5.11.4)

□

Two-speed fan (refer to section 5.11.5)

□

Variable speed fan without fan speed feedback (refer to section 5.11.6)

□

Variable speed fan with fan speed feedback (refer to section 5.11.7)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-53

FEATURES

5.11.2 SINGLE–SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 4)

This fan type must be used if the current exceeds 2A. The two outputs (Fan Control #1 and Fan

Control #2) must be wired together. The single-speed fan control uses two digital outputs to drive a single-speed fan. Fan Control #1 and #2 are open circuit to turn the fan ON. The fan will remain ON for a minimum of 30 seconds. The fan output will not be enabled until fi ve seconds after the engine has started.

NOTE:

Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

Fan Control #1 and #2 are open circuit when at least one of the following conditions occur:

□ Coolant temperature above factory set levels

□ Intake manifold temperature above factory set levels

□ Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) – optional

□ Coolant or intake manifold air temperature sensor fails

□ Engine Brake is active at high level (optional)

□ Fan Control Override Switch is grounded (ON)

□ PTO is enabled and active – optional

Single-Speed Fan Installation

This section provides a schematic of the speci fi c connection from DDEC VI to the fan. See

Figure 5-13. Compatible fans may be obtained from several vendors.

Figure 5-13

5-54

Single-speed Fan – Fan Type 4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The MCM options for the single-speed fan – Type 4 are listed in Table 5-33.

Parameter

Fan Type

SW3

Con fi guration

PWM6

Con fi guration

Setting

4 – Single-Speed

Fan – 2 Outputs

17 = Single-speed

Fan or Two-speed

Fan Low

5 = Two-speed

Fan High or

PWM Fan

Options

0 = 2–Speed Fan with Ambient Temp Offset

1 = 2–Speed Fan

2 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

3 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback

4 = Single-Speed Fan – 2 Outputs

5 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

6 = Dual Fan

7 = Single-speed Fan – 1 Output

8 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

9 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

255 = No Fan

0 = No Function

17 = Single-speed Fan or Two-speed Fan

Low

0–= No Function

5 = Two-speed Fan High or PWM Fan

Default

255 – No Fan

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 = No Function VEPS, DRS

Table 5-33 Single-speed Fan – Type 4 MCM Options

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-55

FEATURES

The CPC options for the single-speed fan – Type 4 are listed in Table 5-34.

Parameter

Group

Table 5-34

Parameter Description Options

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Enable

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

PTO Enable Auto

Fan Activation

Air Condition

Enable Auto Fan

J1939 Fan

Request Enable

Fan AC Hold Time

Enables/disables the road speed threshold for AC fan.

Road speed threshold above which the A/C fan request is not using the hold time

Enables/disables turning on the fan with engine brakes.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the

PTO is active.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the air conditioning is on.

Enables the fan based on a J1939 CM1 fan request.

Minimum fan on time for AC

Hold Time Fan Minimum fan on time

Mode of AC

Status Input

De fi nes type of input for A/C switch

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 – 250 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0–600 sec

0 = Disable

1 = AC Active Closed

2 = AC Active Open

3 = LIM Active Closed

4 = LIM Active Open

Single-speed Fan – Type 4 CPC Options

Default

0 = Disable

32 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

180 sec

10 sec

2 = AC

Active Open

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

5-56

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.11.3 SINGLE–SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 7)

The single-speed fan control (type 7) uses one digital output (Fan Control #1) to drive a single-speed fan. This fan type can be used if the current is less than 2.0 A. Fan Control #1 is an open circuit to turn the fan ON. The fan will remain ON for a minimum of 30 seconds. The fan output will not be enabled until fi ve seconds after the engine has started.

NOTE:

Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

Fan Control #1 is open circuit when at least one of the following conditions occur:

□ Coolant temperature above factory set levels

□ Intake manifold temperature above factory set levels

□ Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) – optional

□ Coolant or intake manifold air temperature sensor fails

□ Engine Brake is active at high level (optional)

□ Fan Control Override Switch is grounded (ON)

□ PTO is enabled and active – optional

Single-Speed Fan Installation

This section provides a schematic of the speci fi c connection from DDEC VI to the fan. See Figure

5-14. Compatible fans may be obtained from several vendors.

Figure 5-14 Single-speed Fan – Fan Type 7

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-57

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The MCM options for the single-speed fan – Type 7 are listed in Table 5-35.

Parameter

Fan Type

SW3

Con fi guration

Table 5-35

Setting

7 = Single-speed

Fan – 1 Output

17 = Single-speed

Fan or Two-speed

Fan Low

Options

0 = 2–Speed Fan with Ambient Temp Offset

1 = 2–Speed Fan

2 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

3 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback

4 = Single-Speed Fan – 2 Outputs

5 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

6 = Dual Fan

7 = Single-speed Fan – 1 Output

8 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

9 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

255 = No Fan

0 = No Function

17 = Single-speed Fan or Two-speed Fan

Low

Default

255 – No Fan

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 = No Function VEPS, DRS

Single-speed Fan – Type 7 MCM Options

5-58

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The CPC options for the single-speed fan – Type 7 are listed in Table 5-36.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Enable

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

PTO Enable Auto

Fan Activation

Air Condition

Enable Auto Fan

J1939 Fan Request

Enable

Fan AC Hold Time

Enables/disables the road speed threshold for AC fan.

Road speed threshold above which the A/C fan request is not using the hold time

Enables/disables turning on the fan with engine brakes.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the PTO is active.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the air conditioning is on.

Enables the fan based on a J1939

CM1 fan request.

Minimum fan on time for AC

Hold Time Fan Minimum fan on time

Mode of AC Status

Input

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 – 250 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0–600 sec

De fi nes type of input for A/C switch

0 = Disable

1 = AC Active Closed

2 = AC Active Open

3 = LIM Active Closed

4 = LIM Active Open

Table 5-36 Single-speed Fan – Type 7 CPC Options

Default

0 = Disable

32 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

180 sec

10 sec

2 = AC

Active Open

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-59

FEATURES

5.11.4 DUAL FANS (FAN TYPE 6)

This con fi guration uses two digital outputs, Fan Control #1 and Fan Control #2, to drive two separate single-speed fans. Fan Control #1 and Fan Control #2 are an open circuit to turn ON each fan respectively. The fan remains on for 30 seconds. The fan outputs will not be enabled until fi ve seconds after the engine has started.

NOTE:

Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

The two fans are independent of one another and are controlled by different conditions. Both fans will be activated when either the Fan Control Override is enabled or when the conditions are met for Fan Engine Brake.

Fan Control #1 is an open circuit when at least one of the following conditions occur:

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperature above factory set levels

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperature sensor fails

□ Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) – optional

□ Engine Brake level is active at high level – optional

□ Fan control override switch is grounded (ON)

□ PTO is enabled and active – optional

Fan control #2 is an open circuit when one of the following conditions occur:

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperature above DDC factory set levels

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperature sensor fails

□ Engine Brake level is active at high level – optional

□ Fan control override switch is grounded (ON)

□ PTO is enabled and active – optional

5-60

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Dual Fans Installation

See Figure 5-15 for dual fan installation.

Figure 5-15 Dual Fan (Fan Type 6)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-61

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The MCM options for dual fans – Type 6 are listed in Table 5-37.

Parameter

Fan Type

SW3

Con fi guration

PWM6

Con fi guration

Table 5-37

Setting

6 – Dual Fan

17 = Single-speed

Fan or Two-speed

Fan Low

5 = Two-speed

Fan High or

PWM Fan

Options

0 = 2–Speed Fan with Ambient Temp Offset

1 = 2–Speed Fan

2 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

3 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback

4 = Single-Speed Fan – 2 Outputs

5 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

6 = Dual Fan

7 = Single-speed Fan – 1 Output

8 –= Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

9 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

255 = No Fan

0 = No Function

17 = Single-speed Fan or Two-speed Fan

Low

0 = No Function

5 = Two-speed Fan High or PWM Fan

Default

255 – No Fan

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 = No Function VEPS, DRS

Dual Fan – Type 6 MCM Options

5-62

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The CPC options for the dual fan – Type 6 are listed in Table 5-38.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Enable

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

PTO Enable Auto

Fan Activation

Air Condition

Enable Auto Fan

J1939 Fan Request

Enable

Fan AC Hold Time

Enables/disables the road speed threshold for AC fan.

Road speed threshold above which the A/C fan request is not using the hold time

Enables/disables turning on the fan with engine brakes.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the PTO is active.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the air conditioning is on.

Enables the fan based on a J1939 CM1 fan request.

Minimum fan on time for AC

Hold Time Fan Minimum fan on time

Mode of AC Status

Input

De fi nes type of input for A/C switch

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 – 250 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0–600 sec

0 = Disable

1 = AC Active Closed

2 = AC Active Open

3 = LIM Active Closed

4 = LIM Active Open

Table 5-38 Dual Fan – Type 6 CPC Options

Default

0 = Disable

32 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

180 sec

10 sec

2 = AC Active

Open

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-63

FEATURES

5.11.5 TWO-SPEED FAN

This con fi guration uses two digital outputs, Fan Control #1 and Fan Control #2, to drive a two-speed fan. When Fan Control #1 output is open, the fan operates in low-speed mode. When

Fan Control #1 and Fan Control #2 are both open, the fan operates in high-speed mode.

NOTE:

Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

Fan Control #1 is an open circuit when at least one of the following conditions occur:

□ Coolant temperature above factory set levels

□ Intake manifold air temperature above factory set levels

Fan control #2 is an open circuit when one of the following conditions occur:

□ Coolant temperature above factory set levels

□ Intake manifold air temperature above factory set levels

□ Coolant, or intake manifold air temperature sensor fails

□ Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) – optional

□ Engine Brake level is active at high level

□ Fan control override switch is enabled

□ PTO enabled and active – optional

5-64

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Two-speed Fan Installation

See Figure 5-16 for two-speed fan installation.

Figure 5-16 Two-speed Fan ( Fan type 0 or 1)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-65

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The MCM options for two-speed fans – Type 1 are listed in Table 5-37.

Parameter

Fan Type

SW3

Con fi guration

PWM6

Con fi guration

Table 5-39

Setting

1 = 2–Speed Fan

17 = Single-speed

Fan or Two-speed

Fan Low

5 = Two-speed

Fan High or

PWM Fan

Options

0 = 2–Speed Fan with Ambient Temp Offset

1 = 2–Speed Fan

2 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

3 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback

4 = Single-Speed Fan – 2 Outputs

5 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

6 = Dual Fan

7 = Single-speed Fan – 1 Output

8 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

9 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

255 = No Fan

0 = No Function

17 = Single-speed Fan or Two-speed Fan

Low

0 = No Function

5 = Two-speed Fan High or PWM Fan

Default

255 – No Fan

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 = No Function VEPS, DRS

Two-speed Fan – Type 1 MCM Options

5-66

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The CPC options for the two-speed fan – Type 1 are listed in Table 5-40.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Enable

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

PTO Enable Auto

Fan Activation

Air Condition

Enable Auto Fan

J1939 Fan

Request Enable

Fan AC Hold Time

Enables/disables the road speed threshold for AC fan.

Road speed threshold above which the A/C fan request is not using the hold time

Enables/disables turning on the fan with engine brakes.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the PTO is active.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the air conditioning is on.

Enables the fan based on a J1939 CM1 fan request.

Minimum fan on time for AC

Hold Time Fan Minimum fan on time

Mode of AC Status

Input

De fi nes type of input for A/C switch

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 – 250 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0–600 sec

0 = Disable

1 = AC Active Closed

2 = AC Active Open

3 = LIM Active Closed

4 = LIM Active Open

Table 5-40 Two-speed Fan – Type 1 CPC Options

Default Access

0 = Disable

VEPS,

DRS

32 km/h

VEPS,

DRS

0 = Disable

VEPS,

DRS

0 = Disable

VEPS,

DRS

1 = Enable

VEPS,

DRS

0 = Disable

180 sec

10 sec

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

2 = AC

Active Open

VEPS,

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-67

FEATURES

5.11.6 VARIABLE SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 3) WITHOUT FAN SPEED

FEEDBACK

DDEC VI uses a pulse width modulated (PWM) output to drive a variable speed fan. The fan may be enabled by speci fi c engine temperature sensors and various other inputs. The fan will ramp up to the requested speed in order to reduce noise, shock-loading, and belt slippage. If the fan is turned on for any reason other than high temperature, it will ramp up to the full fan speed (i.e. 5% or 10% duty cycle, application dependent). A decrease in fan speed will occur after a short time delay and will step down to the value dictated by the highest sensor request. If the A/C switch is opened, the fan will increase speed at the ramp rate until it is at a maximum. After the A/C switch is grounded the fan will remain on for a short time delay and then turn off.

NOTE:

Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

The PWM output is initiated when at least one of the following conditions occur:

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperatures above factory set limits

□ Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) – optional

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperature sensor fails

□ Fan Control Override Switch is grounded (ON)

□ PTO is enabled and active – optional

5-68

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Installation

See Figure 5-17 for variable-speed fan without fan speed feedback (Fan Type 3) installation.

Figure 5-17 Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed Feedback (Fan Type 3)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-69

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The MCM options for variable speed fans without fan speed feedback – Type 3 are listed in Table

5-41.

Parameter

Fan Type

PWM6

Con fi guration

Table 5-41

Setting

3 = Variable

Speed Fan without Fan

Speed Feedback

Options

0 = 2–Speed Fan with Ambient Temp Offset

1 = 2–Speed Fan

2 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

3 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback

4 = Single-Speed Fan – 2 Outputs

5 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

6 = Dual Fan

7 = Single-speed Fan – 1 Output

8 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

9 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

255 = No Fan

5 = Two-speed

Fan High or

PWM Fan

0 = No Function

5 = Two-speed Fan High or PWM Fan

Default

255 – No Fan

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 = No Function VEPS, DRS

Variable Speed Fan Without Fan Speed Feedback – Type 3 MCM

Options

5-70

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The CPC options for the variable speed fan without fan speed feedback – Type 3 are listed in Table 5-42.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Default

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Enable

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

PTO Enable Auto

Fan Activation

Air Condition

Enable Auto Fan

J1939 Fan

Request Enable

Ramp Fan

Trans Retarder

Fan Percent

Fan AC Hold Time

Enables/disables the road speed threshold for AC fan.

Road speed threshold above which the A/C fan request is not using the hold time

Enables/disables turning on the fan with engine brakes.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the

PTO is active.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the air conditioning is on.

Enables the fan based on a J1939 CM1 fan request.

Speci fi es the ramp rate for a variable speed fan

Speci fi es the fan speed when the trans retarder is active via a hardwired input or J1939 ERC1 message

Minimum fan on time for AC

Hold Time Fan Minimum fan on time

Mode of AC

Status Input

De fi nes type of input for A/C switch

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 – 250 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

1 – 100%/sec

0 = 100%

0–600 sec

0 = Disable

32 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

25%/sec

100%

180 sec

0–600 sec 10 sec

0 = Disable

1 = AC Active Closed

2 = AC Active Open

3 = LIM Active Closed

4 = LIM Active Open

2 = AC Active

Open

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

Table 5-42 Variable Speed Fan Without Fan Speed Feedback – Type 3 CPC

Options

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-71

FEATURES

5.11.7 VARIABLE SPEED FAN (FAN TYPE 2) WITH FAN SPEED

FEEDBACK

NOTE:

Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.

The PWM output is initiated when at least one of the following conditions occur:

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperatures above factory set limits

□ Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) – optional

□ Intake manifold or coolant temperature sensor fails

□ Fan Control Override Switch is grounded (ON)

□ PTO is enabled and active – optional

5-72

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Installation

See Figure 5-18 for variable-speed fan with fan speed feedback (Fan Type 2) installation.

Figure 5-18 Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback (Fan Type 2)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-73

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

PWM6

Con fi guration

Type 2 Fan

Ratio

Type 2 Fan

PWM Max

Type 2 PWM

Freq

Type 2

Maximum Fan

Slip

Type 2 Fan

Pulses Per

Rev

Table 5-43

The options for variable speed fans without fan speed feedback – Type 2 are listed in Table 5-43.

Parameter

Fan Type

Setting

2 = Variable

Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

5 = Two-speed

Fan High or

PWM Fan

—

Options

0 = 2–Speed Fan with Ambient Temp Offset

1 = 2–Speed Fan

2 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

3 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback

4 = Single-Speed Fan – 2 Outputs

5 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

6 = Dual Fan

7 = Single-speed Fan – 1 Output

8 = Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed

Feedback

9 = Variable Speed Fan without Fan Speed

Feedback with Ambient Temp Offset

255 = No Fan

0 = No Function

5 = Two-speed Fan High or PWM Fan

Default

255 – No Fan

Access

VEPS, DRS

0 = No Function VEPS, DRS

0 – 1.75

0 VEPS, DRS

—

0 – 100

0 – 1000

0 – 10000

0 – 255

VEPS, DRS

Variable Speed Fan With Fan Speed Feedback – Type 2 Options

5-74

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The CPC options for the variable speed fan with fan speed feedback – Type 2 are listed in Table

5-44.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Enable

AC Fan Vehicle

Speed Thresh

Eng Brake Enable

Auto Fan

PTO Enable Auto

Fan Activation

Air Condition

Enable Auto Fan

Enable J1939

Fan Request

Fan Ramp Rate

Trans Retarder

Fan Percent

Fan AC Hold

Time

Enables/disables the road speed threshold for AC fan.

Road speed threshold above which the A/C fan request is not using the hold time

Enables/disables turning on the fan with engine brakes.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the

PTO is active.

Enables/disables turning on the fan when the air conditioning is on.

Enables the fan based on a J1939 CM1 fan request.

Speci fi es the ramp rate for a variable speed fan

Speci fi es the fan speed when the trans retarder is active via a hardwired input or J1939 ERC1 message

Minimum fan on time for AC

Options

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 – 250 km/h

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

1 – 100%/sec

0 – 100%

Default

0 = Disable

30 km/h

0 = Disable

25%/sec

100%

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

Hold Time Fan

Mode of AC

Status Input

Minimum fan on time

De fi nes type of input for A/C switch

0–600 sec 180 sec

0–600 sec 10 sec

0 = Disable

1 = AC Active Closed

2 = AC Active Open

3 = LIM Active Closed

4 = LIM Active Open

2 = AC Active

Open

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

Table 5-44 Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback – Type 2 CPC Options

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-75

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-76

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.12 FLEET MANAGEMENT

The Fleet Management Products provide fl exible data extraction and communication capabilities.

DDEC Data collects the data (refer to section 5.12.2). DDEC Reports is the PC software for data

analysis and reporting (refer to section 5.12.3).

5.12.1 OPERATION

Fleet Management is designed to provide feedback to the driver. These driver-friendly features help provide an understanding of the effect of the driver's actions on the engine and vehicle performance. The MCM provides engine control and monitoring; the CPC stores a summary of engine performance.

Data in these devices can be extracted and analyzed with the PC software products. DDEC

Reports extracts data from all hardware devices and analyzes DDEC Data extracts data from all hardware devices and analyzes data from all devices. All these products allow printing of comprehensive reports for managing vehicle operation.

5.12.2 DDEC DATA

DDEC Data is a standard part of the CPC. DDEC Data utilizes available memory and processing speed, along with a built-in, battery-backed clock/calendar to document the performance of the driver and vehicle. Data is stored in three monthly records and in a trip fi le that may be reset at extraction. Data on periodic maintenance intervals, hard brake incidents, last stop records, daily engine usage, and CPC diagnostics is also stored.

DDEC Data can be extracted onto a PC hard disk through a wide range of options:

□ Direct extraction using an industry standard translator box and cables connected to a PC running DDEC Reports.

□ Wireless extraction via cellular telephone, satellite radio communications equipment. The

PC can be operating DDEC Reports or DDEC Communications.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-77

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

DDEC Data parameters for fl eet management are listed in Table 5-45.

Parameter

Group

Table 5-45

Parameter

FM Alert Update

Enable

FM Daily Usage

Enable

Fleet

Management

Enable

FM Incident

Update Enable

FM Monthly Trip

Enable

FM Serv Interval

Update Enable

FM Fuel Density

Description

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management

Alert data

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management daily usage data

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management data

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management incident data

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management monthly trip data

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management service interval data

Enables/Disabled the

Fleet Management fuel density data

Options

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0 – Disable

1 – Enable

0-65.535

DDEC Data Parameters for Fleet Management

Default Access

1 – Enable

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

1 – Enable

1 = Enable

1 – Enable

0.835

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

7.0

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

7.0

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

7.0

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

7.0

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

7.0

VEPS,

DRS, DDDL

7.0

5-78

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.12.3 DDEC REPORTS

After the data is extracted, DDEC Reports software produces a wide range of diagnostic and management reports. DDEC Reports produces comprehensive trip reports in both on-highway and nonroad markets.

The on-highway reports are:

□ Trip Activity

□ Vehicle Speed/RPM

□ Overspeed / Over Rev

□ Engine Load/RPM

□ Vehicle Con fi guration

□ Periodic Maintenance

□ Hard Brake Incident

□ Last Stop

□ DDEC Diagnostic

□ Pro fi le

□ Monthly Activity

□ Daily Engine Usage

□ Life to Date

See Figure 5-19, Figure 5-20, Figure 5-21, and Figure 5-22 for examples of on-highway DDEC

Reports.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-79

FEATURES

Figure 5-19

5-80

DDEC Reports, Trip Activity Report

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Figure 5-20 DDEC Reports, Daily Engine Usage

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-81

FEATURES

Figure 5-21

5-82

DDEC Reports, Engine Load/RPM

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Figure 5-22 DDEC Reports, Vehicle Speed/RPM

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-83

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-84

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.13 FUEL ECONOMY INCENTIVE

The purpose of Fuel Economy Incentive (FEI) is to allow the fl eet manager to set a fuel economy target while providing the driver an incentive to meet the target.

5.13.1 OPERATION

Using the Fuel Economy Incentive option, a fl eet manager can set a target fuel economy for each engine. If this fuel economy is exceeded, the driver will be awarded a slight increase to the vehicle speed limit.

In this example the following limits are set as listed in Table 5-46.

Parameter

Maximum Road Speed

FEI Max Vehicle Speed Reward

FEI Conversion Factor

FEI Minimum Fuel Economy

Table 5-46 Fuel Economy Limits

Set Limit

60 MPH

5 MPH

20 MPH/MPG

7 MPG

If the driver has an average fuel economy of 7.1 MPG then the new vehicle speed limit is 62 MPH.

Vehicle Speed Limit + (Average Fuel Economy — FEI Minimum Fuel Economy) x FEI

Conversion Factor = New Vehicle Speed Limit

60 MPH + (7.1-7.0 MPG) x (20 MPH/MPG) = 62 MPH

The maximum vehicle speed obtainable regardless of the fuel economy is 65 MPH.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-85

FEATURES

5.13.2 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The Fuel Economy Incentive parameters are listed in Table 5-47.

Parameter

Group

Parameter De fi nition Options Default

Fuel Economy

Incentive Enable

Enables/disable the feature.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

FEI Minimum Fuel

Economy

FEI Max Vehicle

Speed Reward

FEI Conversion

Factor

FEI Use Trip

Mileage

Indicates the minimum economy for fuel economy incentive.

Indicates customer set maximum speed increase for vehicle.

The miles per hour you want to allow for each full mile per gallon above the minimum

MPG.

FILT ECON bases the calculations on the fuel information, by periodic sampling of fuel consumption. TRIP ECON bases the calculation on the trip portion of the fuel usage information.

4 to 20 mpg

0 to 20 km/h

0 to 20 MPH/MPG

0 = Based on Filtered

Fuel Economy*

1 = Based on Trip

Fuel Economy†

* Filtered fuel economy calculates the fuel economy based on periodic sampling of fuel consumption. It allows rewards over a shorter time period.

† Trip fuel economy calculates fuel economy over the entire trip. Rewards may take longer to achieve.

Table 5-47 Fuel Economy Incentive Parameters

Access

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

5.13.3 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES.

Fuel Economy Incentive will increase the Cruise Control and vehicle speed limits.

A vehicle can be have with both PasSmart and Fuel Economy Incentive, but the extra speed increments provided by the two features do not add together. For example, if Fuel Economy

Incentive is set for 7 MPH of extra speed when the driver hits the maximum fuel economy target and the same vehicle has a 5 MPH PasSmart increase, the resulting speed increase is 7 MPH, not

12 MPH.

5-86

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.14 IDLE ADJUST

This function increases and/or decreases the engine idle speed up to a programmable limit (Max

Adjusted Idle Speed).

5.14.1 OPERATION

Engine idle speed can be varied by the operator using the Cruise Control switches if the following conditions are satis fi ed:

□ Engine is running

□ Vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (10 km/h)

□ Cruise Control master switch is turned OFF

□ PTO is not active and enable switch is OFF

□ If an automatic transmission is in use, it is in neutral and no shift is in progress

□ Clutch pedal is not pressed

□ Throttle inhibit is not active

If any of the above conditions are not satis fi ed, Idle Adjust is cancelled and the normal idle speed is restored.

The current desired speed is increased by 16 rpm (Single Step Adjusted Idle Speed) when the

Resume/Accel switch is toggled. Speed change is active after the switch is released. Holding the

Resume/Accel switch for more than one second the current desired speed will be increased by 100 rpm/sec (Ramp Rate Adjusted Idle Speed) as long as the switch is pressed and the programmed

Max Adjusted Idle Speed for idle increment is not exceeded.

Toggling the Set/Coast switch will decrease the current desired idle speed by 16 rpm (Single Step

Adjusted Idle Speed). Speed change is active after the switch is released. Holding the Set/Coast switch for more than one second will decrease the current desired speed by 100 rpm/sec (Ramp

Rate Adjusted Idle Speed) as long as the switch is pressed and the minimum low idle speed is not yet reached.

Once the desired idle speed has increased or decreased again, the new desired idle speed will be stored until the ignition has been switched off.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-87

FEATURES

5.14.2 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The Idle Adjust parameters are listed in Table 5-48.

Parameter

Group

Table 5-48

Parameter

Max Adjusted

Idle Speed

Single Step

Adjusted Idle

Speed

Ramp Rate

Adjusted Idle

Speed

Adjusted Idle

Con fi guration

Description Options

Max idle speed that will be allowed by the user

Single step rpm for adjusted idle speed

Ramp rate for the adjusted idle speed

0-4000 RPM

0-100 RPM

0-8191 RPM/sec

Con fi guration for

Adjusted idle

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Enabled if neutral

3 = Enabled if neutral and park brake

4 = Enabled if park brake

Idle Adjust Parameters

Default

850 RPM

16 RPM

100 RPM/sec

0 = Disabled

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

Access

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

VEPS,

DRS,

DDDL 7.0

5-88

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.15 IDLE SHUTDOWN TIMER AND PTO SHUTDOWN

The Idle Shutdown Timer will shutdown the engine if it remains idling for a speci fi ed period of time. The options that can operate with Idle Shutdown Timer are Idle Shutdown Override,

Vehicle Power Shutdown or Shutdown on Power Take-off (PTO).

5.15.1 OPERATION — IDLE SHUTDOWN NON-PTO MODE

There are four modes of operation for Idle Shutdown:

□ Disabled – in this mode, idle shutdown will not occur.

□ Park Brake – in this mode, idle shutdown will be enabled only when the park brake is applied, the accelerator pedal position is at zero and the engine is idling.

□ No Park Brake – this mode is the same as Park Brake Mode above, except there is no requirement for the park brake to be applied.

□ Edge Triggered Accelerator Pedal – this mode has no requirement on the park brake or on the engine being at idle. The operator may reset the Idle Shutdown procedure by moving the accelerator pedal from below 40% to above 80%.

The idle shutdown period can range from 1 to 5000 seconds (approximately 83 minutes).

Certain conditions must be met for the entire time-out period for shutdown to occur. These conditions include:

□ Coolant temperature above 50°F (–10°C)

□ Engine operation at idle

□ The parking brake ON, digital input switched to battery ground (optional)

□ Ignition ON

□ Vehicle Speed Less than 3 mph (5 kph)

Fueling is stopped after the speci fi ed idle time; the ignition circuit remains active after the engine shuts down. The AWL will fl ash 20 seconds before the shutdown occurs. The RSL will fl ash 10 seconds before shutdown occurs. The AWL will continue fl ashing until the ignition is turned off to indicate shutdown has occurred. The RSL will turn off. The ignition switch must be cycled to

OFF (wait 10 seconds) and back to ON before the engine will restart, if shutdown occurs.

A Park Brake Switch may be installed (see Figure 5-23).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-89

FEATURES

Figure 5-23 Park Brake Digital Input

5.15.2 OPERATION — PTO SHUTDOWN

There are four modes of operation for PTO shutdown:

□ Disabled – in this mode, PTO shutdown will not occur.

□ Park Brake – in this mode, PTO shutdown will be enabled only when the park brake is applied, the accelerator pedal position is at zero and the actual engine torque is less than

100 nm (Max Engine Load PTO Shutdown)..

□ No Park Brake – this mode is the same as Park Brake Mode above, except there is no requirement for the park brake to be applied.

□ Edge Triggered Accelerator Pedal – this mode has no requirement on the park brake or the actual torque. The operator may reset the PTO shutdown procedure by moving the accelerator pedal from below 40% to above 80%.

The PTO shutdown period can range from 1 to 5000 seconds (approximately 16 minutes).

A Park Brake Switch may be installed (see Figure 5-23).

5.15.3 IDLE SHUTDOWN TIMER AND PTO SHUTDOWN OPTIONS

The following options are available with Idle Shutdown Timer and PTO Shutdown.

Idle / PTO Shutdown Override

Idle / PTO Shutdown Override allows the operator to temporarily override the idle shutdown timer or PTO shutdown timer.

Idle/PTO shutdown will be overridden if any of the following conditions occur:

□ The accelerator pedal is in limp-home mode

5-90

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

□ Operator override is enabled (Enable Idle PTO Shtdn Override) and any of the following operator override conditions are present:

□

The SEO Override Switch is on

The service brake is applied

□ The clutch is pressed (switch is open)

□ ‘High idle’ DPF regeneration is in progress. After regeneration completes, the override will remain in place for an additional 5 minutes to allow the particulate fi lter to cool down after the regeneration cycle has completed.

Idle Shutdown with Ambient Air Temp

This option allows the override to be disabled based on ambient air temperature. If the upper and lower temperature limits are set and the ambient temperature is within limits, the override will be disabled and the engine will hbe shutdown after the speci fi ed time limit is met. If the ambient air temperature is outside the speci fi ed range, the override would be allowed by increasing the percent throttle to greater than 1%.

For example, if the upper limit is set to 80°F and the lower limit is set to 65°F, the override would

be disabled if the ambient air temperature was between 65°F and 80°F (see Figure 5-24).

Figure 5-24 Ambient Air Temperature Override

An ambient air temperature sensor must be installed for this feature.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-91

FEATURES

Idle Shutdown with Ambient Air Temp Continuous Override

It is possible for idle shutdown to be overridden continuously based on ambient air temperature.

This allows the engine to continue to run while the temperature is such that power from the engine is required to heat or cool the air to keep the cab temperature comfortable.

Continuous override is only available if an ambient air temperature sensor is con fi gured for use

(Ambient Air Temp Sensor Enable) and overrides are enabled (Enable Idle PTO Shtdn Override).

There are two modes of operation: operator override and automatic override. In both cases, the override will only be allowed if the ambient air temperature is reading extreme (i.e. it is outside the limits “Lo Amb Air Override Temp” and “Hi Amb Air Override Temp”.

If automatic override is enabled (“Idle Shutdown Auto Override”), idle shutdown will always be overridden while the ambient air temperature is reading extreme. If automatic override is not enabled and operator override is, the operator may explicitly activate the override by pumping the accelerator pedal while idle shutdown is in progress and the CEL is fl ashing.

Note that the de fi nition of a ‘pump’ of the accelerator pedal depends upon the idle/PTO shutdown mode:

□ Idle/PTO shutdown with/without park brake status – in either of these modes, pumping the accelerator pedal is done simply by pressing the pedal.

□ Idle/PTO shutdown with edge triggered accelerator pedal – in this mode, pumping the accelerator pedal is done by moving it from below 40% to above 80%.

The continuous operator override will remain active until the ambient air temperature is no longer extreme, the park brake is not applied, the ignition is turned off, or the operator pumps the pedal again. Note that pumping the pedal will only cancel the override if it has already been in effect for at least 10 seconds.

5-92

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Vehicle Power Shutdown

Vehicle Power Shutdown is used with Idle Timer Shutdown or Engine Protection Shutdown.

After the idle timer times out or engine protection shuts the engine down, the Vehicle Power

Shutdown relay shuts down the rest of the electrical power to the vehicle.

A Vehicle Power Shutdown relay can be installed to shutdown all electrical loads when the

engine is shutdown (see Figure 5-25).

Figure 5-25 Vehicle Power Shutdown Relay

All electrical loads that should be turned OFF when the engine shuts down should be wired through this relay.

Maximum Engine Load Shutdown

This option, when enabled (Max Engine Load for PTO Shutdown), allows the setting of a maximum load above which Idle/PTO Shutdown is disabled.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-93

FEATURES

5.15.4 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

All the Idle Shutdown timer options are listed in Table 5-49.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

1 02 DI

Selection

Park Brake

Switch Con fi g

Enable Idle

Shutdown

Idle Shutdown

Time

Enable PTO

Shutdown

PTO

Shutdown

Time

Min Coolant

Temp

Enable Idle

PTO Shtdn

Override

Max Engine

Load PTO

Shutdown

Description

Con fi gure pin

1/02 on CPC

Park Brake

Con fi guration

Options

0 = Disabled

1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock

2 = FUSO Auxiliary Brake Cut

Switch*

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Disable

1 = Enable with Park Brake

2 = Enable without Park Brake

3 = Enabled with Edge Triggered

Accel Pedal

Enables or

Disables the

Idle Shutdown feature.

The amount of engine idle time that is allowed before the

Idle Shutdown feature stops fueling the engine.

Enables or disables the Idle

Timer Shutdown feature when operating in PTO mode.

The amount of engine idle time that is allowed before the PTO shutdown feature stops fueling the engine.

Minimum coolant temperature before an idle shutdown will occur

PTO shutdown disabled for engine loads greater than this value

1 to 5000 seconds

0 = Disable

1 = Enable with Park Brake

2 = Enable without Park Brake

3 = Enabled with Edge Triggered

Accel Pedal

1 to 5000 seconds

-40°C to 200°C

Enables/disables override of Idle or

PTO Shutdown

0 = Disable

1 = Enabled, allows

SEO/Diagnostic Request Switch to override Engine Idle/PTO

Shutdown

2 = Enable without clutch and service brake

0–5000 Nm

Default

1 = Enable Park

Brake Interlock

0 = Hardwired

0 = Disable

60 sec

0 = Disable

60 sec

10°C

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

1 = Enabled, allows

SEO/Diagnostic

Request Switch to override

Engine Idle/PTO

Shutdown

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

100 Nm

Access

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

VEPS,

DRS

5-94

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options

Ambient Air

Temp Sensor

Enable

Con fi gures the ambient air temp sensor.

0 = Disabled

1 = Hardwired

2 = Reserved for J1939

3 = Reserved for J1587

4 = Reserved for ECAN

Lo Amb Air

Override

Temp

Hi Amb Air

Override

Temp

Idle Shudown

Auto Override

Extreme low ambient air temp to allow override.

Extreme high ambient air temp to allow override.

Enables auto override of

Idle/PTO

Shutdown based on ambient air temperature.

-40°C – 75°C

0 = No automatic override performed

1 = Automatic override performed

*Not supported in NAFTA

Table 5-49 Idle Shutdown Timer Programming Options

Default

0 = Disabled

-4°C

75°C

Access

VEPS,

DRS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

0 = No automatic override performed

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-95

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-96

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.16 LIMITERS

The CPC supports two optional programmable engine limiters: Limiter 0 (LIM0) and Limiter 1

(LIM1). These Limiters are each associated with a digital input. When the input is switched to ground, the limiter becomes active. If more than one Limiter input is grounded at the same time, the Limiter with the lowest limitation parameter setting will prevail.

The CPC can also limit the minimum and maximum engine speeds.

5.16.1 OPERATION

When the appropriate input is grounded, Limiters can decrease the speed/load/torque from the setting of the Common Limiter parameters, but cannot increase them beyond the Common

Limiter settings.

Each Limiter can set:

□ Maximum engine speed (speed limiting applications)

□ Minimum engine speed (switched high idle applications)

□ Maximum engine torque (torque limiting applications)

□ Road speed limit (alternate road speed limit)

□ Maximum vehicle acceleration

“Maximum Engine Speed” will limit the upper engine speed all the time. Limiter switches can further limit the maximum engine speed if programmed. “Minimum Engine Speed” de fi nes the lower limit of engine speed operation . Limiter switches can increase the limit if programmed and installed.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-97

FEATURES

5.16.2 INSTALLATION

The Limiter pin assignments are listed in Table 5-50.

Limiter

Limiter 0

Limiter 1

Pin

1/11

2/11

Table 5-50 Limiter Pin Assignments

NOTE:

Due to VSS signal quality at low speeds, it is recommended that the vehicle speed limit be set above a minimum of 48 kph to insure smooth road speed limiting. DDC cannot guarantee smooth speed limiting for maximum speeds set below 48 kph.

DDEC will exit the Minimum Engine Speed Mode for Automated/Automatic Transmissions for the following:

□ Shift in Progress message received over j1939

□ Valid TSC1 command received from the transmission

□ Transmission in gear (selected gear or current gear)

5-98

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.16.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

Limiter 0 and Limiter 1 parameters are listed in Table 5-51.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Adjusted Idle Con fi g

Range

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Enabled if neutral

3 = Enabled if neutral and

Park Brake

4 = Enabled if Park Brake

0-4000 rpm

Limiter0 Min Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter0 Max Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter0 Max Road Spd

Enabled

Limiter0 Max Eng Trq

Enabled

Limiter1 Min Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter1 Max Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter1 Max Road Spd

Enabled

Limiter1 Max Eng Trq

Enabled

Limiter0 Max Vehicle Accel

0-4000 rpm

0-152 kph

0-5000 Nm

0-4000 rpm

0-152 kph

0-5000 Nm

-15.625 — 15.625m/s 2

Default

0 = Disabled

500 rpm

4000 rpm

152 kph

5000 Nm

500 rpm

4000 rpm

152 kph

5000 Nm

10m/s 2

Limiter1 Max Vehicle Accel

Limiter0 Max Eng Trq

Curve Select

-15.625 — 15.625m/s 2

0 = PLD torque curve

(max torque)

1 = Power Rating Curve #1

2 = Power Rating Curve #2

3 = Power Rating Curve #3

Table 5-51 Limiter 0 and Limiter 1 Parameters

10m/s 2

0 = PLD torque curve (max torque)

The parameters for min and max engine speed are listed in Table 5-52.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Min Engine Speed

Max Engine Speed

Range

0–4000 rpm

Default

592 rpm

3000 rpm

Table 5-52 Minimum and Maximum Engine Speed Parameters

Access

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

Access

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-99

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-100

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.17 LOW GEAR TORQUE REDUCTION

Low Gear Torque Reduction is an optional feature that allows a transmission to be used with engines capable of producing more torque than the transmission's peak torque rating.

5.17.1 OPERATION

Low Gear Torque Reduction reduces the available torque if the ratio of vehicle speed to engine speed is below a set point. This limits full torque in lower gears and allows a transmission to be used with engines above the transmission's regular torque rating. Two torque limits can be programmed.

Example 1 – One Torque Limit

The customer wants to hold the torque to 550 ft lbs (on an engine rated at 860 ft lbs) up to 8th

gear. The transmission operates with the ratios listed in Table 5-53.

Gear

Ratio

3.57

2.79

2.14

Desired Gear Down Protect Ratio

1.65

1.27

Low Gear Threshold* CPC –

Output/Input Shaft Speed

0.280

0.358

0.467

Gear Down Protect Ratio Parameter

0.606

0.787

10 1.00

1.0

*The low gear threshold is determined by taking the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.

Table 5-53 Transmission Ratios

The "torque factor" is determined by dividing the desired torque by the rated torque. The

“threshold” is determined by taking the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.

To summarize, the customer wants to limit torque up to the 8th gear to 550 ft·lb. Estimate the

“threshold” between 7th and 8th (0.5). From 8th gear on up, the full rated torque will be available.

Set Gear Ratio Gear Down Protect to 0.5 and set the Torque Factor Gear Down Protect to 0.64

(550/860).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-101

FEATURES

Example 2 – Two Torque Limits

The customer wants to hold the torque to 450 ft lbs (on an engine rated at 860 ft lbs) up to 6th gear

and up to 550 ft lbs up to 8th gear. The transmission operates with the ratios listed in Table 5-54.

Gear Ratio

Low Gear Threshold* CPC –

Output/Input Shaft Speed

0.280

3.57

Desired Gear Down Protection Ratio

2.79

2.14

Desired Gear Ratio for High

Gear Power

1.65

1.27

Gear Down Protection Ratio Parameter

0.358

0.467

Gear Ratio for High Gear Power Parameter

0.606

0.787

10 1.00

1.0

*The low gear threshold is determined by taking the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.

Table 5-54 Transmission Ratios

The "torque factor" is determined by dividing the desired torque by the rated torque. The

“threshold” is determined by taking the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.

To summarize, the customer wants to limit torque up to the 6th gear to 450 ft·lb and 550 ft lbs up to 8th gear. Estimate the “threshold” between 5th and 6th (0.32) and 7th and 8th (0.5). From 8th gear on up, the full rated torque will be available.

Set “Gear Ratio for Gear Down Protection” to 0.32 and set the “Torque Factor for Gear Down

Protection to 0.52 (450/860). Set “Gear Ratio for High Gear Power” to 0.5 and the “Torque

Factor High Gear Power” to 0.64 (550/860).

5-102

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.17.2 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

A VSS or output shaft speed message over SAE J1939 is required (refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle

Speed Sensor"). VEPS or DRS can enable the parameters listed in Table 5-55.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Torque Factor*

Gear Dwn

Protect

Gear Ratio Gear

Down Protect

Torque Factor*

High Gear

Power

Gear Ratio for High Gear

Power

Provides a limit on the available torque if the ratio of vehicle speed to engine speed is below a set point.

The gear ratio below which torque is limited. (output shaft rpm/input shaft rpm)

Provides a limit on the available torque if the ratio of vehicle speed to engine speed is below a set point.

The gear ratio below which torque is limited. (output shaft rpm/input shaft rpm)

* % of maximum torque at the current engine speed

Table 5-55 Low Gear Torque Limiting Parameters

Range

0.00 to 1.00

0.000 to 2.00

0.000 to 1.00

0.00 to 2.00

Default Access

1.00

0.01

1.00

0.02

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

VEPS or

DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-103

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-104

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.18 OPTIMIZED IDLE

Optimized Idle® with DDEC VI reduces engine idle time by running the engine only when required. Optimized Idle automatically stops and restarts the engine to accomplish the following:

□ Keep the engine oil temperature between factory set limits 60°F (16°C) - 104°F (40°C)

□ Keep the battery charged>12.2 V (12 V system)

□ Keep the cab/sleeper or passenger area at the desired temperature (using the optional thermostat) - On-highway truck and coach applications

Other bene fi ts include overall reduction in exhaust emissions and noise, and improved starter and engine life (by starting a warm engine and eliminating starting aids). Idle time and fuel savings information stored in the ECU memory can be read with DDDL, ProDriver Reports or DRS.

Optimized Idle run times can be accessed through DDEC Reports. The Optimized Idle Active

Lamp is steadily illuminated when Optimized Idle run times are logged.

5.18.1 OPERATION

To activate Optimized Idle, the following conditions must be met:

□ Ignition ON with the vehicle idling

□ Hood and cab closed

□ Transmission in neutral

□ Park brake set

□ Idle shutdown timer must be enabled

Once the above conditions are met:

□ Turn the Cruise Master Switch to the ON position (if in the ON position, turn to OFF then to ON), the Optimized Idle Active Lamp will fl ash.

□ Turn on Thermostat Mode (if equipped and the mode is desired) by turning ON the thermostat, setting the fan controls in the bunk and cab to HIGH and enabling the vehicle heating and cooling system.

Once these conditions are met, the Optimized Idle Active Lamp will fl ash until the Idle Shutdown timer expires. Optimized Idle allows the operation of all DDEC features such as VSG, throttle control, and Cruise Switch VSG, while the active light is fl ashing.

Once Optimized Idle becomes active, the engine will either shutdown if Optimized Idle parameters are satis fi ed or ramp to 1100 RPM. While the system is active (OI Active Lamp is steadily illuminated), the throttle, PTO, Cruise Switch PTO functions are disabled and the engine speed is controlled by DDEC VI.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-105

FEATURES

Optimized Idle Start Up Sequence

The following occurs during every OI engine start:

1. Optimized Idle Active Light is ON. DDEC VI determines when the engine needs to start to charge the battery, warm the engine, or heat/cool the vehicle interior.

2. The alarm (mounted in the engine compartment) will sound for fi ve seconds.

3. After a short delay, the starter will engage and the engine will start. If the engine does not reach a speci fi ed RPM within a few seconds, the system will be disarmed for the rest of the ignition cycle. If the engine does not start, Optimized Idle will attempt a second engine start in 45 seconds. The alarm will sound again prior to the second engine start.

4. Once the engine starts, it will ramp up to 1100 RPM (default). This value is customer selectable with DDDL or DRS.

5. Vehicle accessories will be turned on thirty seconds after any thermostat based engine start and will not be turned on for an engine mode start. If the engine is running in engine mode, and the thermostat mode is requested, the vehicle accessories will be turned on thirty seconds after the request.

If two or more conditions exist at the same time, DDEC will satisfy all parameters before shutting down the engine. For example, if the engine started due to battery voltage, the engine will run for a minimum of two hours. If the thermostat becomes unsatis fi ed and requests the engine to run during this time, DDEC will control the HVAC fans through the Vehicle Power Shutdown relay, turning them on and off as required by the thermostat. At the end of the two hours, if the thermostat was not satis fi ed, the engine would continue to run.

Engine Mode

Engine Mode automatically stops and restarts the engine to maintain oil temperature and battery voltage. The Optimized Idle Active Light is illuminated whenever Engine Mode is active.

Optimized Idle starts and stops the engine to keep the following parameters within limits while in

Engine Mode.

Battery Voltage

- The engine will start when the battery voltage drops below 12.5 Volts for

12 Volt systems. This is the default. If an Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT Sensor) is installed, the customer can select an option to use a AAT Sensor vs. voltage table to determine the start threshold for the battery. The thresholds are listed in Table 5-56.

Table 5-56

Ambient Air Temperature

–40°C

–17.77°C

4.44°C

26.66°C

48.86°C

Voltage Threshold

12.5 V

12.4 V

12.3 V

12.2 V

Voltage Threshold Based on Ambient Air Temperature

5-106

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

There are three battery run modes: Normal Battery Run Mode, Alternate Battery Run Mode, and Continuous Battery Run Mode.

Normal Battery Run Mode –

While in normal battery run mode, all battery voltage Optimized

Idle starts are two hours long. This mode is customer selectable by setting the Alternate Time to

0, the default mode as listed in Table 5-57.

Alternate Time Battery Time Single Event

0 2 Hours 2 Hours

Table 5-57 Normal Battery Run Mode

First

Consecutive

Event

2 Hours

Second

Consecutive

Event

2 Hours

Alternate Battery Run Mode –

This mode is allowed only when the Alternate Time is set to a non-zero value. This parameter is customer selectable. While in Alternate Battery Run Mode, all voltage starts are based on Alternate Time unless a critical battery restart event is detected. A critical battery restart event is detected when the engine starts and runs to recharge the battery for the alternate time and then detects another battery start within one hour after the engine stops. At this point, the run time will change to two hours. The Alternate Battery Run Mode parameters are listed in Table 5-58.

Alternate Battery

Run Time a

(Customer

Selectable)

Battery Time

2 Hours

Single Event a

Table 5-58 Alternate Battery Run Mode

First

Consecutive

Event

2 Hours

Second

Consecutive

Event

2 Hours

Continuous Battery Run Mode –

In this mode, the engine continues to idle without shutting down when two consecutive critical battery restart events have occurred. This feature is customer selectable. The parameters for Continuous Battery Run Mode are listed in Table 5-59. A fault code is logged when this move is initiated (PID 168 FMI 14).

Alternate

Battery Run

Time

0 a

(Customer

Selectable)

Battery Time

2 Hours

Single Event

2 Hours a

Table 5-59 Continuous Battery Run Mode

First

Consecutive

Event

2 Hours

Second

Consecutive

Event

Continuous

2 Hours

Further

Events

Continuous

Oil Temperature

- The engine will start when the oil temperature drops below 60°F (15.55°C) and will run until the oil temperature reaches 104°F (40°C).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-107

FEATURES

Thermostat Mode

Thermostat Mode automatically stops and restarts the engine to maintain oil temperature, battery voltage and cab temperature. For on-highway applications, Thermostat Mode is used to keep the cab/sleeper (on-highway truck) and passenger area (coach) at the desired temperature and maintain the Engine Mode parameters. The optional thermostat must be turned ON for Thermostat Mode to be active. The Optimized Idle Active Light is illuminated whenever Thermostat Mode is active.

Engine mode parameters as well as the interior temperature are monitored in Thermostat Mode.

The thermostat informs the ECU when to start/stop the engine to keep the interior warm/cool based on the thermostat setting. Ambient temperature is also monitored to determine if the ambient temperature is extreme enough that the engine should run continuously.

Any accessories (HVAC fans) connected to the Vehicle Power Shutdown relay will turn ON for

Thermostat Mode engine starts. The HVAC fans will remain OFF for Engine Mode starts.

If Optimized Idle starts the engine for Engine Mode, and Thermostat Mode is then requested, the

HVAC fans will turn ON approximately 30 seconds after the Thermostat Mode is requested.

Thermostat Mode can be enabled for a maximum amount of time. After which, the engine will ignore any requests from the thermostat.

Two automatic conditions which help keep the operator comfortable and reduce engine cycling are Continuous Run Mode and Extended Run Mode.

Continuous Run Mode - This mode allows the engine to run continuously if the outside temperature (determined by the skin temperature sensor or AAT Sensor if installed and con fi gured) falls outside the hot or cold set limits and the thermostat set point can not be met. The default set limits are 25°F (-3.9°C) for heat mode and 90°F (32°C) for cool mode. When a skin temperature sensor is installed, these values are customer programmable in the thermostat and are password protected. When an ATT Sensor is installed these limits can be set by DDDL or DRS.

When the thermostat is in the Continuous Run Mode, the thermometer icon will fl ash along with the heat or cool icon on the thermostat if a skin temperature sensor is installed. If the thermostat set point is satis fi ed, the engine will shutdown regardless of the outside temperature.

Extended Idle Mode - If the Continuous Run Mode is not needed and the thermostat set point is not met within 45 minutes, the engine will shutdown for fi fteen minutes and restart and run for fi fteen minutes. This fi fteen-minute on and off cycle will continue until the thermostat set point is reached or until the thermostat is turned off. This may be an indication that the heat or cool setting on the thermostat does not match the vehicle heating or cooling system setting. It could also be an indication of low freon, blockage in the heater system or system tampering.

Extended Idle Mode can be disabled with a customer selectable parameter. After running 45 minutes, the engine will shutdown instead of cycling at 15 minute intervals.

5.18.2 INSTALLATION

Optimized Idle utilizes the following inputs: Park Brake, Neutral Switch, Hood Tilt Switch, OI

Thermostat (optional), and Cruise Enable. Optimized Idle utilizes three digital outputs: Vehicle

Power Shutdown Relay, OI Alarm, and the Optimized Idle Active Light. A hardwired Vehicle

Speed Sensor is required. See see Figure 5-26 for the Optimized Idle overall system schematic.

5-108

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Prior to installation, check the following items:

□ The transmission must provide a reliable neutral signal (switch) — hardwired or via J1939.

□ A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be installed.

□ There must be an electric starter; air starters cannot be used with Optimized Idle.

□ Automatic transmissions may be used, but they must have a Starter Lockout Feature installed based on a reliable neutral signal.

New installations must be approved by Detroit Diesel. See Figure 5-26 for the Optimized Idle

overall system schematic.

Figure 5-26 Optimized Idle System

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-109

FEATURES

5.18.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The digital inputs and outputs listed in Table 5-60 can be programmed.

Parameter

Group

MCM

Parameter / Description

Optimized Idle Enable

Vehicle Speed Sensor

3 01 AI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Park Brake Switch Con fi g

4 18 DI Selection

4 09 DO Selection

4 10 DO Selection

3 17 DO Selection

Enable Idle Shutdown

Enable PTO Shutdown

Starter Type Control

1 02 DI Selection

3 17 DO Fault Detection

4 09 DO Fault Detection

4 10 DO Fault Detection

Enable Idle PTO Shtn Override

Setting

1 = Enable

4 = Magnetic Pickup

0 = No Sensor

2 = OI Thermostat

0 = Hardwired (man8al trans)

1 = J1939 (J1939 trans)

2 = Enable Engine Hood

10 = OI Active Lamp

3 = Vehicle Power Shutdown

4 = OI Alarm

1 = Enable with Park Brake

1 = Enable with park Brake

1 = Starter Activated via MCM

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

Table 5-60 Optimized Idle Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs

Optimized Idle options for battery charging and continuous run are listed in Table 5-61.

Parameter

OI Continuous Batt

Time Enable

Description

When enabled and OI has started the engine for battery three consecutive times, the engine will run continuously in OI Mode

OI Variable Volt Thres

Enable

OI Alternate Battery

Run Time

When enabled, the battery voltage threshold will be based on ambient air temperature.

Sets the alternate run time for battery starts.

OI Upper Limit

Continuous Run Temp

OI Lower Limit

Continuous Run

Set the continuous run upper limit. When the ambient air temperature is above this limit, the engine will run continuously.

Sets the continuous run lower limit. When the ambient air temperature is below this limit, the engine will run continuously.

OI Thermostat Max

Time

Maximum amount of time the engine can run in

Thermostat Mode.

OI Target Engine RPM Sets the speed the engine will operate at in OI Mode.

Range

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

20 min to 2 hrs

40°C-100°C

0–459000 sec

800–1100 rpm

Default

0 = Disable

0 min

32°C

—4°C

0 sec

1100 rpm

Table 5-61 Optimized Idle Options

5-110

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Optimized Idle installations should have the parameters listed in Table 5-62 set to Shutdown.

NOTICE:

DDC recommends that Shutdown be enabled for all Engine

Protection parameters with Optimized Idle installations.

Parameter

Coolant Temp Engine Protect Shtn

Oil Press Eng Protect Shtn

Coolant Level Engine Protect Shtn

Description

Indication of the type of engine protection based on high engine coolant temp.

Indication of the type of engine protection based on low engine oil pressure.

Indication of the type of engine protection based on low coolant level.

Table 5-62 Engine Protection Parameters

Setting

1 = Engine Shutdown

5.18.4 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

The Vehicle Power shutdown feature is used by Optimized Idle to turn off all accessory loads when the engine is shutdown. Optimized Idle will turn these loads on for Thermostat Mode starts.

No other DDEC VI features can be used when Optimized Idle is active.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-111

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-112

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.19 PARKED REGENERATION

Regeneration is the oxidation of soot in the Aftertreatment Device (ATD). This process happens during the normal operation cycle of the vehicle; it can occur both passively and actively. If the

ATD is not capable of completing a successful regeneration due to duty cycle constraints or other restrictions, a parked regeneration may need to occur.

5.19.1 OPERATION

To initiate a parked regeneration, the following must occur:

□ Cycle the park brake OFF to ON – once an ignition cycle

□ Cycle the clutch pedal (if con fi gured) – once an ignition cycle

□ Park Brake must be ON and the clutch must be released

□ Engine should be on the idle governor (can not be in Fast Idle or PTO Mode)

□ The engine should be fully warmed up and operating on thermostat temperature (>60°C)

□ For J1939 transmissions, the transmission must be in neutral (con fi rmed by the J1939 data link – current gear and selected gear is 0)

□ Vehicle speed must be 0 mph

□ Hold the Regen Switch to the ON position for fi ve seconds and release

When the request is accepted, the DPF Regeneration Lamp will turn on for one second and then go off for the rest of the parked regeneration and the engine will increase. Once the stationary regen is completed successfully, the DPF Regeneration Lamp will remain off and the engine will return to base idle.

If any of the above requirements are removed, the engine will return to idle.

To cancel the manual regeneration, the driver can toggle the Regen Switch to ON for 5 seconds.

The DPF Regeneration Lamp will turn on for one second to show acceptance of the cancellation request and then return to the appropriate state as de fi ned by the current level of soot in the engine.

5.19.2 DPF PARKED (STATIONARY) REGENERATION ONLY

NOTE:

This is for hazardous applications only.

The MCM should be con fi gured to not allow automatically triggered over-the-road regenerations

(DPF Manual Regen Only Enable = Enabled).

The appropriate options, based on the MCM, are listed in Table 5-63.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-113

FEATURES

MCM Setting

DPF Manual Regen Only Enable – Disabled

DPF Manual Regen Only Enable - Enabled

Table 5-63 Parked Regeneration Options

CPC Setting

DPF Stationary Regen Only – 1 Enabled

DPF Stationary Regen Only – 0 Disabled

DPF Stationary Regen Only – 1 Enabled

There are two CPC options:

□ DPF Stationary Regen Only = 0–Disabled

□ DPF Stationary Regen Only = 1–Enabled

DPF Stationary Regen Only = 0-Disabled

– This option allows the DPF Regeneration Switch to request a parked regeneration or an over the road regeneration. If the conditions are met

(refer to section 5.19.1) a parked regen will be initiated. If the conditions are not met then an

over-the-road regeneration will occur.

DPF Stationary Regen Only = 1-Enabled

– This option allows the DPF Regeneration Switch to

only request a parked regeneration. If the conditions are met (refer to section 5.19.1) a parked

regen will be initiated. If conditions are not met, nothing will happen.

5-114

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters listed in Table 5-64 must be set for manual transmissions.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Park Brake Switch Con fi g

1 02 DI Selection

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Setting

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

0 – Hardwired

255 – Not Available (typical setting)

0 – Hardwired (typical setting)

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

1 – Enable Park Brake Interlock

4 – Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor

Table 5-64 Parameter Settings for Manual Transmissions

The parameters listed in Table 5-65 must be set for Allison, Eaton UltraShift transmissions.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Park Brake Switch Con fi g

1 02 DI Selection

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Setting

0 – No Clutch Switch

0 – Disable

1 – Info from J1939

0 – Hardwired (typical setting)

1 – CCVS1

2 – CCVS2

3 – CCVS3

1 – Enable Park Brake Interlock

3 – J1939 ETCI

Table 5-65 Parameter Settings for J1939 Transmissions (Allison, Eaton

UltraShift, Eaton AutoShift)

The parameter listed in Table 5-66 is optional for hazardous applications.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

DPF Stationary

Regen only

0 – DPF Regen Switch can request parked regen or over-the-road regen

1 – DPF Regen Switch can request parked regen only.

Table 5-66 DPF Stationary Regen Only Parameter

Default

1 – Enabled

Access

VEPS, DRS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-115

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-116

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.20 PASSMART

The PasSmart feature is available on selected on-highway engines equipped with a Vehicle

Speed Sensor.

5.20.1 OPERATION

The PasSmart feature allows a fl eet manager to enable a second Vehicle Speed Limit (VSL) above the normal VSL to assist while passing other vehicles on the highway. This second VSL is programmed for a limited duration (PS Pass Speed Duration)during a given time period (PS Pass

Speed Interval). The passing speed interval starts when the feature is programmed. An interval of

8, 12, or 24 hours will always reset at midnight.

The driver activates PasSmart by double-pumping the accelerator pedal. Starting at the full throttle position, the driver releases the throttle completely, returns the throttle to the full throttle position, releases it again and then returns to full throttle. If the driver completes this action within fi ve seconds, PasSmart is activated.

After double-pumping the accelerator pedal, the vehicle is given 20 seconds to accelerate to a speed above the normal VSL. If the vehicle speed does not exceed the normal VSL in 20 seconds, the driver must repeat the double-pump action. Once the normal VSL has been exceeded, a new higher VSL becomes the maximum vehicle speed limit. This limit is the normal VSL plus the

PS Pass Speed Increment.

A passing speed duration timer starts when vehicle speed exceeds the normal VSL and continues to count until the vehicle speed drops back below the normal VSL. At the end of the passing event when the vehicle speed drops back below the normal VSL, PasSmart is automatically deactivated and the driver cannot exceed the normal VSL unless the Accelerator Pedal is double-pumped again.

PasSmart operates only with the foot pedal and not with the Cruise Control switches or hand throttle. However, activating PasSmart does not disturb or deactivate Cruise Control if it is on when the passing event begins. Once the driver has passed the other vehicles and PasSmart has deactivated, Cruise Control automatically takes over. To deactivate Cruise Control during the pass, the driver must turn the Cruise Control switch to off.

When the Passing Speed Duration time expires, the AWL will begin to fl ash one minute prior to ramping the VSL back down to the normal VSL. The rampdown event always takes 5 seconds regardless of the Passing Speed Increment programmed into the controller. The rampdown alert can be distinguished from an engine fault warning in that the AWL fl ashes for the PasSmart alert and remains on constantly for an engine fault.

If intervals of 8, 12, or 24 hours are selected, the interval will always reset after the chosen interval and at midnight. This allows fl eets to synchronize the reset with driver change periods.

All other intervals reset from the time they are selected. For example, if you select 4 hours, then a reset will occur every 4 hours from the time of programming but not necessarily at midnight.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-117

FEATURES

PasSmart still operates when there is an active (non-shutdown) system fault. In this situation the

AWL goes from constant illumination to fl ashing one minute before the VSL ramps down. At the end of the passing event when PasSmart is deactivated, the AWL will return to constant illumination if the fault is still active.

If there is an active stop engine fault, the rampdown/shutdown activity overrides PasSmart. The additional passing speed is not available until the fault is cleared.

For example, if the normal fl eet speed limit is 65 MPH, the fl eet manager can increase the VSL an additional 10 MPH for a maximum of 30 minutes per reset interval. An example of these limits is listed in Table 5-67.

Setting

30 minutes

8 hours

10 MPH

Table 5-67

Parameter

PS Pass Speed Duration

PS Pass Speed Interval

PS Pass Speed Increment

PasSmart Settings

Each time the driver exceeds 65 MPH, the 30 minute clock counts down as long as the speed remains above 65 MPH. He or she can continue to enter and exit the PasSmart extra speed zone to pass vehicles until the entire 30 minutes of higher VSL is used up. The driver is warned by the

AWL one minute before the time expires. The vehicle speed is then limited to 65 MPH until the 8 hour period expires and an additional 30 minutes of passing time is available.

5.20.2 INSTALLATION

An OEM supplied Vehicle Speed Sensor or output shaft speed over the SAE J1939 Data Link is

required. Refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle Speed Sensor," for additional information.

5-118

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.20.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The PasSmart parameters are programmable at engine order entry or with DDDL 7.0, Vehicle

Electronic Programming System (VEPS), and DRS as listed in Table 5-68.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description Options Default Access

23 PasSmart Enable Enables/disables the feature.

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS or DRS

PS Pass Speed

Duration

PS Pass Speed

Interval

PS Pass Speed

Increment

The duration of time per interval that is permitted at the higher speed. A value of zero will disable the feature.

The period of time when the

CPC resets to begin a new period.

The additional vehicle speed permitted above the programmed vehicle speed limit. A value of zero will disable the feature.

0 to 255 minutes

1 to 24 hours*

0 to 250 KPH

* The time within which the road speed limit will return to the programmed road speed limit when the feature is deactivated.

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS or DRS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS or DRS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS or DRS

Table 5-68 PasSmart Parameters

5.20.4 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

PasSmart will increase the Vehicle Speed Limit.

A vehicle can be set up with both PasSmart and Fuel Economy Incentive, but the extra speed increments provided by the two features do not add together. For example, if Fuel Economy

Incentive is set up to give 7 MPH of extra speed when the driver hits the maximum fuel economy target and the PasSmart increase is 5 MPH the resulting speed increase is 7 MPH, not 12 MPH.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-119

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-120

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.21 PASSWORDS

DDEC VI is capable of providing password protection for groups of parameters or a fl eet password for all parameters.

5.21.1 OPERATION

A Password of zero is used to deactivate the protection. The lockout passwords may be up to 4

ASCII characters. Each level can have its own unique password.

Passwords can be activated with DDDL 7.0, VEPS or DRS. Once activated the parameters may not be changed until the correct password is reentered. The CPC is automatically locked at the next ignition cycle.

Groups selected for additional password protection are listed in Table 5-69.

Level

Parameters Protected

General Password – all parameters in all groups will be protected when this level is set

Vehicle Speed Settings – parameter groups that contain primary settings governing the speed of the vehicle. All parameters in following groups are protected when this password is set:

□

PGR003 – Common Limiters

□

PGR008 – Vehicle Speed Sensor

□

PGR015 – Cruise Control (minus the “Cruise Power” parameter for rating changes)

PTO / Idle Settings – parameter groups that contain settings related to idle, idle shutdown, and PTO of the vehicle. All parameters in the following groups are protected when this password is set:

□ PGR007 – PTO

□

PGR017 – Idle and PTO Shutdown

System Settings – parameter groups that contain settings related to systems on the vehicle.

All parameters in the following groups are protected when this password is set:

□

PGR002 – Vehicle Parameters I

□

PGR010 – Engine Brake

□

PGR012 – Optimized Idle

□

PGR019 – Automatic Fan Activation

Engine Protection Settings – the parameter group that contain settings for engine shutdown options and Engine Rating Selection – There is one parameter in this section, the “Cruise

Power” parameter from group 15. This parameter allows the user to select from up to 3 different ratings within the same engine family (high power, low power, and cruise-power) where applicable are protected when this password is set:

□

PGR018 – Engine Protection

□

Cruise Power (Parameter 15 in Cruise Control Group)

TBD

Export Settings

Table 5-69 Protected Parameters

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-121

FEATURES

Back Door Password

In cases where the Password for a locked module is not available, a separate “back door”

Password may be obtained from Detroit Diesel Technical Service. Detroit Diesel requires the VIN and Seed values read from the locked module with DDDL 7.0 or DRS. The new unlock code will be provided by Detroit Diesel Technical Service for entry into the tool. When the correct Back

Door Password is entered, all parameters with write access by the Service tool may be changed.

Changing the Password

The Password itself may be changed. The CPC is automatically locked at the next ignition cycle.

Changing the Password to a value of “0” will disable Password protection. When the Password is changed, the ignition must be off for at least 15 seconds.

5-122

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.22 PROGRESSIVE SHIFT

The Progressive Shift option offers a high range maximum Vehicle Limit Speed to encourage the use of high (top) gear during cruise operation. Progressive Shift encourages the driver to upshift from a lower to a higher gear prior to reaching the engine's governed speed. The resulting lower engine speed in high range should result in improved fuel economy. Progressive shifting techniques should be practiced by every driver, but can be forced if fl eet management considers it necessary. The bene fi ts from progressive shifting are best realized during stop-and-go driving cycles.

The rate of acceleration will be limited below the programmed MPH to encourage up shifting.

As the driver accelerates beyond a speci fi ed MPH speed, the rate of engine acceleration is limited in higher RPM, to encourage (force) the operator to select the top gear.

□ Progressive Shift should be used with 2100 RPM rated engines in fl eet applications where the reduced driveability will not impede trip times or productivity.

□ Progressive Shift is not compatible with automatic transmissions.

NOTE:

Progressive Shift should be selected only when Spec Manager is run. Progressive

Shift selection without Spec Manager could result in mismatched equipment, poor fuel economy, and poor performance. Your local Detroit Diesel Distributor will run the program.

5.22.1 OPERATION

The Progressive Shift option has two sets of low ranges and one set of high range parameters,

which are programmable with DDDL 7.0, DRS, or VEPS. Refer to section 5.22.6. The example

shift pattern chart (see see Figure 5-27) re

fl ects default values when the Progressive Shift option is chosen and the low and high gear parameters are not modi fi ed.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-123

FEATURES

Figure 5-27 Progressive Shift Chart - Represents Default

An alternate use for the Progressive Shift option would be to encourage a driver (or force him/her) into top gear. Normally this condition exists when the gearing selected at the time of order allows

a Vehicle Limit Speed to be reached in a gear lower than top gear. See see Figure 5-28.

5.22.2 LOW RANGE #1

The low range #1 area of operation is bound by a maximum vehicle speed, a maximum engine speed and a maximum turn-off speed. In the fi

rst illustration (see see Figure 5-27) the default

values are 12 MPH (approximately 19.3 kmh), 1400 RPM and 1800 RPM, respectively. During vehicle acceleration, when the vehicle speed is below selected maximum vehicle speed for range

#1, the maximum rate the engine can be accelerated is reduced to 33 RPM/s. During light load operation, the driver will feel this and be encouraged to up-shift to regain his/her rate of acceleration. If the engine continues to be operated above the low range #1 maximum speed, it may eventually reach the low range #1 turn-off speed. When the low range #1 turn-off speed is obtained, no additional increase in engine speed will be allowed. At this point, the transmission must be up-shifted if the vehicle is to continue accelerating.

5.22.3 LOW RANGE #2

The low range #2 area of operation is bounded by a maximum speed (MPH), a maximum vehicle speed and a maximum engine turn-off speed. In the fi

rst illustration (see see Figure 5-27) the

default values shown are 27 MPH (approximately 43.5 km/h), 1600 RPM and 1800 RPM, respectively. (The lower vehicle speed boundary is the low range #1 maximum speed value.)

The engine acceleration rate for low range #2 is 25 RPM/sec.

5-124

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.22.4 HIGH RANGE

Two high range parameters should be selected; a high range maximum vehicle speed (MPH) and a high range maximum engine speed (RPM). The default values shown in the fi rst illustration

(see see Figure 5-27) are 50 MPH (approximately 80.5 km/h) and 1650 RPM, respectively. Once

the high range maximum engine speed is attained, the engine will not be allowed to operate above the high range maximum engine speed. This is meant to encourage up-shifting to high

gear in order to increase vehicle speed (see see Figure 5-28). Spec Manager should be used if

the HIGH GEAR MPH is set such that it reduces the vehicle speed and the engine MPH; this limit will not work as desired.

NOTE:

The HIGH GEAR maximum engine speed could change the maximum Vehicle Limit

Speed if the high gear maximum engine speed (RPM) limits the Vehicle Limit Speed.

With Progressive Shift enabled, the high gear RPM limit overrides the rated speed of the engine rating.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-125

FEATURES

Figure 5-28 Progressive Shift Corrects Problem with High and Low Gears

Modi fi ed

5-126

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.22.5 INSTALLATION INFORMATION

A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be installed. It must be enabled, and all proper calculations

entered into the ECU with DRS, DDDL 7.0, or VEPS. Refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle Speed

Sensor," for additional information.

The Spec Manager program should be utilized to determine maximum vehicle speed for low range

#1 and #2. If the maximum engine speed and maximum vehicle speed coincide, the Progressive

Shift logic may not correctly compensate faster or slower on either side of the maximum vehicle speed. Spec Manager can alert the programmer to this dilemma and advise accordingly on maximum vehicle speed set points.

Example:

If the maximum vehicle speed #1 was 12 MPH (approximately 19.5 kmh), the

Progressive Shift logic may not determine if the maximum engine speed is 1400 or 1600 RPM.

Spec Manager would advise moving the maximum vehicle speed #1 plus or minus 2 MPH

(approximately 3.2 kmh) to eliminate any possible confusion.

5.22.6 PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY

Enabling all areas required for Progressive Shift can be performed with DDDL 7.0, VEPS, or

DRS.

The Progressive Shift option has two sets of low gear and one set of high gear parameters as listed in Table 5-70.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Progressive Shift

Enable

PS Low Gear 1 Max

Vehicle Spd

PS Low Gear 1

RPM Limit

PS Low Gear 1 Max

RPM Limit

PS Low Gear 2 Max

Vehicle Spd

PS Low Gear 2

RPM Limit

PS Low Gear 2 Max

RPM Limit

PS High Gear On

Vehicle Spd

PS High Gear RPM

Limit

Description

Indicates the enabled/disabled status of the progressive shift feature.

Sets the low gear #1 turn off speed.

Sets the low gear #1 RPM limit.

Sets the low gear #1 maximum RPM limit.

Sets the low gear #2 turn off speed.

Sets the low gear #2 RPM limit.

Sets the low gear #2 maximum RPM limit.

Sets the high gear turn on speed.

Sets the high gear RPM limit.

Table 5-70 Progressive Shift Programming

Range

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

0–250 km/h

0–4000 RPM

0–250 km/h

0–4000 RPM

0–250 km/h

0–4000 RPM

Default

0 = Disabled

19.3 km/h

1400 RPM

1800 RPM

43.5 km/h

1600 RPM

1800 RPM

80.5 km/h

1650 RPM

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-127

FEATURES

5.22.7 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

When Progressive Shift is enabled DDEC VI will treat "HIGH GEAR RPM LIMIT" as the rated speed of the engine. Vehicle maximum speed or maximum Cruise Control settings can not be set higher then engine speed will allow based on the VSS data entered.

5-128

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.23 STARTER LOCKOUT

The Starter Lockout function protects the starter motor from over-speed damage, e.g. re-engaging the starter motor while the engine is running.

5.23.1 OPERATION

The Starter Lockout output circuit drives a normally closed relay, which interrupts the starting signal when the output has been activated.

If enabled, the Starter Lockout output will be activated when the engine speed exceeds the minimum speed for the starting motor for a maximum amount of time. To ensure that the engine would start even under worst conditions, the over-speed time condition will be added to the engine speed condition before the starter is locked out. Both values, maximum speed and minimum over-speed time, are dependent on the coolant temperature. The output is disabled when the ignition switch has been cycled to off or the engine is not running, i.e. the engine speed has a value of zero.

The cranking time is limited to a programmed value to keep the starting motor from over crank damage. The starter lockout relay will be activated when cranking time exceeds this lockout limit.

Since the starter signal is not available, the engine speed will be monitored to detect when the engine is cranking. When the starter engages, engine speed rises from zero to starter cranking speed. After this has been detected, engine speed will not be below the programmed speed for over-crank detection for the programmed maximum starter crank time.

If the driver is still turning the start key and the engine doesn't start while the maximum crank time expires, the starter lockout relay will be activated to shut off the starting engine. In this instance, the starter lockout relay will remain activated until the programmed lockout time expires and the engine has stopped. This allows the starting motor to cool down before the driver is permitted to start the engine again.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-129

FEATURES

5.23.2 INSTALLATION

The Starter Lockout output circuit drives a normally closed relay, which interrupts the starting

signal when the output has been activated. See Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Starter Lockout

5.23.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

Starter Lockout may be enabled or disabled as listed in Table 5-71 with VEPS or DRS.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting Options

35 3 17 DO Selection 1 – Enable Starter Lockout

3 17 DO Fault

Detection

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 5-71 Starter Lockout

0 – Disabled

1 – Enable Starter Lockout

2 – Enable kick down output*

3 – Not used

4 – Optimized Idle Alarm

5 – Split Valve*

6 – Starter Lockout + AGS2

7 – Engine brke disabled for over speed*

0 = Enable

1 = Disable

Default

0 –

Disabled

0 –

Disabled

5-130

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.24 TACHOMETER DRIVE

DDEC VI uses the Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP Sensor) signals to compute engine speed.

The engine speed is transmitted over the SAE J1708/J1587 and J1939 Data Links. Engine speed

can be displayed by connecting a tachometer from the CPC connector pin 1/9. See Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 Tachometer Drive Installation

5.24.1 OPERATION

Pin 1/9 provides an engine speed signal for driving an external tachometer.

For engine speeds up to 120 rpm, no signal is output. Above 120 rpm the frequency of the signal is proportional to the engine speed with 16,040 pulses output per engine revolution.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-131

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-132

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.25 THROTTLE CONTROL/GOVERNORS

There are two types of engine governors that are used with throttle controls. The engine governors are:

□ The Automotive Limiting Speed Governor (ALSG) for torque control, typical governor for

on-highway applications (refer to section 5.25.1)

□ The Power Take-off (PTO) for speed control, typical governor for off-highway applications

(refer to section 5.25.2)

5.25.1 AUTOMOTIVE LIMITING SPEED GOVERNOR - ON-HIGHWAY

In on-highway applications and some nonroad applications, ALSG is the primary throttle source.

The throttle input in a ALSG sets percent load. The amount of fuel input to the engine is determined by the throttle position. As the load on the engine varies the resulting engine speed will vary between idle speed and governed speed.

ALSG Accelerator Pedal

The accelerator pedal (AP) sends an input signal which the ALSG uses to calculate engine power.

This assembly is also referred to as the Accelerator Pedal Sensor (AP Sensor) assembly.

ALSG Accelerator Pedal Installation

DDEC VI is compatible with an AP which has an output voltage that meets SAE J1843 and has less than 5% of voltage supply closed throttle variability.

The AP is an OEM supplied part. Vendor sources may be contacted for additional design and installation details.

NOTE:

An Idle Validation Switch is required.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-133

FEATURES

See Figure 5-31 for installation requirements.

Figure 5-31 Accelerator Pedal Installation

An Idle Validation Switch is required and uses two digital inputs. Refer to section 4.1, "Digital

Inputs," for additional information.

ALSG Accelerator Pedal Assembly Diagnostics

Idle Validation Switch inputs provide redundancy to assure that the engine will be at idle in the event of an AP in-range malfunction. The Idle Validation Switch is connected to two digital inputs on the CPC. When the IVS Idle Position Switch on the AP is switched to battery ground and the IVS throttle position is open, the engine speed will be at idle.

5.25.2 POWER TAKE-OFF

Power Take-off (PTO) control is available to fuel the engine in order to keep the selected PTO speed regardless of engine torque without driver interaction. The engine torque cannot exceed a programmed limit.

The PTO throttle control options are:

□ Cab PTO – Cruise Switch PTO

□ Remote PTO – Preprogrammed Set Speeds

□ Remote Accelerator Control

5-134

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

See Figure 5-32 for a diagram of PTO logic.

Figure 5-32 PTO Logic

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-135

FEATURES

Cab PTO – Cruise Switch PTO

The Cruise Control switches are used to activate and control the Cruise Switch PTO (Cab PTO)

option. See Figure 5-33

NOTE:

Cab throttle and remote throttle can be overridden with the accelerator pedal unless

PTO Throttle Override Enable is enabled.

Figure 5-33 Cab PTO Mode

The Cruise On/Off switch must be turned ON and the park brake must be engaged (if con fi gured).

If Cruise Switch PTO is inactive and the Cruise Switch PTO conditions are met, pressing and releasing the Resume/Accel Switch will activate Cruise Switch PTO at the resume PTO speed

(Resume Accel Switch PTO Set Speed). Pressing and releasing the Set/Coast Switch will activate

Cruise Switch PTO at the set PTO speed (Set Coast Switch PTO Set Speed). The Resume PTO

Speed and the Set PTO Speed cannot be greater than the PTO maximum speed (Max PTO Spd

Resume Accel Sw) or lower than the PTO minimum speed (Min PTO Spd Set Coast Sw).

5-136

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Once the PTO set speed is established, the Resume/Accel Switch can be used to increment the set speed at a programmable rate up to the maximum PTO speed (Max PTO Spd Resume Accel Sw).

Releasing the Resume/Accel Switch will set the engine speed at the current operating speed.

The Set/Coast Switch will decrement the set speed at a programmable rate, down to the minimum

PTO speed (Min PTO Spd Set Coast Sw). Releasing the Set/Coast Switch will set the engine speed at the current operating speed.

Cab PTO speed is disabled for any of the following:

□ Turning the Cruise Master Switch off

□ Vehicle speed is greater than “Max Road Speed in PTO Mode” (programmable – default

10 km/h)

□ VSS fault

□ Park Brake is off (if con fi gured)

□ Park Brake or Service Brake Applied (PTO Dropout Serv Brk Prk Brk)

□ Clutch Pedal is pressed (PTO Dropout or Clutch Enabled)

□ Cruise Switch Fault

□ Optimized Idle is Active

If PTO Throttle Override is enabled (PTO Throttle Override Enabled), the throttle pedal can override the PTO engine speed up to the maximum engine speed for Throttle Override (Throttle

Override Max Engine Spd). The previous PTO set speed will become active again, if it is greater than the engine speed equivalent to the throttle pedal percentage.

DDEC will exit the Cab PTO Mode for Automated/Automatic Transmissions for the following:

□ Shift in Progress message received over J1939

□ Valid TSC1 command received from the transmission

□ Transmission in gear (selected gear or current gear)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-137

FEATURES

Cruise Switch PTO Programming Requirement and Flexibility

The digital inputs listed in Table 5-72 are required for Cruise Switch PTO.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Options

Service Brake

Switch Con fi g

CC On Off Switch

Con fi g

CC Set Cst Res

Accel Sw Con fi g

Clutch Switch

Con fi g

1 02 DI Selection

Park Brake Switch

Con fi g

Trans Neutral

Input Con fi g

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = No Clutch Switch

1 = 1 Clutch Switch

2 = 2 Clutch Switch

3 = CCVS1

4 = CCVS2

5 = CCVS3

6 = ETC1

1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock

0 = Disable

2 = FUSO Auxiliary Brake

Cut Switch*

0 = Hardwired

1 = CCVS1

2 = CCVS2

3 = CCVS3

0 = Hardwired

1 = Info from J1939

255 = Not Available

* Not supported in NAFTA

Table 5-72 Cruise Switch PTO Digital Inputs

Default

0 = Hardwired

1 = Enable Park Brake

Interlock

0 = Hardwired

Access

VEPS, DRS

5-138

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The Cruise Switch PTO parameters are listed in Table 5-73 and Table 5-74.

Parameter

Group

Parameters Description

Con fi g PTO

Speed Control

Enables/disables the PTO function

Options

0 – Disabled

1 – Enabled

2 – Enabled if neutral

3 – Enabled if neutral and park brake

4 – Enabled if park brake

5 – PTO while driving

Default

0 – Disabled

Max PTO Spd

Resume Accel

Sets the max PTO speed

500 – 3000 RPM 3000 RPM

Access

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

Min PTO Spd

Set Coast Sw

Sets the min PTO speed

500 – 3000 RPM 500 RPM

PTO Throttle

Override

Enable

Throttle

Override Max

Eng Spd

PTO Dropout

Serv Brk Prk

Brk

PTO Dropout on

Clutch Enabled

Enables/disables the throttle pedal from overriding

PTO mode.

Sets the max engine speed that the throttle can obtain when in

PTO mode.

0 = Disabled

1 = Enable engine speed in

PTO mode to be increased with throttle input

0 – 3000 RPM

Enables/Disables the status of the

Service Brake or

Park Brake for disabling of PTO

Enables/Disables the status of the

Clutch Switch for disabling of PTO

1 = Enable

3000 RPM

0 – No PTO dropout with

Service Brake or Park

Brake activation

1 – PTO drops out on

Service Brake or Park

Brake activation

2 – PTO drops out on

Service Brake activation

3 – PTO drops out on Park

Brake activation

0 – No PTO dropout with clutch pedal

1 – Causes PTO to dropout if the clutch is pressed

0 = No PTO dropout with

Service Brake or Park Brake activation

0 = No PTO dropout with clutch pedal

Table 5-73 Cruise Switch PTO Parameters (1 of 2)

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-139

FEATURES

Parameter

Group

Parameters Description

Max Road

Speed in PTO

Mode

Set Coast

Switch PTO

Set Speed

Set Coast

Max PTO

Torque

Resume

Accel Sw

PTO Set Spd

Resume

Accel Max

PTO Torque

Sets the max vehicle speed over which PTO is disabled

Sets the initial speed when the Set/Coast

Switch is used to enable

Cab PTO

Sets the max engine torque that becomes active once the Set/Coast

Switch is activated

Sets the initial speed when the Resume/Accel

Switch is used to enable

Cab PTO

Sets the max engine torque that becomes active once the

Resume/Accel Switch is activated

PTO Ramp

Rate

Sets the rate of increase or decrease.

Table 5-74

Options

0 – 128 km/h

0 — 3000 RPM

0 – 5000 Nm

0 — 3000 RPM

Default

10 km/h

500 RPM

5000 Nm

500 RPM

Access

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

0 – 5000 Nm

25 – 2500 RPM/sec

5000 Nm

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

200 RPM/sec

DDDL

7.0, DRS,

VEPS

Cruise Switch PTO Parameters (2 of 2)

5.25.3 REMOTE PTO — PREPROGRAMMED SET SPEEDS

The Remote PTO will override the Cab PTO mode when the Remote PTO Switch input on the

CPC (2/9) is grounded. The active throttle will override Remote PTO if “PTO Throttle Override” is enabled.

Remote PTO speed is disabled for any of the following:

□ Turning the Remote PTO switch off for more than two seconds

□ Vehicle speed is greater than Max Vehicle Speed in PTO (programmable – default 10 km/h)

□ VSS fault

□ Clutch Released Pedal or Service Brake Pedal are pressed (if con fi gured)

□ Park Brake is OFF (if con fi gured)

□ Park Brake or Service Brake is applied (PTO Dropout Serv Brk Prk Brk)

□ Cruise Switch fault

□ Clutch Pedal is pressed (PTO dropout on clutch enabled)

□ Optimized Idle is active

5-140

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

If “PTO Throttle Override Enable” is enabled, the throttle pedal can override the PTO Engine speed up to the Maximum Engine Speed for Throttle Override. If the throttle pedal or remote throttle engine speed is less than current PTO engine speed, the engine will not respond to throttle requests less than the current PTO engine set speed. The previous PTO set speed will become active again, if it is greater than the engine speed equivalent to the throttle pedal percentage.

NOTE:

If remote PTO is active and then disabled due to one or more disabling conditions, PTO mode will automatically reactivate when the disabling condition is removed.

There are three options using preprogrammed set speeds:

□ Pulsed Input using pin 2/9

□ Gray Coded using pins 2/9, 1/11, 2/11

□ Binary Coded using pins 2/9, 1/11, 2/11

Pulsed Input Using Pin 2/9

Between one and three preset speeds can be set via “No of Speeds via Remote PTO”. The fi rst speed is selected by toggling 2/9 ON. The second speed is selected by toggling 2.9 OFF and ON within two seconds. The third speed is selected by toggling 2.9 OFF and ON within two seconds.

Remote PTO speed is disabled for any of the following:

□ Turning the Remote PTO switch off for more than two seconds

□ Vehicle speed is greater than Max Vehicle Speed in PTO (programmable – default 10 km/h)

□ VSS fault

□ Clutch Released Pedal or Service Brake Pedal are pressed (if con fi gured)

□ Park Brake is OFF (if con fi gured)

□ Park Brake or Service Brake is applied (PTO Dropout Serv Brk Prk Brk)

□ Cruise Switch fault

□ Clutch Pedal is pressed (PTO dropout on clutch enabled)

□ Optimized Idle is active

NOTE:

If remote PTO is active and then disabled due to one or more disabling conditions,

Remote PTO mode will automatically reactivate when the disabling condition is removed.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-141

FEATURES

See Figure 5-34 for a diagram of Remote PTO Mode.

Figure 5-34

Installation

Remote PTO Mode – Pulsed Input Using Pin 2/9

The Remote PTO Switch is wired to pin 2/9 of the CPC. See Figure 5-35.

Figure 5-35 Remote PTO Switch

5-142

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Gray Coded Using Pins 2/9, 1/11, 2/11 and Binary Coded

Gray Coded – In this mode, the engine speed set-point is received directly from two digital input pins (LIM0 AND LIM1) on the CPC. These digital inputs are used to read the status of the two remote PTO switches fi tted to the vehicle. The inputs are usually sent to the CPC from a separate control unit hardwired directly to the CPC.

Gray code mode is the recommended interface for remote speed selection. Gray code mode has the advantage that only one switch changes for one set-point select to the next, thus alleviating the problem of switch bounce and non-synchronous switching.

Binary Coded – This interfacing method is designed for devices which are not capable of generating “Gray Code” and uses the same two digital input signals (LIM0 AND LIM1). As mentioned previously, this method has a disadvantage. When switching from speed 1 to speed

2 or from speed 3 to OFF two bits must toggle synchronously. When the contacts bounce (as the usually do), an undesired speed set-point could be requested brie fl y. The preset speeds are selected with pin 1/11 and 2/11 based on Table 5-75.

Remote PTO Enable

Input (2/9)

Open

Ground

LIM1 (1/11)

Don't Care

Open

Ground

Table 5-75 Gray Coded Inputs

LIM2 (2/11)

Don't Care

Open

Ground

Open

Speed Selection

Remote PTO OFF

Remote PTO Speed 1

Remote PTO Speed 2

Remote PTO Speed 3

Installation for Gray Coded or Binary Input

See Figure 5-36 for the wiring of gray coded or binary input.

Figure 5-36 Remote PTO Gray Coded or Binary Input

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-143

FEATURES

Remote PTO Programming Requirement and Flexibility

The Remote PTO parameters are listed in Table 5-76 and Table 5-77.

Parameter

Group

Parameters Description Options

Con fi g PTO

Speed Control

Enables/disables the PTO function

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Enabled if neutral

3 = Enabled if neutral & park brake

4 = Enabled if park brake

5 = PTO while driving

Max PTO Spd

Resume Accel

Sets the max

PTO speed

500 – 3000 RPM

Defaults

0 = Disabled

3000 RPM

Access

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

Min PTO Spd

Set Coast Sw

Sets the min PTO speed

500 – 3000 RPM 500 RPM

Table 5-76

PTO Throttle

Override

Enable

Throttle

Override Max

Eng Spd

PTO Dropout

Serv Brk Prk

Brk

Enables/disables the throttle pedal from overriding

PTO mode.

Sets the max engine speed that the throttle can obtain when in PTO mode.

0 = Disable PTO

1 = Enable engine speed in

PTO mode to be increased with throttle pedal

0 – 3000 RPM

Enables/Disables the status of the Service

Brake or Park

Brake for disabling of PTO

0 = No PTO dropout with

Service Brake or Park Brake

Activation

1 = PTO drops out if the

Service Brake or Park Brake is being pressed

2 =PTO drops out on Service

Brake Activation

3 = PTO drops out on Park

Brake Activation

PTO Dropout

Clutch Enabled

Enables/Disables the status of the Clutch

Switch for disabling of PTO

0 = No PTO dropout with clutch pedal

1 = Causes PTO to dropout if clutch is being pressed

1 = Enable

3000 RPM

0 = No PTO dropout with

Service Brake or Park Brake

Activation

0 = No PTO dropout with clutch pedal

Remote PTO Parameters (1 of 2)

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

DDDL

7.0,

DRS,

VEPS

5-144

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Parameter

Group

Parameter Description

Max Road

Speed in PTO

Mode

PTO Ramp Rate

No of Speeds via Remote PTO

Spd 1 via

Remote PTO

Spd 1 Max Eng

Trq Remote

PTO

Spd 2 via

Remote PTO

Spd 2 Max Eng

Trq Remote

PTO

Spd 3 via

Remote PTO

Spd 3 Max Eng

Trq Remote

PTO

Sets the max vehicle speed over which

PTO is disabled

Sets the rate of increase or decrease when in PTO mode.

Sets the number of remote PTO speeds that can be enabled

Sets the PTO #1 set speed

Sets the max engine torque for PTO Speed

#2 PTO set speed

Sets the max engine torque for PTO Speed

#3 PTO set speed

Sets the max engine torque for PTO Speed

Options

0 – 128 km/h

25 – 2500 RPM/sec

1 to 3

500 – 3000 RPM

500 – 5000 Nm

500 – 3000 RPM

500 – 5000 Nm

500 – 3000 RPM

500 – 5000 Nm

Remote PTO

Spd Selection

Mode

Sets the PTO speed selection mode

0 = 1 pulsed input

(VCU style)

1 = 2 gray coded inputs

2 = 2 binary coded inputs

Table 5-77 Remote PTO Parameters (2 of 2)

Defaults

10 km/h

200 RPM/sec

950 RPM

5000 Nm

1250 RPM

5000 Nm

1850 RPM

5000 Nm

Access

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

DRS, VEPS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-145

FEATURES

Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG

A Remote Accelerator Pedal can be installed to control either an analog Remote PTO (PTO) or analog Remote Accelerator Pedal (ALSG).

The Remote PTO will start when the Remote PTO switch (CPC, 2/9) is switched to battery ground. The Remote PTO logic will override the Cab PTO.

The Remote Throttle Select Switch input (CPC, 2/8) determines the active throttle control. When this pin is grounded, the engine will respond to the remote throttle input. When this input is not grounded, the engine will respond to the cab throttle pedal.

The PTO Enable input (CPC, 2/9) determines if the engine will be in PTO or ALSG mode.

If remote PTO is active and then disabled due to one or more disabling condition, PTO mode will automatically reactivate when the disabling condition is removed.

Remote Accelerator Control Example

Example:

If a remote throttle is required to work from idle to rated speed, the parameters listed in Table 5-78 must be set.

Parameter

PTO Throttle Override Enabled

Spd #1 Via Remote PTO

Max PTO Spd Resume Accel Sw

Set To

Idle

Rated (or highest RPM for the engine)

Table 5-78 Remote Accelerator Control Parameter Settings

5-146

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Installation

See Figure 5-37 for installation of a Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG.

Figure 5-37 Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG

5.25.4 RPM FREEZEE

When the RPM Freeze switch is ON (grounded), the current engine speed is maintained. The speed is held until the switch is turned OFF or PTO mode is deactivated.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-147

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-148

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.26 TRANSMISSION INTERFACE

DDEC VI can be interfaced to manual or automatic/automated transmission over the J1939 data link.

5.26.1 MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS

The interface for manual transmissions is provided through the J1939 data link.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The options for manual transmissions are listed in Table 5-79.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Transmission Type

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Min Speed

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

0 – Manual Transmission without Neutral Switch

MCM ENGINE START

3 – Manual Transmission with Neutral Switch

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 4000 (with neutral sw) – 800 rpm

MBE 4000 (without neutral sw) – 1100 rpm

MBE 900 – 800 rpm

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

Optional

0 – Hardwired

255 – Not Con fi gured

Table 5-79 Manual Transmission Options

5.26.2 MERCEDES AGS2 TRANSMISSION

The AGS2 transmission is only used with the MBE900 engine and has additional wiring requirements.

On non-multiplexed vehicles, the following outputs are required on the CPC:

□ Neutral Start Function

□ Backup Lamp Output

□ Check Trans Lamp Output

□ Trans Temp Lamp Output

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-149

FEATURES

Installation

See Figure 5-38 for the interface to the CPC and MCM for non-multiplexed transmissions and

Figure 5-39 for multiplexed transmissions.

Figure 5-38 AGS2 Transmission Interface to CPC/MCM – Non-multiplexed

Figure 5-39 AGS2 Transmission Interface to CPC/MCM – Multiplexed

5-150

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

The AGS2 connector pinout is listed in Table 5-80.

Connector Pin

Table 5-80 AGS2 Connector

Description

SmartShift Lever Ground

CAN2 (+) (Proprietary)

Not Used

CAN2 Low (Proprietary)

Not Used

J1939 (+)

Not Used

Ignition — +12V

Not Used

J1587 (-)

Battery (+) — +12V

J1939 (-)

J1587 (+)

Battery (+) — +12V

Not Used

SmartShift Lever Input A

Ground

SmartShift Lever Input B

Not Used

Ground

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-151

FEATURES

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

AGS2 transmissions have additional programming requirements on non-multiplexed vehicles as listed in Table 5-81.

Parameter

Group

MCM

Table 5-81

Parameter

Transmission Type

3 09 DO Selection

3 10 DO Selection

3 12 DO Selection

3 17 DO Selection

Starter Type Control

Transmit EBC1 for AGS2

3 18 DI Selection

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – AGS2 Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

5 – AGS2 MCM Start

2 – AGS2 Backup Lamp

2 – AGS2 Trans Temp Indicator Lamp

2 – AGS2 Check Trans Lamp

0 – Disabled

1 – Starter Activated via MCM

0 = No EBC1 (J1939 ABS)

1 = Transmit EBC1 (Non-J1939 ABS)

0 = Disable (J1939 ABS)

1 = Enable ABS Input (Non-J1939 ABS)

AGS2 Transmission Programming Requirements for Non-Multiplexed

Vehicles

AGS2 transmissions have additional programming requirements on multiplexed vehicles as

listed in Table 5-82.

Parameter

Group

Parameter Setting

MCM

Transmission Type

3 17 DO Selection

Starter Type Control

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – AGS2 Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

5 – AGS2 MCM Start

0 – Disabled

0 – Starter Activated via MCM*

1 Transmit EBC1 for AGS2

0 = No EBC1 (J1939 ABS)

1 = Transmit EBC1 (Non-J1939 ABS)

13 3 18 DI Selection

0 = Disable (J1939 ABS)

1 = Enable ABS Input (Non-J1939 ABS)

* If starter type is not 0, then a different module must prevent the starter from engaging when the transmission is in gear.

Table 5-82 AGS2 Transmission Programming Requirements for Multiplexed

Vehicles

5-152

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.26.3 EATON TOP2 OPERATION

The Top2 system automatically shifts between the top two gears of the Eaton Top2 Transmission to optimize drivetrain for best fuel economy or performance. Shifting between the two highest gears in the transmission is done by the CPC and requires no driver interaction. The system works with engine brakes and cruise control during automatic shifts. The torque demand from throttle or cruise control is smoothly ramped down before the shift and ramped up after the shift allowing the driver to maintain throttle position during shifts. Cruise Control is automatically resumed after the shift. When the transmission is shifted out of the two top gears, the driver has full manual control over the transmission. The engine will also detect skip shifts into the auto mode and still take control of the transmission's top two gears.

DDEC VI supports the Top2 RTLO-xx713A-T2 transmission.

NOTE:

This transmission is only available with a Series 60 engine.

Installation

See Figure 5-40 to install Top2.

Figure 5-40 Top2 Transmission

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The Top2 feature is enabled when the Top2 Shift Solenoid and the Top2 Lockout Solenoid digital outputs, listed in Table , 5-83 are con fi gured as well as the transmission type. The digital outputs must be con fi gured by the Vehicle Electronic Programming System (VEPS) or the DDEC

Reprogramming System (DRS).

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-153

FEATURES

Parameter

Group

MCM

Table 5-83

Diagnostics

Parameter

3 08 DO Selection

3 07 DO Selection

3 07 Fault Detection

3 08 Fault Detection

Transmission Type

TOP2 Cruise Control Sw

Enable

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Limp Home Speed for

Trans Type

Top2 Reprogramming Choices

Setting

6 – Top2 Shift Solenoid

3 – Top2 Lockout Solenoid

1 – Enable

1 - Enable

7 – Eaton Top2

0 – Disable (Top2 will work regardless of the state of the cruise master switch.)

1 – Enable (Top2 will work only if the cruise master switch is ON.)

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

4 — Magnetic Pickup Speed Sensor

0 – Manual

If a fault is detected on either the shift solenoid or shift lockout digital output, the CPC will leave the transmission in manual mode until the fault is repaired. When there is a fault in any of the following sensors, the driver will be left with manual control of the transmission and the

CPC will turn ON the AWL.

□ Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

□ Lockout and shift solenoid failures

When there is a fault in any of the following features, the driver will be left with manual control of the transmission. The AWL will be turned ON for these conditions.

□ Failed splitter engagements

□ Failed splitter disengagements

□ Failed synchronizing attempts (possible in-gear)

5-154

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.26.4 EATON ULTRASHIFT TRANSMISSION

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters listed in Table 5-84 must be set for the Eaton UltraShift® transmission.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Transmission Type

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Adjusted Idle Con fi guration

Max Adjusted Idle

0 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

1 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

2 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

3 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

Eng Brk Stage 1 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 2 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 3 Off Delay Time

Stage 1 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 2 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 3 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Spd

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – Eaton UltraShift Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

5 – Eaton UltraShift MCM Start

0 – Disabled

1 – Info from J1939

3 – J1939 (ETC1)

3 – Enabled if Neutral and Park Brake

<700 rpm

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 900/4000 – 800 rpm

Table 5-84 Eaton UltraShift Transmission Parameters

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-155

FEATURES

5.26.5 EATON ULTRASHIFT ASW TRANSMISSION

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters listed in Table 5-85 must be set for the Eaton UltraShift® ASW transmission.

Parameter

Group

Table 5-85

Parameter

Transmission Type

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Adjusted Idle Con fi guration

Max Adjusted Idle

0 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

1 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

2 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

3 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

Eng Brk Stage 1 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 2 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 3 Off Delay Time

Stage 1 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 2 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 3 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Spd

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – Eaton UltraShift Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

6 – Eaton UltraShift MCM Start

0 – Disabled

1 – Info from J1939

3 – J1939 (ETC1)

3 – Enabled if Neutral and Park Brake

<700 rpm

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 900/4000 – 800 rpm

Eaton UltraShift ASW Transmission Parameters

5-156

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.26.6 EATON AUTOSHIFT TRANSMISSION

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters listed in Table 5-86 must be set for the Eaton AutoShift® transmission

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Transmission Type

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Vehicle Speed Sensor

0 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

1 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

2 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

3 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

Eng Brk Stage 1 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 2 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 3 Off Delay Time

Stage 1 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 2 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 3 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Spd

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – Eaton AutoShift Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

5 – Eaton AutoShift MCM Start

1 – 1 Clutch Switch

1 – Info from J1939

3 – J1939 (ETC1)

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

0 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 900/4000 – 800 rpm

Table 5-86 Eaton AutoShift Transmission Parameters

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-157

FEATURES

5.26.7 ZF ASTRONIC TRANSMISSION

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters listed in Table 5-87 must be set for the ZF Astronic transmission.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Transmission Type

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Adjusted Idle Con fi guration

Max Adjusted Idle

0 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

1 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

2 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

3 Speed Governor TSC1 Condition

Eng Brk Stage 1 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 2 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 3 Off Delay Time

Stage 1 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 2 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 3 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Spd

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – ZF Astronic Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

5 – ZF Astronic MCM Start

0 – Disabled

1 – Info from J1939

3 – J1939 (ETC1)

3 – Enabled if Neutral and Park Brake

<700 rpm

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

0 – Series 60

16 – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

200 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

200 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

200 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 900/4000 – 800 rpm

Table 5-87 ZF Astronic Transmission Parameters

5-158

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.26.8 ALLISON TRANSMISSION

Low Range Torque Protection (LRTP) is an Allison feature supported by DDEC VI. If enabled, the CPC expects the TCFG2 J1939 message. A fault will be logged if the message is not received.

Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters listed in Table 5-88 must be set for the Allison transmission

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Transmission Type

Clutch Switch Con fi g

4 08 DI Selection

Trans Neutral Input Con fi g

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Adjusted idle Con fi guration

Trans Torque Limit Enable

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Spd

Eng Brk Stage 1 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 2 Off Delay Time

Eng Brk Stage 3 Off Delay Time

Stage 1 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 2 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Stage 3 Eng Brk Off Delta Spd

Eng Brk Driveline Clsd Spd

Setting

DIRECT ENGINE START

2 – Allison Direct Start

MCM ENGINE START

6 – Allison MCM Start

0 – Disabled

1 – Info from J1939

3 – J1939 (ETC1)

3 – Enabled if Neutral and Park Brake

0 – Disabled

1 – Enable

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 900/4000 – 800 rpm

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

60 ms – Series 60

240 ms – MBE900/4000

200 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

200 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

200 rpm – Series 60

100 rpm – MBE900/4000

Series 60 – 800 rpm

MBE 900/4000 – 800 rpm

Table 5-88 Allison Transmission Parameters

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-159

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-160

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.27 VEHICLE SPEED LIMITING

A Vehicle Speed Sensor is necessary for the Vehicle Speed Limiting feature.

5.27.1 OPERATION

Vehicle Speed Limiting discontinues engine fueling at any vehicle speed above the programmed limit. The CPC stops fueling when maximum vehicle speed is reached. If the Limiter 0 Switch is

OFF, the Maximum Road Speed Limit will be the limit for the road speed. If the Limiter 0 Switch is ON, the Alternate Speed Limiter (Limiter 0) Speed will be the limit for the road speed. Setting any of the limits to the maximum value will disable that road speed limit.

5.27.2 INSTALLATION

An OEM supplied Vehicle Speed Sensor or output shaft speed over the SAE J1939 Data Link is

required. Refer to section 3.6.6, "Vehicle Speed Sensor," for additional information. If the Limiter

0 switch is required, it is wired to CPC pin 1/11. This is a normally open switch.

5.27.3 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS AND FLEXIBILITY

The Vehicle Speed Limit parameters are listed in Table 5-89.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Max Road Speed

Limiter0 Max

Road Spd

Enabled

Limiter1 Max

Road Spd

Enabled

Description

Maximum vehicle speed.

Alternate Road Speed

Limiter 0 cannot exceed this speed.

Maximum vehicle speed when CPC pin 1/11 is connected to ground.

Maximum vehicle speed when CPC pin 2/11 is connected to ground.

10 – 152 km/hr 152 km/hr

0 – 152 km/hr

Table 5-89 Vehicle Speed Limiting Parameters

Options Default

152 km/hr

Access

VEPS, DRS or

DDDL 7.0

VEPS, DRS or

DDDL 7.0

VEPS, DRS or

DDDL 7.0

For more information on limiters, refer to section 5.16, “Limiters.”

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-161

FEATURES

5.27.4 INTERACTION WITH OTHER FEATURES

The Cruise Control maximum set speed cannot exceed the Vehicle Speed Limit.

When Vehicle Speed Limiting is enabled and a VSS code is logged, the engine speed in all gears will be limited for the duration of the ignition cycle to engine speed at the Vehicle Speed

Limit in top gear.

NOTE:

Due to VSS signal quality at low speeds, it is recommended that the vehicle speed limit not be set below a minimum of 48 kph to insure smooth road speed limiting. DDC cannot guarantee smooth speed limiting for maximum speeds set below 48 kph.

5-162

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

5.28 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ANTI-TAMPERING

VSS Anti-tampering can be used to detect fi xed frequency oscillators or devices which track engine RPM and produce fewer pulses per revolution than a VSS wheel. These devices are used to trick the CPC into believing that vehicle speed is low.

A VSS fault will be logged if the sensor appears to be working improperly but the vehicle speed is not zero. The engine speed in all gears will be limited for the duration of the ignition cycle to the engine speed at the Vehicle Speed Limit in top gear.

This feature should only be enabled on installations with manual transmissions where a Vehicle

Speed Sensor is wired directly to the CPC.

NOTE:

Do Not use VSS anti-tampering with SAE J1939, automatic, semi-automatic, or torque converter transmissions.

5.28.1 PROGRAMMING FLEXIBILITY

Vehicle Speed Limiting must also be enabled. The parameters are listed in Table 5-90.

Parameter

Group

Parameter

Anti Tamper

Vehicle Speed Sensor

Range

0 = Disable

1 = Enable Anti Tamper Function via ABS

2 = Enable Anti Tamper Function via Gear Ratio

0 = No Sensor

1 = C3 Sensor

2 = Square Wave (Hall Sensor)

3 = J1939 (ETC1)

4 = Magnetic Pickup

5 = J1939 (TCO1)

6 = J1939 (CCVS) Source 1

87 = J1939 (CCVS) Source 2

8 = J1939 (CCVS) Source 3

1.00 - 20.00

Axle Ratio

Number of Output

Shaft Teeth

Tire Revolutions per

Distance

Top Gear Ratio

Second Highest Gear

Ratio

0 - 250

160 - 1599

0.1 - 2.55

Table 5-90 VSS Anti-tampering Parameters

Default

5.29

312

2.55

Access

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL 7.0, DRS,

VEPS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0,

VEPS, DRS

DDDL 7.0, DRS,

VEPS

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

5-163

FEATURES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-164

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Section Page

6.1

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................

6-3

6.2

SAE J1587 DATA LINK ...........................................................................

6-4

6.3

SAE J1939 MESSAGES AND MESSAGE FORMAT ..............................

6-28

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-1

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

6-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

6.1 OVERVIEW

Key components of the CPC system are the serial communication links SAE J1587 and SAE

J1939. Using these communication links allows CPC to offer the following functionality:

□ Transmitting sensor information from the MCM via the data link at regular intervals and/or upon request to obtain data and to monitor for failures

□ Sharing information between stand-alone modules used in the system via the data link

□ Sharing engine data with electronic dashboard displays and vehicle management information systems via the data link

□ Transmitting and performing diagnostic procedures from external instrumentation such as the hand-held diagnostic data readers or DDDL via the data link

□ Transmitting customer requested changes to the CPC from external instrumentation via the data link

□ Transmitting to the powertrain the messages assigned to both the engine and the transmission retarder.

The following industry standard Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) documents can be used as a reference:

□ SAE J1587,

Electronic Data Interchange Between Microcomputer Systems In Heavy Duty

Vehicle Applications

□ SAE J1708,

Serial Data Communications Between Microcomputer Systems In Heavy

Duty Vehicle Applications

□ SAE J1939/71,

Vehicle Application Layer

□ SAE J1939,

Top Layer (Overview)

□ SAE J1939/01,

Truck and Bus Applications

□ SAE J1939/11,

Physical Layer

□ SAE J1939/21,

Data Link Layer

□ SAE J1939/73,

Application Layer Diagnostics

To obtain a copy of the above documents contact the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).

SAE International

400 Commonwealth Drive

Warrendale, PA 15096

Attention: Publications

Phone: (412) 776-4970 www.sae.org

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-3

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

6.2 SAE J1587 DATA LINK

SAE RP J1587 de fi nes the recommended format of messages and data being communicated between microprocessors used in heavy-duty vehicle applications. SAE J1587 Data Link + and SAE J1587 Data Link - as shown on the Vehicle Interface Harness schematic are used as the J1587 communication link. These circuits also exist in the nine-pin Diagnostic Connector,

Cab for use with the diagnostic tools.

NOTE:

The maximum length for the SAE J1587 Data Link is 40 m (130 ft).

6.2.1 MESSAGE FORMAT

A complete description of the CPC parameters is provided within this section of the manual.

CPC transmits parametric data at SAE J1587 recommended rates in packed message form. The fi rst byte or character of each message is the Message Identi fi cation character (MID). The MID identi fi es which microcomputer on the serial communication link originated the information.

Each device in the system originating messages must have a unique MID. The assignment of

MIDs should be based on those listed in SAE RP J1587. The primary MID is 128.

The ProDriver display uses MID 171. Off-board diagnostic tools like hand-held readers should be identi fi ed by MID 172. Off-board programming stations like Vehicle Engine Programming

Station (VEPS) should be identi fi ed by MID 182. Messages using MIDs as recommended by

SAE RP J1587 will be responded to by the CPC.

Subsystems also require identi fi ers. The subsystem identi fi er character (SID) is a single byte character used to identify fi eld-repairable or replaceable subsystems for which failures can be detected or isolated. SIDs are used in conjunction with SAE standard Diagnostic Trouble Codes de fi ned in J1587 within PID 194.

The identi fi ers used by CPC are de fi ned and listed in Table 6-1.

Identi fi er

Failure Mode Identi fi er (FMI)

Message Identi fi cation Character (MID)

Parameter Identi fi cation Character (PID)

Subsystem Identi fi cation Character (SID)

Description

The FMI describes the type of failure detected in the subsystem and identi fi ed by the PID or SID.

The MID is the fi rst byte or character of each message that identi fi es which microcomputer on

CPC SAE J1587 DL serial communication link originated the information.

A PID is a single byte character used in CPC SAE

J1587 DL messages to identify the data byte(s) that follow. PIDs identify the parameters transmitted.

A SID is a single byte character used to identify fi eld-repairable or replaceable subsystems for which failures can be detected or isolated.

Table 6-1 Identi fi ers Used by CPC

6-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

6.2.2 SAE J1708/J1587 MESSAGE PRIORITY

Each messagesent by CPC is assigned a priority on a scale of 1 to 8, in compliance with the message priority assignment speci fi ed in SAE RP J1708. The most critical message has a priority of one. The message assignments are listed in Table 6-2. All devices transmitting messages across

DDEC's SAE J1708/J1587 Data Link must be prioritized and transmitted in this manner.

Priority

1 and 2

3 and 4

5 and 6

7 and 8

Table 6-2

Description

Reserved for messages that require immediate access to the bus.

Reserved for messages that require prompt access to the bus in order to prevent severe mechanical damage.

Reserved for messages that directly affect the economical or ef fi cient operation of the vehicle.

All other messages not fi tting into the previous priority categories.

Message Priority Assignments

6.2.3 SAE J1587 PIDS REQUIRING ACTION

CPC will respond to data requests per the J1587 PID requests shown in the next sections.

Data Request

The format for a data request is shown below.

PID

Data a a - Parameter number of the requested parameter

Component Speci

c Request

The format for a component speci fi c request is shown below.

PID

128

Data a b a - Parameter number of the requested parameter b - MID of the component from which the parameter data is requested

NOTE:

CPC responds with the appropriate data provided the MID in byte (b) matches the MID stored in calibration. The primary MID for CPC is 128.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-5

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

J1587 Outputs - Single Byte Parameters

PID 33

- Clutch Cylinder Position update rate: On Request format:

PID

Data a a – Clutch Cylinder Position

PID 40

- Engine Retarder Switches Status update rate: 0.2 s or on state change format:

PID

Data a a – Engine Retarder Switches Status

Bits 8–7: Reserved – all bits set to 1

Bits 6–3:: Engine Retarder Level Switch

0 - 0 Cylinders

1 - 2 Cylinders

3 - 3 Cylinders

4 - 4 Cylinders

5 - 5 Cylinders

6 - 6 Cylinders

7 - 7 Cylinders

8 - 8 Cylinders

9 - 13 – Reserved

Bits 2–1:

14 – Error

15 – Not Available

Engine Retarder Switch

00 - Off

01 - On

10 - Error

11 - Not Available

6-6

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 41

- Cruise Control Switches Status update rate: 1.0 s or on state change format:

PID

Data a a – Cruise Control Switches Status

Bits 8–7:

Bits 6–5:

Reserved - all bits set to 1

Cruise Control On/Off Switch Status

00 - Off

01 - On

Bits 4–3:

Bits 2–1:

10 - Error

11 - Not Available

Cruise Control Set Switch Status

00 - Off

01 - On

10 - Error

11 - Not Available

Cruise Control Resume Switch Status

00 - Off

01 - On

10 - Error

11 - Not Available

PID 43

- Ignition Switch Status update rate: 1.0 s or on state change format:

PID

Data a a – Ignition Switch Status

Bits 8–7:

Bits 6–5:

Bits 4–3:

Start Aid Contacts Status – N/A

Crank Contacts Status – N/A

Run Contacts Status

00 - Off

Bits 2–1:

01 - On

10 - Error

11 - Not Available

Accessory Contacts Status – N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-7

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 44

- Attention/Warning Indicator Lamps Status update rate: 1 time/s or 10 time/s when changing format:

Bit: 1,2 Red Stop Lamp Status

00 - off

01 - on

10 - error

11 - Not Available

Bit: 3,4

Bit: 5-8

Amber Warning Lamp Status

00 - off

01 - on

10 - error

11 - Not Available

Reserved, All Bits set to 1

PID 62

- Retarder Inhibit Status update rate: format:

On request source: comments:

Bits: 1, 2

Bits: 3-8

Retarder Inhibit Status

00 - Off (not Inhibited)

01 - On (Inhibited)

Uncommitted, all Bits set to 1

Digital output for Engine Brake Enable

Used with the Engine Brake outputs.

PID 64

- Direction Switch Status update rate: On request format:

PID

Data a a – Direction Switch Status

Bits 8–7:

Bits 6–5:

Bits 4–3:

Reserved; Both Set to 1

Forward Switch Status — N/A

Neutral Switch Status

00 - Off

Bits 2–1:

01 - On

10 - Error

11 - Not Available

Reverse Switch Status — N/A

6-8

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 65

- Service Brake Status update rate: 1 time/s format:

Bits: 1, 2 source:

Service Brake Status

00 - off

01 - on

Bits: 3-8 Uncommitted, all Bits set to 1

Bits 3-8 = 1

Service Brake Switch

PID 68

- Torque Limiting Factor update rate: 1 time/s resolution: source: comments:

0.5%/Bit (Uns/SI)

ECU calculated.

This parameter indicates the amount of engine protection torque reduction that is in effect.

PID 69

- Two-Speed Axle Switch Status update rate: format:

1 time/s

Bits: 8

Bits: 1-7

Two-Speed Axle Switch

0 - off

1 - on

All Bits set to 0

PID 70

- Parking Brake Switch Status update rate: 1 time/s format:

Bits: 8 Parking Brake Switch Status

0 - off

1 - on source:

Bits: 1-7 Uncommitted, all Bits set to 0

Parking Brake Switch

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-9

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 71

- Idle Shutdown Timer Status update rate: 1 time/s format:

Bit: 1

Idle Shutdown Override ("Driver Alert")

1 - Active

Bit: 2

Bit: 3

Bit: 4

Bit: 8

Engine Has Shutdown by Idle Timer to

1 - Yes

Idle Timer Shutdown Override

1 - Active (Idle Shutdown has been overridden)

Idle shutdown timer function

1 - Enabled in calibration

0 - Disabled in calibration

Idle Shutdown Timer Status

1 - Active

Bits: 5-7 All Bits set to 0

PID 74

- Vehicle Speed Set Limit (Road Speed Limiting) update rate: On request only resolution: source: comments:

0.5 mph/Bit (Uns/SI)

Calibration value (customer de fi ned)

Vehicle Speed Limiting is a customer option.

PID 83

- Vehicle Speed Limit Status update rate: format:

1 time/s source: comments:

Bit: 8

Bits: 1-7

Vehicle Speed Status

1 - Active

All Bits set to 0

ECU calculated

Vehicle Speed Limiting is a customer option.

PID 84

- Speed update rate: resolution: source: comments:

10 times/s

0.5 mph/Bit (Uns/SI)

Vehicle Speed Sensor input

Transmitted only if the Vehicle Speed Sensor is con fi gured.

6-10

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 85

- Cruise Control Switch Status update rate: 10 times/s format:

Bit: 1

On/Off Switch

1-On

0-Off

Bit: 2

Bit: 3

Bit: 4

Bit: 5

Set Switch

1-Off

0-On

Coast Switch

1-Off

0-On

Resume Switch

1-Off

0-On

Accel Switch

1-Off

0-On source:

Bit: 6

Bit: 7

Brake Switch

1-Off

0-On

Clutch Switch

1-Off

0-On

Bit: 8

Cruise Active

1-On

0-Off

Cruise Control switch inputs

PID 86

- Cruise Control Set Speed update rate: resolution:

0.1 times/s, 5 times/s when the set speed is changing

0.5 mph/Bit (Uns/SI) source: comments:

Cruise Control switch inputs

Transmitted if Vehicle Speed Cruise control is enabled.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-11

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 89

- VSG Switch Status update rate: 1 time/s format:

Bit: 1 comments:

Bit: 2

Bit: 3

Bit: 4

Bit: 5

Bit: 6

Bit: 7

On/off switch

0-Off

1-On

Set switch

0-Off

1-On

Coast switch

0-Off

1-On

Resume switch

0-Off

1-On

Accel switch

0-Off

1-On

Brake

0-Off

1-On

Clutch

0-Off

1-On

Bit: 8 VSG

0-Off

1-On

Transmitted when either Cruise-Switch VSG or analog VSG is con fi gured.

PID 91

- Percent Throttle update rate: 10 times/s resolution: source:

0.4%/Bit (Uns/SI)

Throttle Sensor input

PID 92

- Percent Engine Load update rate: 10 times/s resolution: source: comments:

0.5%/Bit (Uns/SI)

ECU calculated

Percent engine load is the ratio of actual torque and the minimum of the requested torque and digital torque limit.

PID 93

- Output Torque update rate: resolution:

1 time/s

20 ft-lb/Bit (S/SI)

6-12

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 94

- Fuel Delivery Pressure update rate: 1 time/s resolution: source:

0.5 psi/Bit (Uns/SI)

Fuel Pressure Sensor

PID 98

- Engine Oil Level update rate: 0.1 time/s resolution: source:

0.5%/Bit (Uns/SI)

Oil Level Sensor

PID 100

- Engine Oil Pressure update rate: 1 time/s resolution: source:

0.5 psi/Bit (Uns/SI)

Oil pressure sensor sensor range: 0 to 65 psi

PID 102

- Turbo Boost Pressure (Gage) update rate: resolution: source:

1 times/s

0.125 psi/Bit (Uns/SI)

Turbo Boost Pressure Sensor

PID 105

- Intake Manifold Temperature update rate: resolution: source:

1 time/s

1°F/Bit (Uns/SI)

Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor

PID 106

- Air Inlet Pressure update rate: resolution:

1 time/s

0.25 psi/bit (Uns/SI)

PID 107

- Air Filter Differential Pressure update rate: 0.1 time/s resolution: source:

0.2 in.H

O/Bit (Uns/SI)

Air Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

PID 108

- Barometric Pressure update rate: 1 time/s resolution: 0.0625 psi/Bit (Uns/SI)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-13

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 110

- Coolant Temperature update rate: 1 time/s resolution: source:

1°F/Bit (Uns/SI)

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor sensor range: 0 to 300°F

PID 111

- Coolant Level update rate: resolution:

0.1 times/s

0.5%/Bit (Uns/SI) (or full = 100%, low = 0%) source: comments:

Engine Coolant Level Sensor

If the Add Coolant Level Sensor (ACL Sensor) is installed with the Engine

Protection Coolant Level Sensor (ECL Sensor), the coolant level will be:

100% When both sensors are in coolant

50% When the ACL Sensor is out of the coolant

0% When both sensors are out of the coolant

If only the ECL Sensor is con fi gured:

100% Full

0% Low

PID 121

- Engine Retarder Status update rate: 5 times/s format:

Bit: 1 1 – 2 cylinders active comments:

Bit: 2

Bit: 3

Bit: 4

Bit: 5

1 – 3 cylinders active

1 – 4 cylinders active

1 – 6 cylinders active

1 – 8 cylinders active

Bit: 8 1 - Retarder active

Transmitted only if engine brakes are con fi gured.

PID 122

- Engine Retarder Percent update rate: 1 time/s resolution: 0.5%Bit (Uns/SI)

Double Byte Parameters

PID 168

- Battery Voltage update rate: 1 time/s resolution: source:

0.05 volts/Bit (Uns/I)

Battery voltage measured at input to CPC

6-14

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 171

- Ambient Air Temperature update rate: 0.1 time/s resolution: 0.25°F/Bit (S/I)

PID 173

- Exhaust Gas Temperature (DOC Inlet Temperature) update rate: resolution:

1.0 time/s

0.25°F/Bit (S/I)

PID 174

- Fuel Temperature update rate: 1 time/s resolution: source:

0.25°F/Bit (S/I)

Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor sensor range: -40 to 175°F

PID 175

- Engine Oil Temperature update rate: resolution:

1 time/s

0.25°F/Bit (S/I) source: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor sensor range: -40 to 300°F

PID 182

- Trip Fuel update rate: 0.1 times/s resolution: 0.125 gal/Bit (Uns/I)

PID 183

- Instantaneous Fuel Economy (MPG) update rate: resolution:

5 times/s

1/256 mpg/Bit (Uns/I)

PID 184

- Instantaneous Fuel Economy (MPG) update rate: 5 times/s resolution: 1/256 mpg/Bit (Uns/I)

PID 185

- Average Fuel Economy (MPG) update rate: resolution:

0.1 times/s

1/256 mpg/Bit (Uns/I)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-15

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 187

- VSG Set Speed update rate: 0.1 times/s, 5 times per s when the set speed is changing resolution: source: comments:

0.25 rpm/Bit (Uns/I)

VSG switch input

Used to indicate the current set speed from:

□ Analog VSG

□ Cruise Switch VSG

PID 188

- Idle Set Speed update rate: On request only resolution: source:

0.25 rpm/Bit (Uns/I)

Calibration value

PID 189

- Rated Engine Speed update rate: On request only resolution: source:

0.25 rpm/Bit (Uns/I)

Calibration value

PID 190

- Engine Speed update rate: 10 times/s resolution: 0.25 rpm/Bit (Uns/I)

PID 203

- DPF Outlet Temperature update rate: resolution:

1 times/s

0.25°F/Bit (S/I)

PID 366

- Engine Oil Level High/Low update rate: 0.1 times/s resolution: 0.473 L/Bit

PID 439 (255 183)

- Extended Range boost Pressure update rate: resolution:

1 times/s

0.125 kPa/Bit (Uns/I)

6-16

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Variable Length Parameters

PID 192

- Multi-Section Parameter update rate: Used to transmit messages that are greater than 21 bytes in length.

format:

PID

192

Data n a b c/d c c c c c n - Byte count of data that follows this character. This excludes characters MID, PID 192 and n but it includes a, b, c, or d type character.

a = PID specifying the parameter that has been sectioned.

comment: b = The last section number (total number of sections minus ONE) and the current section number. The upper nibble contains the current section number (1 to 15). The lower nibble contains the current section number and is limited to the range 0 to 15.

Section numbers are assigned in ascending order.

c = Data portion of the sectioned parameter. May be 1 to 14 characters in the fi rst packet. May be 1 to 15 characters in the middle and ending packets.

d = Byte count of the total data portion. This character is sent only in the fi rst packet. The values are limited to 239 or less but must be greater than 17.

PID 192 is used to section any CPC message that exceeds 21 bytes while the engine is running, in particular PID 194, PID 196, and PID

243. If the engine is stopped, CPC may transmit messages up to 40 bytes in length.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-17

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 194

- Transmitter System Diagnostic Code / Occurrence Count Table update rate: On Request only format:

PID

194

Data n a b c a b c a b c a b c a b c...

n Byte count of data that follows this character. This excludes characters MID, PID 194 and n but includes a, b, c type characters.

a SID or PID of a standard diagnostic code.

comment: b Diagnostic code character

Bits: 1-4

Bit: 5

Bit: 6

Bit: 7

FMI of a standard diagnostic code

Byte (a) Identi fi er

1 - Byte (a) is a SID

0 - Byte (a) is a PID

Type of Diagnostic Code

1 - standard diagnostic code

0 - expansion diagnostic codes (PID/SID from page 2)

Current Status of Fault

1 - fault is inactive

0 - fault is active

Occurrence count Bit: 8

1 - count is included

0 - count is not included c Occurrence count for the diagnostic code de fi ned by the preceding 2 characters. The maximum occurrence count is 255.

Bit 8 of byte (b) of the diagnostic code is used to determine if it is included.

Diagnostic codes are transmitted periodically while active. When the active code becomes inactive, the code is transmitted once to indicate that the fault became inactive. Inactive diagnostic codes are available by request of PID 194. If more than 6 codes are active at any point,

PID 194 is sectioned as described in PID 192.

6-18

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 195

– Transmitter Data Request / Clear Count format:

PID

195

Data n a b c n - Number of parameter data characters = 3 a - MID of the device to which the request is directed b - SID or PID of a standard diagnostic code c - Diagnostic code number

Bits:1 - 4

Bit:5

Bit:6

Bit:7, 8

1 -

0 -

Failure mode identi fi er (FMI) of a standard diagnostic code

Byte (b) identi fi er

Byte (b) is a Subsystem Identi fi er (SID)

Byte (b) is a Parameter Identi fi er (PID)

Type of diagnostic code

Standard diagnostic code

Reserved for expansion diagnostic codes

1 -

0 -

00--

01 -

10 -

11 -

Request an ASCII descriptive message for the given diagnostic code.

Request count be cleared for the given diagnostic code on the device with the given MID.

Request counts be cleared for all diagnostic codes on the device with the given MID. The diagnostic code given in this transmission is ignored.

Request additional diagnostic information for the given diagnostic code, the content of which is de fi ned under PID

196.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-19

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 196

- Diagnostic Data/count clear response update rate: On Request only format:

PID

196

Data n a b c c c c c n = Byte count of data that follows this character. This excludes characters MID, PID 194 and n but includes a, b, and c type characters.

a = SID or PID of a standard diagnostic code b = Diagnostic Code Character

Bits 1-4 FMI of a standard diagnostic code

Bit 5 Byte (a) identi fi er

1 - Byte (a) is a SID

Bit 6 -

0 - Byte (a) is a PID

Type of diagnostic code

1 - standard diagnostic code

0 expansion diagnostic codes (PID/SID from page 2)

Bit 7-8 Action

- Message is an ASCII descriptive message for the given diagnostic code.

01 - The count has been cleared for the given diagnostic code.

10 - All clearable diagnostic counts have been cleared for this device.

- Message is additional diagnostic information for the given diagnostic code, as de fi ned below.

c = Additional information (if applicable) c1-c5 - ATA/VMRS (DTDSC) c6, c7 - Engine hours the code was fi rst logged (LSB fi rst) format: 1 h/Bit.

range - 0-65535 hours.

c8, c9 - Calendar date (Month, Day) the code was fi rst logged, if available.

c10, c11 - Clock time the code was fi rst logged (hours, minutes), if available.

c12, c13 - Engine hours the code last became active (LSB fi rst).

c14, c15 - Calendar date (Month, Day) the code last became active, if available.

c16, c17 - Clock time the code last became active (hours, minutes), if available.

6-20

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 196

- Diagnostic Data/count clear response update rate: On Request only format:

PID Data comment: c18, c19 - Number of ss the code has been active (LSB fi rst).

format: ss = 1 s/Bit range = 0-65535 (18.2 hours)

Value remains at 65535 ss once it has been reached.

c20 - Number of Stop Engine Override Switch restarts while the code was active. The value remains at 255 once it has been reached.

c21+ = Optional associated parameter value (scaled as de fi ned in J1587)

For temperatures, pressures, and voltages with FMI 0

- Highest value achieved

For temperatures, pressures, and voltages with FMI 1

- Lowest value achieved

For engine speed with FMI 0 - Highest speed achieved

For vehicle speed with FMI 0 or 11 - Highest speed achieved

Last byte = checksum

The date and time that the code last became inactive (bytes c14-c17) will be transmitted as zero if the code is currently active. This data may be sectioned using PID 192.

PID 233

- Unit Number (Power Unit) update rate: On Request only format:

PID

231

Data n a a a . . .

n = number of bytes: 10 a = unit number in alphanumeric ASCII characters

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-21

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 234

- Software Identi fi cation update rate: On Request only format:

PID

234

Data n

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Number of SW ID fi elds

1st digit of major_num (ASCII)

2nd digit of major_num (ASCII)

3rd digit of major_num (ASCII)

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Byte: 9

Byte: 10

Byte: 11

Byte: 12

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit of minor_num (ASCII)

2nd digit of minor_num (ASCII)

3rd digit of minor_num (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit of edit_ver (ASCII)

2nd digit of edit_ver (ASCII)

3rd digit of edit_ver (ASCII)

Byte: 13

Byte: 14

Byte: 15

Byte: 16

Byte: 17

Byte: 18

Byte: 19

Byte: 20

Byte: 21

Byte: 22

Byte: 23

Byte: 24

Byte: 25

Byte: 26

Byte: 27

Byte: 28

Byte: 29

Byte: 30

Byte: 31

Byte: 32

Byte: 33

Byte: 34

Byte: 35

Byte: 36

Byte: 37

Byte: 38

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit of con

2nd digit of con

3rd digit of con fi fi fi g_id (ASCII) g_id (ASCII) g_id (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII) rel_type (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII) hw_ver

* delimiter (ASCII) edit_let (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit of diag_ver(ASCII)

2nd digit of diag_ver(ASCII)

3rd digit of diag_ver(ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit of diag_variant(ASCII)

2nd digit of diag_variant(ASCII)

3rd digit of diag_variant(ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit sw_year (ASCII)

2nd digit sw_year (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit sw_month (ASCII)

2nd digit sw_month (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit sw_day (ASCII)

6-22

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 234

- Software Identi fi cation

Byte: 39

Byte: 40

Byte: 41

Byte: 42

Byte: 43

Byte: 44

Byte: 45

Byte: 46

Byte: 47

Byte: 48

Byte: 49

Byte: 50

Byte: 51

Byte: 52

Byte: 53

Byte: 54

Byte: 55

Byte: 56

Byte: 57

Byte: 58

Byte: 59

Byte: 60

2nd digit sw_day (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit sw_hour (ASCII)

2nd digit sw_hour (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

1st digit sw_minute (ASCII)

2nd digit sw_minute (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

ECU Serial Number (ASCII)

* delimiter (ASCII)

PID 235 - Total Idle Hours update rate: On Request only format:

PID

235

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 comment: a = Total idle hours; scaled 0.05 hours/Bit (Uns/LI)

Accumulates time while the engine is operating at idle.

PID 236 - Total Idle Fuel Used update rate: On Request only format:

PID

236

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 comment: a = Idle fuel used; scaled 1/8 hours/Bit (Uns/LI)

Accumulates while the engine is operating at idle.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-23

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 237

- Vehicle Identi fi cation Number (VIN) update rate: On Request only format:

PID

237

Data n a a a ...

n = number of bytes: up to 17 source: a = VIN in ASCII characters

Calibration value

PID 243

- Device Identi fi cation update rate: On Request only format:

PID

243

Data n a b b b b b c d d d d d d d d e f f f f f f f f f f g h h h h h h h h h h i n = number of bytes: 38 a = component ID = MID b = ATA/VMRS manufacturer ID (5 bytes) c = delimiter: ASCII ‘*' d = engine model number (8 bytes) source: comment: e = delimiter: ASCII ‘*' f = engine serial number (10 bytes) g = delimiter : ASCII ‘*’ h = unit number (10 bytes)

Calibration value

This parameter may be sectioned using PID 192.

PID 244

- Trip Miles update rate: 0.1 times/s format:

PID

244

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 comment: a = trip miles 0.1 mile/Bit (Uns/LI)

Transmitted only if the vehicle speed sensor is con fi gured.

6-24

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 245

- Total Miles update rate: 0.1 times/s format:

PID

245

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 comment: a = total miles, 0.1 mile/Bit (Uns/LI)

Transmitted only if the vehicle speed sensor is con fi gured.

PID 247

- Total Engine Hours update rate: On request only format:

PID

247

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 comment: a = total engine hours 0.05 hour/Bit (Uns/LI)

Used to identify the total hours that the engine is operating. Time accumulated while the engine speed is above 60 rpm.

PID 248

- Total VSG Hours update rate: On request only format:

PID

248

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 comment: b = total VSG hours 0.05 hour/Bit (Uns/LI)

Used to identify total engine hours the engine is operating in the following modes:

-Hand throttle VSG

-High idle using cruise switches

PID 249

- Total Engine Revolutions update rate: On request only format:

PID

249

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 a = total engine revolutions 1000 revolutions/Bit (Uns/SI)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-25

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PID 250

- Total Fuel Used update rate: On request only format:

PID

250

Data n a a a a n = number of bytes: 4 a = total fuel used 0.125 gal/Bit (Uns/LI)

PID 251

- Clock update rate: On request only format:

PID

251

Data n a b c n = number of bytes: 3 a = Seconds 0.25 sec/Bit, range 0 to 59.75 seconds comment: b = Minutes 1.0 min/Bit, range 0 to 59 minutes c = Hours 1.00 hour/Bit, range 0 to 23 hours

Transmitted if clock data is considered valid. The time is broadcast in

Greenwich Mean Time.

PID 252

- Date update rate: On request only format:

PID

252

Data n a b c n = number of bytes: 3 a = Day 0.25 day/Bit, range 1 to 31.75 days comment: b = Month 1.0 month/Bit, range 1 to 12 months c = Year - 1985 1.00 year/Bit, range 0 to 99

Day of the month is scaled such that 0 is a null value, values 1, 2, 3, and 4 are the fi rst day of the month, 5, 6, 7, 8,are the second day of the month, etc. Transmitted if clock data is considered valid.

6-26

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PID 384

- Component-Speci fi c Request Parameter update rate: On request only format:

PID

384

Data a b a = Parameter number of the requested parameter from page 2

(transmitted module 256) b = MID of the component from which the parameter data is requested.

Only the speci fi ed component should transmit the speci fi ed parameter. If the speci fi ed component is in the MID range 0 to 127, its response is not de fi ned in this document.

PID 448

- Page 2 Multi-Section Parameter update rate: De fi ned by speci fi ed sectioned parameter format:

PID

448

Data n,a,b,c/d,c,c,c,c,c,c,c n = Byte count of data that follows this character. This excludes characters MID, PID 448, and n, but it includes a, b, c, or d type characters.

a = PID from page 2 (PIDs 256 to 510) specifying the parameter that has been selected.

b =

The last section number (total number of sections minus ONE) and the current section number. The upper nibble contains the last section number (1 to 15). The lower nibble contains the current section number and is limited to the range 0 to 15. Section numbers are assigned in ascending order.

c = Data portion of sectioned parameters. May be 1 to 13 characters in the fi rstpacket as byte d is transmitted only in the fi rst packet. May be 1 to 14 characters in the middle and ending packets.

d = Total byte count of the original data. It is the same value as the byte count of the parameter being sectioned. This character is broadcast only in the fi rst packet. The value must be greater than 16 but is limited to 224.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-27

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

6.3 SAE J1939 MESSAGES AND MESSAGE FORMAT

J1939 (+), J1939 (-), and J1939 Shield are used as the J1939 communication link.

The message format uses the parameter group number as the label for a group of parameters.

Each of the parameters within the group can be expressed in ASCII, as scaled data, or as function states consisting of one or more Bits. Alphanumeric data will be transmitted with the most signi fi cant byte fi rst. Other parameters consisting of two or more data bytes shall be transmitted least signi fi cant byte fi rst. The type of data is also identi fi ed for each parameter.

The following sections identify the parameters that are supported by DDEC.

The J1939 source address can be set for various components as listed in Table 6-3.

Parameter

Group

Table 6-3

Parameter

EBC1 Source Address SAE J1939

TSC1 Source Address SAE J1939

CC1 Source Address SAE J1939

CC2 Source Address SAE J1939

CC3Source Address SAE J1939

CM1 DPF Source Address SAE J1939

CM1 Fan Source Addr1 SAE J1939

CM1 Fan Source Addr2 SAE J1939

J1939 Source Address

Options

0–255

Default

231

Access

VEPS, DRS

6-28

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

6.3.1 SAE J1939 SUPPORTED MESSAGES

The format of SAE J1939 supported messages may be seen in the following sections.

ACC1 – Adaptive Cruise Control

Reception rate:

Transmission rate:

Data length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

PGN:

Byte : 1

100 ms

1 second

8 bytes

254

111

65135 (0x00FE6F)

Speed of Forward Vehicle - N/A

Byte : 2

Byte : 3

Byte : 4

Distance to Forward Vehicle - N/A

Adaptive Cruise Control Set Speed - N/A

ACC Status 1

Bits: 8,7

Bits: 6-4

Bits: 3-1

Not De fi ned

Adaptive Cruise Control Set Distance Mode - N/A

Adaptive Cruise Control Mode (SPN 1590)

110: Error

111: Not Available

Byte : 5–6

Byte : 7

Byte : 8

Road Curvature - N/A

Bits: 8,7 Not De fi ned

Bits: 5,6

Bits: 3,4

ACC Distance Alert Signal–N/A

ACC System Shutoff Warning–N/A

Bits: 1,2

Not De fi ned

ACC Target Detected–N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-29

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

ACK/NACK – Acknowledge / Negative Acknowledge

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Bytes: 3–5

Byte: 6–8

As Needed

8 bytes

232

Destination Address

59,392 (0x00E800)

Control Byte

0: Positive Acknowledgment (ACK)

1: Negative Acknowledgment (NACK)

2: Access Denied (PGN supported but access denied)

Group Function Value (if applicable)- N/A

Reserved for assignment by SAE, send each of these bytes as “FF”

Parameter Group Number of requested information

AMB – Ambient Conditions

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

1 sec

8 bytes

PDU format: 254

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

245

65,269 (0x00FEF5)

Barometric Pressure (SPN 108)

Resolution: 0.5 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa offset

Byte: 2 Cab Interior Temperature - N/A

Bytes: 4,5 Ambient Air Temperature (SPN 171)

Byte: 6

Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, -273°C offset

Air Inlet Temperature (SPN 172)

Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C offset

Bytes: 7,8 Road Surface Temperature - N/A

6-30

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

ATI2 - Aftertreatment Intake Gas 2

Transmission Repetition Rate: 500 ms

Data Length:

Extended Data Page:

Data Page:

8 bytes

PDU format: 253

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

180

64948 (0xFDB4)

Bytes: 1–2 Exhaust Gas Temperature 1 (SPN 3241) – N/A

Bytes: 3–4 Particulate Trap Intake Gas Temperature (SPN 3242) (CPC Rel 2 or later)

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, -273°C offset

Exhaust Gas Temperature 1 Preliminary FMI (SPN 3243) – N/A

Particulate Trap Intake Exhaust Gas Temperature Preliminary FMI – N/A

ATO2 - Aftertreatment Outlet Gas 2

Transmission Repetition Rate:

Data Length:

Extended Data Page:

Data Page:

500 ms

8 bytes

PDU format: 253

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

179

64947 (0xFDB3)

Bytes: 1–2 Exhaust Gas Temperature 3 (SPN 3245) – N/A

Bytes: 3–4 Particulate Trap Outlet Gas Temperature (SPN 3246) (CPC Rel 2 or later)

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, -273°C offset

Exhaust Gas Temperature 3 Preliminary FMI (SPN 3247) – N/A

Particulate Trap Outlet Exhaust Gas Temperature Preliminary FMI – N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-31

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

CCSS – Cruise Control / Vehicle Speed Setup

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

On Request

8 bytes

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

254

237

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

65,261 (0x00FEED)

Maximum Vehicle Speed Limit (SPN 74)

Resolution: 1 km/h / Bit, 0 km/h offset

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Cruise Control High Set Limit Speed. (SPN 87)

Resolution: 1 km/h / Bit, 0 km/h offset

Cruise Control Low Set Limit Speed (SPN 88)

Resolution: 1 km/h / Bit, 0 km/h offset

Bytes: 4-8 Not De fi ned

6-32

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CCVS – Cruise Control / Vehicle Speed

Transmission/Reception Rate: 100 ms

Data Length:

Data Page:

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1 Measured_SW1

Bits: 8,7

Bits: 6,5

254

241

65,265 (0x00FEF1)

Not De fi ned

Cruise Control Pause Switch (SPN 1633)

00: Off

Bits: 4,3

01: On

10: Error

11: Take No Action

Parking Brake Switch (SPN 70)

00: Park Brake Not Set

01: Park Brake Set

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Byte: 2,3

Byte: 4

Bits: 2,1 Two Speed Axle Switch (SPN 69)

00: Low Speed Range

01: High Speed Range

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Wheel Based Vehicle Speed (SPN 84)

Resolution: 1/256 km/h, 0 km/h Offset

Measured_CC_SW1

Bits: 8,7 Clutch Switch (SPN 598)

00: Clutch Pedal Released

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

01: Clutch Pedal Depressed

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Service Brake Switch (SPN 597)

00: Brake Pedal Released

01: Brake Pedal Depressed

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Cruise Control Enable Switch (SPN 596)

00: Cruise Control Disabled

01: Cruise Control Enabled

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-33

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Bits: 2,1 Cruise Control Active (SPN 595)

00: Cruise Control Off

01: Cruise Control On

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Measured _CC_SW2

Bits: 8,7 Cruise Control Accelerate Switch (SPN 602)

00: Accelerate Switch Off

Bits: 6,5

01: Accelerate Switch On

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Cruise Control Resume Switch (SPN 601)

00: Resume Switch Off

01: Resume Switch On

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Bits: 4,3

Bits: 2,1

Cruise Control Coast Switch (SPN 600)

00: Coast Switch Off

01: Coast Switch On

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Cruise Control Set Switch (SPN 599)

00: Set Switch Off

01: Set Switch On

10: Error

11: Not Con fi gured

Cruise Control Set Speed (SPN 86)

Resolution: 1 km/h/Bit, 0 km/h Offset

State_CC

Bits: 8–6 Cruise Control State (SPN 527)

000: Off/Disabled

001: Hold

Bits: 5-1

010: Accelerate

011: Decel/Coast

100: Resume

101: Set

110: Accelerator Override

111: Not Available

PTO State - (SPN 976)

00000: Disabled/Off

00001: Hold

00010: Remote Hold

00100: Remote Standby

6-34

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

Byte: 8

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Bits: 2,1

00101: Set

00110: Decelerate/Coast

00111: Resume

01000: Accelerate

01001: Accelerator Override

01010: Programmed Speed 1

01011: Programmed Speed 2

01100: Programmed Speed 3

11111: Not Available

Measured_Idle_SW1

Bits: 8,7 Engine Shutdown Override Switch (SPN 1237)

00: Switch Off

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

01: Switch On

11: Not Con fi gured

Engine Test Mode Switch – N/A

Idle Decrement Switch (SPN 967)

00: Off

01: On

Idle Increment Switch (SPN 968)

00: Off

01: On

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-35

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

CI – Component Identi

cation

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

On Request

37 bytes

254

235

65,259 (0x00FEEB)

Bytes: 1-5 Make (SPN 586) – ASCII

Byte: 6 * - Delimiter

Bytes 7–14: Engine Model Number (SPN 587) – ASCII

Byte: 15 * - Delimiter

Byte: 16–25 Engine Serial Number (SPN 588) – ASCII

Byte: 26 * - Delimiter

Byte: 27–36 Unit Number (Power Unit) (SPN 233) - ASCII

Byte: 37 * - Delimiter

Note:

Example:

DDEC VI also supports an alternate format of the component identi fi cation data to satisfy an AGS2 transmission.

Series 60 – DTDSC*606HG6E*00R01234567**

MBE900 – MRCBN*926N07*123456**

MBE4000 – MRCBN*460N07*123456**

CM1 – Cab Message1

Transmission

Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

1 sec

8 bytes

224

PDU Speci fi c: 218

Default Priority: 6

PGN:

Byte: 1

Bytes: 2 – 3

Byte: 4

57, 344(0x00E00016)

Requested Percent Fan Speed (SPN 986)

Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0 offset

Cab Interior Temperature Command – N/A

Bits: 2–1 Auxiliary Heater Coolant Pump Request – N/A

Bits: 4–3 Battery Main Switch Hold Request – N/A

Bits: 6–5 Operator Seat Direction Switch – N/A

Bits: 8–7 Seat Belt Switch – N/A

Byte: 5

6-36

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Bits: 8–7 Vehicle Speed Governor Enable Switch — N/A

Bits: 6–5 Vehicle Limiting Speed Governor Increment Switch – N/A

Bits: 4–3 Vehicle Limiting Speed Governor Decrement Switch – N/A

Bits: 2–1 Not De fi ned

Bits: 4–3 Particulate Trap Regeneration Force Switch (SPN 3696)

00: Not Active

01: Active

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 2–1 Particulate Trap Regeneration Inhibit Switch (SPN 3695)

00: Not Active

01: Active

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 8–7 Request Cab Zone Heating— N/A

Bits: 6–5 Request Engine Zone Heating – N/A

Bits: 4–1 Auxiliary Heater Mode Request– N/A

Selected Maximum Vehicle Speed Limit – N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-37

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

DM1 – Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Transmission /

Reception Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Whenever a DTC becomes an active fault and at a normal update rate of one second or longer, and then becomes inactive, a DM1 message will be transmitted to re fl ect this state change. If a different DTC changes state within one second update period, a new DM1 message is transmitted to re fl ect this new DTC.

Variable

254

202

65226 (0x00FECA)

Bits: 8–7 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Status (SPN 1213)

00: Lamp Off

01: Lamp On

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 6–5 Red Stop Lamp Status (SPN 623)

00: Lamp Off

01: Lamp On

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 4–3 Amber Warning Lamp Status (SPN 624)

00: Lamp Off

01: Lamp On

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 2–1 Protect Lamp Status (SPN 987) – N/A

Bits: 8–1 Reserved for SAE assignment Lamp Status

Bits: 8–1 SPN, 8 least signi fi cant bits of SPN (SPN 1214)

(most signi fi cant at bit 8)

Bits: 8–1 SPN, second byte of SPN

(most signi fi cant at bit 8)

Bits: 8–6 SPN, 3 most signi fi cant bits

(most signi fi cant at bit 8)

Bits: 5–1 FMI (SPN 1215)

(most signi fi cant at bit 5)

Bit: 8

Bits: 7–1

SPN Conversion Method (SPN 1706)

Occurrence Count (SPN 1216)

6-38

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Bits: 8–1 Not De fi ned

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-39

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

DM2 – Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Transmission Rate: On Request

Data Length: Variable

Data Page:

PDU Format:

254

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

203

65227 (0x00FECB)

Bits: 8–7 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Status (SPN 1213)

00: Lamp Off

01: Lamp On

10: Error

11: Not Available

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Bits: 6–5 Red Stop Lamp Status (SPN 623)

00: Lamp Off

01: Lamp On

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 4–3 Amber Warning Lamp Status (SPN 624)

00: Lamp Off

01: Lamp On

10: Error

11: Not Available

Bits: 2–1 Protect Lamp Status (SPN 987) – N/A

Bits: 8–1 Reserved for SAE Assignment Lamp Status

Bits: 8–1 SPN, 8 least signi fi cant bits of SPN (most signi fi cant at bit

8) (SPN 1214)

Bits: 8–1 SPN, second byte of SPN (most signi fi cant at bit 8) (SPN

1214)

Bits: 8–6 SPN, 3 most signi fi cant bits (most signi fi cant at bit 8) (SPN

1214)

Bits: 5–1 FMI (most signi fi cant at bit 5) (SPN 1215)

Bit: 8 SPN conversion Method (SPN 1706)

Bits: 7–1 Occurrence count (SPN 1216)

Bits: 8–1 Not De fi ned

6-40

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

DM3 - Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset of Previously Active DTCs

Reception Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

On Request using PGN 59904

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

254

204

65,228 (0x00FECC)

Note: All of the non-permanent diagnostic information pertaining to previously active (inactive) visible diagnostic trouble codes will be erased when this PG is requested. The diagnostic data associated with active trouble codes will not be affected. Upon reception of this PG request,

DDEC will respond with a Positive Acknowledgement (ACK). This message clears both CPC and MCM previously active DTCs.

DM11 — Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset for Active DTCs

Reception Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

On Request Using PGN 59904

254

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

211

PGN: 65,235 (0x00FED3)

Note: All of the non-permanent diagnostic information pertaining to active visible diagnostic trouble codes will be erased when this PG is requested. The diagnostic data associated with previously active (inactive) trouble codes will not be affected. Upon reception of this PG request, DDEC will respond with a Positive Acknowledgement (ACK). This message clears both CPC and MCM previously active DTCs.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-41

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

DM13 — Stop Start Broadcast

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

As Received

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

223

Destination Address

57,008 (0x00DF00)

SAE Primary Links

Bits: 8, 7 Current Data Link (SPN 1230)

Byte: 2

Bits: 6, 5

00: Stop Broadcast

01: Start Broadcast

11: Don't Care

J1587 * (SPN 608)

00: Stop Broadcast

01: Start Broadcast

11: Don't Care

J1922 (SPN 622) – N/A Bits: 4, 3

Bits: 2, 1 J1939 Network #1, Primary Vehicle Network (SPN 639)

00: Stop Broadcast

01: Start Broadcast

11: Don't Care

Other Networks #1

Bits: 8, 7 J1939 Network #2 - N/A

Bits: 6, 5

Bits: 4, 3

ISO 9141 - N/A

J1850 - N/A

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5–6

Byte: 7–8

Bits: 2, 1 Other, Manufacture Speci fi ed Port - N/A

Other Networks #2

Bits: 8, 7

Bits: 6–1

J1939 Network #3 - N/A

Not De fi ned

Control Flags

Bits: 8–5 Hold Signal (SPN 1236)

0000: All Devices

0001: Devices whose broadcast state has been modi fi ed

Bits: 4–1 Suspended Signal – N/A

Suspended Duration – N/A

SAE Reserved

0010–1110: Not De fi ned

1111: N/A

6-42

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

EBC1 – Electronic Brake Controller #1

Transmission/Reception Rate: 100 ms

Data Length:

Data Page:

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1 Status EBC1

Bits: 1-2

Bits: 3-4

Bits: 5-6

240

61,441 (0x00F001)

ASR Brake Control Active – N/A

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) Active (SPN 563)

00: ABS Passive but installed

01: ABS Active

10: Reserved

11: Not Available

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Bits: 7-8 EBS Brake Switch – N/A

Brake Pedal Position – N/A

Status EBC2

Bits: 1-2 ABS Off-Road Switch – N/A

Bits: 3-4

Bits: 5-6

ASR Off-Road Switch – N/A

ASR “Hill Holder” Switch – N/A

Bits: 7-8 Traction Control Override Switch – N/A

Measured Aux.1

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Bits: 1-2

Bits: 3-4

Bits: 5-6

Bits: 7-8

Accelerator Interlock Switch – N/A

Engine Derate Switch – N/A

Auxiliary Engine Shutdown Switch – N/A

Remote Accelerator Enable Switch (SPN 969)

00: Off

01: On

Engine Retarder Selection (SPN 973)

Resolution: 0.4% / Bit, 0% Offset

EBC Lamp Status – N/A

Source Address of Controlling Device for Brake Control – N/A

Not De fi ned

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-43

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

EBC2 – Wheel Speed Information

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Bytes : 1, 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

100 ms

8 bytes

254

191

65,215

Front Axle Speed (SPN 904)

Resolution: 1/256 km/h per bit, 0 offset

Relative Speed, Front Axle, Left Wheel – N/A

Relative Speed, Front Axle, Right Wheel – N/A

Relative Speed, Front Axle #1, Left Wheel – N/A

Relative Speed, Front Axle #1, Right Wheel – N/A

Relative Speed, Front Axle #2, Left Wheel – N/A

Relative Speed, Front Axle #2, Right Wheel – N/A

6-44

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

EC – Engine Con

guration

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Bytes: 1,2

5 sec.

34 bytes

254

227

65,251 (0x00FEE3)

Engine Speed At Idle, Point 1 (SPN 188)

Byte: 3

Bytes: 4, 5

Byte: 6

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque At Idle, Point 1 (SPN 539)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Engine Speed At Point 2 (SPN 528)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque At Point 2 (SPN 540)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Engine Speed At Point 3 (SPN 529) Bytes: 7,8

Byte: 9

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque At Point 3 (SPN 541)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Bytes: 10, 11 Engine Speed At Point 4 (SPN 530)

Byte: 12

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque At Point 4 (SPN 542)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Bytes: 13, 14 Engine Speed At Point 5 (SPN 531)

Byte: 15

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque At Point 5 (SPN 543)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Bytes: 16, 17 Engine Speed At High Idle, Point 6 (SPN 532)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Bytes: 18, 19 Engine Gain (KP) Of Endspeed Governor - N/A

Bytes: 20, 21 Reference Engine Torque (SPN 544)

Resolution: 1 Nm / Bit, 0 Nm offset

Byte: 22, 23 Maximum Momentary Engine Override Speed, Point 7 (SPN 533)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Byte: 24

Byte: 25

Maximum Momentary Engine Override Time Limit (SPN 534)

Resolution: 0.1 s / Bit, 0 s offset

Requested Speed Control Range Lower Limit - 300 RPM – N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-45

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Byte: 26

Byte: 27

Byte: 28

Byte 29,30

Byte 31,32

Byte 33,34

Requested Speed Control Range Upper Limit – N/A

Requested Torque Control Range Lower Limit – N/A

Requested Torque Control Range Upper Limit – N/A

Extended Range Requested Speed Control Range Upper Limit

— N/A

Engine Moment of Inertia (SPN 1794)

Resolution: 0.004 kgm 2 /Bit, 0 kgm 2 /Bit Offset

Default Engine Torque Limit — N/A

6-46

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

EEC1 – Electronic Engine Controller #1

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1 Status_EEC1

Bits: 8-5

Bits: 4-1

10 ms

8 bytes

240

61,444 (0x00F004)

Not De fi ned

Engine / Retarder Torque Mode (SPN 899)

0000: Low Idle Governor

0001: Accelerator Pedal

0010: Cruise Control

0011: PTO Governor

0100: Road Speed Governor

0101: ASR Control

0110: Transmission Control

0111: ABS Control

1000: Torque Limiting

1001: High Speed Governor

1010: Braking System

1011: Remote Accelerator - N/A

1100: Not De fi ned

Byte: 2

1101: Not De fi ned

1110: Other

1111: Not Available

Drivers Demand Engine - Pct Torque (SPN 512)

Byte: 3

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Actual Engine - Percent Torque (SPN 513)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

Bytes: 4,5 Engine Speed (SPN 190)

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Source address of controlling device for engine control (SPN 1483)

Bits: 8–5

Bits: 1–4

Not De fi ned

Engine Starter Mode (SPN 1675)

0000: Start Not Requested

0001: Starter Active, Gear Not Engaged

0010: Starter Active, Gear Engaged

0011: Start Finished; Starter Not Active After Having Been Actively

Engaged

0100: Starter Inhibited Due To Engine Already Running

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-47

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Byte: 8

0101: Starter Inhibited Due To Engine Not Ready For Start

(preheating)

0110: Starter Inhibited Due To Driveline Engaged Or Other

Transmission Inhibit

0111: Starter Inhibited Due To Active Immobilizer

1000: Starter Inhibited Due To Starter Over-Temp

1001-1011: Reserved

1100: Starter Inhibited - Reason Unknown

1101: Error

1110: Error

1111: Not Available

Engine Demand–Percent Torque (SPN 2432)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

6-48

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

EEC2 – Electronic Engine Controller #2

Transmission/Reception Rate : 50 ms

Data Length:

Data Page:

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1 Status_EEC2

Bits: 8-7

240

61,443 (0x00F003)

Accelerator Pedal 2 Low Idle Switch — N/A

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Bits: 6-5 Road Speed Limit Status (SPN 1437)

Bits: 4-3

Bits: 2,1

00: Active

01: Not Active

AP Kickdown Switch (SPN 559)

00: Kickdown Passive

01: Kickdown Active

11: Not Con fi gured

AP Low Idle Switch (SPN 558)

00: Not In Low Idle Condition

01: In Low Idle Condition

10: Error Detected

11: Not Con fi gured

Accelerator Pedal Position (TPS) (SPN 91)

Resolution: 0.4% / Bit, 0% offset

Percent Load At Current Speed (SPN 92)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, 0% offset

Remote Accelerator (SPN 974)

Resolution: 0.4% / Bit, 0% offset

Accelerator Pedal Position 2 (SPN 29) — N/A

Vehicle Acceleration Rate Limit Status

Bits: 8–3 Not De fi ned

Bits: 2–1 Vehicle Acceleration Limit Status (SPN 2979)

00: Limit Not Active

11: Not De fi ned

Actual Maximum Available Engine percent Torque – N/A

Not De fi ned

01: Limit Active

10: Reserved

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-49

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

EEC3 – Electronic Engine Controller #3

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

250 ms

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

254

223

65,247 (0x00FEDF)

Nominal Friction - Percent Torque (SPN 514)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, -125% Offset

Bytes: 2,3 Engine's Desired Operating Speed (SPN 515)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/Bit, 0 rpm Offset

Byte 4: Engine's Desired Operating Speed Asymmetry Adjustment (SPN 519)

Ratio: 0 to 250

Byte 5:

Byte: 6–7

Byte: 8

Engine Controlled Cooling Fan Losses – Percent Torque (SPN 2978)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, -125% Offset

Exhaust Gas Mass (SPN 3236) — N/A

After-Treatment

Bits: 7-8

Bits: 5-6

Bits: 3-4

Bits: 1-2

After-Treatment Intake Dew Point Message – N/A

After-Treatment Exhaust Dew Point Message – N/A

After-Treatment Intake Dew Point Message – N/A

After-Treatment Exhaust Dew Point Message – N/A

EEC4 – Electronic Engine Controller #4

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

On Request

8 bytes

254

190

65,214 (0x00FEBE)

Bytes: 1,2 Rated Engine Power (SPN 166)

Resolution:

0.5 kW / Bit, 0 kW offset (0.67 hp / Bit, 0 hp offset)

Bytes: 3,4 Rated Engine Speed (SPN 189)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Bytes: 5-8 Not De fi ned

6-50

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

EFL/P1 – Engine Fluid Level/Pressure1

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

500 ms

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

254

239

65,263 (0x00FEEF)

Fuel Delivery Pressure (SPN 94)

Resolution: 4 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa Offset

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Extended Crankcase Blowby Pressure – N/A

Engine Oil Level (SPN 98)

Resolution: Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0% Offset

Engine Oil Pressure (SPN 100)

Resolution: 4 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa Offset

Byte: 5,6 Crankcase Pressure (SPN 101)

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Resolution: 1/128 kPa / Bit, –250 kPa Offset

Coolant Pressure (SPN 109 )

Resolution: 2 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa Offset

Coolant Level – (SPN 111)

Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0% Offset

EFL/P2 – Engine Fluid Level/Pressure #2

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

500 ms

8 bytes

254

219

65,243 (0x00FEDB)

Bytes: 1,2 Injection Control Pressure - N/A

Bytes: 3,4 Injector Metering Rail Pressure (SPN 157)

Resolution: 1/256 MPa / Bit, 0 MPa offset

Bytes: 5,6 Injector Timing Rail 1 Pressure–N/A

Bytes: 7,8 Injector Metering Rail 2 Pressure–N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-51

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

ERC1 - Electronic Retarder Controller #1

Transmission/Reception Rate: 100 ms

Data Length:

Data Page:

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1 Status_ERC1

Bits: 8,7

240

61,440 (0x00F000)

Bits: 6,5

Retarder Enable - Shift Assist Switch (SPN 572)

00: Retarder Brake Assist Disabled

01: Retarder Brake Assist Enabled

10: Error

11: Not Available

Retarder Enable - Brake Assist Switch (SPN 571)

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Bits: 4-1

00: Retarder Brake Assist Disabled

01: Retarder Brake Assist Enabled

10: Error

11: Not Available

Engine/Retarder Torque Mode (SPN 900)

0000: No Request (default)

0001: Operator Selection

0011: Cruise Control

0011: PTO Governor

0100: Road Seed Governor – N/A

0101: ASR Control

0110: Transmission Control

0111: ABS Control

1000: Torque Limiting – N/A

1001: High Speed Governor – N/A

1010: Braking System

1011: Remote Accelerator – N/A

1100: Not De fi ned

1101: Not De fi ned

1110: Other

1111: Not De fi ned

Actual Retarder - Percent Torque (SPN 520)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% Offset

Intended Retarder Percent Torque - N/A

Byte: 5

Bits: 8–5

Bits: 3,4

Bits: 1,2

Not De fi ned

Retarder Requesting Brake Light – N/A

Engine Coolant Load Increase – N/A

Source address of controlling device for retarder control (SPN 1480)

6-52

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Resolution:

1 Source Address/Bit, 0 Offset

Drivers Demand Retarder–Percent Torque–N/A

Retarder Selection, non-engine (SPN 1716)

Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0 Offset

Actual Maximum Available Retarder–Percent Torque–N/A

ET1 – Engine Temperature #1

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

1 sec

8 bytes

254

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

238

65,262 (0x00FEEE)

Engine Coolant Temperature (SPN 110)

Byte: 2

Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C offset

Fuel Temperature (SPN 174)

Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C offset

Bytes: 3,4 Engine Oil Temperature (SPN 175)

Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, -273°C offset

Bytes: 5,6 Turbo Oil Temperature -N/A

Byte: 7 Engine Intercooler Temperature (SPN 52)

Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C offset

Byte 8: Engine Intercooler Thermostat Opening–N/A

ET2 – Engine Temperature #2

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

1 sec

8 bytes

254

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

164

PGN: 65,188 (00FEA416)

Bytes: 1–2 Engine Oil Temperature 2 – N/A

Bytes: 3–4 Engine ECU Temperature (SPN 1136)

Resolution: 0.01325°C/Bit, –273°C offset

Bytes: 5–6 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Differential Pressure (SPN 411)

Resolution: 1/128 kPa/Bit, –250 kPa offset

Bytes: 7–8 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature (SPN 412)

Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, -273°C offset

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-53

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

ETC1 – Electronic Transmission Controller #1

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1

Byte: 2,3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Bytes: 6,7

Byte: 8

10 ms

8 bytes

240

61,442 (0x00F002)

Status_ETC1

Bits: 8,7

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

Not De fi ned

Shift in Progress (SPN 574)

00: Shift is not in process

01: Shift in process

11: Not Available

Torque Converter Lockup Engaged (SPN 573)

00: Torque Converter Lockup Disengaged

Bits: 2,1

01: Torque Converter Lockup Engaged

11: Not Available

Driveline Engaged (SPN 560)

00: Driveline Disengaged

01: Driveline Engaged

11: Not Available

Output Shaft Speed (SPN 191)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Clutch Slip (SPN 522)

Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0% Offset

Command_ETC1

Bits: 8-5 Not De fi ned

Bits: 4-3 Progressive Shift Disabled (SPN 607)

00: Progressive Shift is Not Disabled

Bits: 2,1

01: Progressive Shift Is Disabled

11: Take No Action

Momentary Engine Overspeed Enable (SPN 606)

00: Momentary Engine Overspeed Is Disabled

01: Momentary Engine Overspeed Is Enabled

11: Not Available

Input Shaft Speed (SPN 161)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/Bit, 0 Offset

Source Address of Controlling Device for Transmission

Control–N/A

6-54

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

ETC2 – Electronic Transmission Controller #2

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1

Byte: 2,3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5-6

Byte: 7-8

100 ms

8 bytes

240

61,445 (0x00F005)

Transmission Selected Gear (SPN 524)

Resolution: 1 Gear Value / Bit, –125 Offset

Transmission Actual Gear Ratio – N/A

Transmission Current Gear (SPN 523)

Resolution: 1 Gear Value/Bit, – 125 Offset

Transmission Requested Range – N/A

Transmission Current Range – N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-55

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

ETC7 – Electronic Transmission Controller 7

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Bytes: 5,6

100 ms

254

65,098

Transmission Request State

Bits: 8,7

Transmission Requested Range Display Flash State (SPN 1849)

– N/A

Bits: 6,5

Transmission Requested Range Display Blank State (SPN 1850)

– N/A

Transmission Switches

Bits: 7,8

Bits: 5,6

Transmission Shift Inhibit Indicator (SPN 1851) – N/A

Transmission Engine Crank Enable (SPN 2900)

00: Cranking disabled; engine cranking is prohibited by the transmission type

01: Cranking enabled; engine cranking is allowed by transmission

Bits: 3,4

Bits: 1,2

10: Error

11: Not Available

Active Shift Console Indicator (SPN 2945) – N/A

Transmission ready for Brake Release (SPN 3086) – N/A

Transmission Mode Indicators

Bits: 7,8 Bits: 7,8 Transmission Mode 1 Indicator (SPN 2536) – N/A

Bits: 5,6

Bits: 3,4

Bits: 1,2 Transmission Mode 4 Indicator (SPN 2539) – N/A

Transmission Requested Gear Feedback (SPN 3289) – N/A

Not De fi ned

Bits: 5,6 Transmission Mode 2 Indicator (SPN 2537) – N/A

Transmission Mode 3 Indicator (SPN 2538) – N/A

6-56

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

FD – Fan Drive

Transmission Rate: 1 sec

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Bytes: 3–4

Bytes: 5–8

8 bytes

254

189

65, 213 (Ox00FEBD)

Estimated Percent Fan Torque (SPN 975)

Resolution: 0.4%/bit, 0% offset

Fan Drive State (SPN 977)

0000: Fan Off

0001: Engine System General

0010: Excessive Engine Air Temperature

0011: Excessive Engine Oil Temperature

0100: Excessive Engine Coolant Temperature

0101: Excessive Transmission Oil Temperature

0110: Excessive Hydraulic Oil Temperature

0111: Default Operation

1000: Not De fi ned

1001: Manual Control

1010: Transmission Retarder

1011: A/C System

1100: Timer

1101: Engine Brake

1110: Other

1111: Not Available

Fan Speed (SPN 1639)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 rpm offset

Not De fi ned

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-57

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Hours – Engine Hours, Revolutions

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Bytes: 1–4

Bytes: 5–8

On Request

8 Bytes

254

229

65,253 (0x00FEE5)

Total Engine Hours (SPN 247)

Resolution: 0.05 hr/bit, 0 hr/bit offset

Total Engine Revolutions (SPN 249)

Resolution: 1000 rev/bit, 0 rev/bit offset

IC1 – Inlet/Exhaust Conditions #1

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 8

500 ms

8 Bytes

254

246

65,270 (0x00FEF6)

Particulate Trap Inlet Pressure — N/A

Boost Pressure (SPN 102)

Resolution: 2 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa / Bit Offset

Intake Manifold Temperature (SPN 105)

Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C / Bit Offset

Air Inlet Pressure (SPN 106)

Resolution: 2 kPa / Bit, 0kPa / Bit Offset

Air Filter Differential Pressure (SPN 107)

Resolution: 0.05 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa Offset

Exhaust Gas Temperature (SPN 173)

Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, –273°C Offset

Coolant Filter Differential Pressure — N/A

6-58

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

IO — Idle Operation

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

On Request

8 bytes

254

220

65,244 (0x00FEDC)

Bytes: 1-4 Total Idle Fuel Used (SPN 236)

Resolution: 0.5 L / Bit, 0 L offset

Bytes: 5-8 Total Idle Hours (SPN 235)

Resolution: 0.05 hr / Bit, 0 hr offset

LFC – Fuel Consumption (Liquid)

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Bytes: 1–4

Bytes: 5–8

On Request

8 Bytes

254

233

65,257 (0x00FEE9)

Trip Fuel (SPN 182)

Resolution: 0.05 L/bit, 0 L/bit offset

Total Fuel Used (SPN 250)

Resolution: 0.05 L/bit, 0 L/bit offset

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-59

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

LFE – Fuel Economy (Liquid)

Transmission Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Bytes: 1,2

Bytes: 3,4

Bytes: 5–6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

100 ms

8 Bytes

254

242

65,266 (0x00FEF2)

Fuel Rate (SPN 183)

Resolution: 0.05 L/h/bit, 0 km/L offset

Instantaneous Fuel Economy (SPN 184)

Resolution: 1/512 km/ l/bit, o km/ l offset

Average Fuel Economy (SPN 185)

Resolution: 1/512 km/ l/bit, o km/ l offset

Throttle Position (SPN 51)

Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0% offset

Not De fi ned

6-60

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PTC1 – Particulate Trap Control 1

Transmission

Reception Rate:

1 second or on change

Data Length: 8 bytes

Extended Data Page: 0

Data Page: 0

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

253

124

64, 892 (OxFD7C)

Bits: 8–4

Bits: 3–1

Reserved

Particulate Trap Lamp Command (SPN 3697)

000: Off

001: On – solid

010: Reserved for SAE assignment

011: Reserved for SAE assignment

100: On – fast blink (1 HZ)

101: Reserved for SAE assignment

110: Reserved for SAE assignment

111: Not Available

Byte: 2

Bit: 8

Bits: 7–5

Bits: 4–3

Bits: 2–1

Reserved

Particulate Trap Status (SPN 3701) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Status (SPN 3700)

00: Not Active

01: Active

10: Regeneration needed – automatically initiated active regeneration imminent

11: Not Available

Particulate Trap Passive Regeneration Status (SPN 3699)

— N/A

Byte: 3

Bits: 8–7 Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Service Brake Active (SPN 3705) – N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-61

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Byte 4

Byte: 5

Bits: 6–5

Bits: 4–3

Bits: 2–1

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Clutch (SPN 3704)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Inhibit Switch (SPN 3703)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Status

(SPN 3702)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Bits: 8–7

Bits: 6–5

Bits: 4–3

Bits: 2–1

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Vehicle Speed Above Allowed Speed (SPN 3709)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Out of Neutral (SPN 3708) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Accelerator Pedal Off Idle (SPN 3707)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

PTO Active (SPN 3706)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Bits: 8–7 Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

System Timeout (SPN 3713) – N/A

6-62

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Bits: 6–5

Bits: 4–3

Bits: 2–1

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

System Fault Active (SPN 3712) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Low Exhaust Gas Temperature (SPN 3711) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Parking Brake Not Set (SPN 3710)

00: Not Inhibited

01: Inhibited

10: Reserved for SAE assignment

11: Not Available

Bits: 8–7

Bits: 6–5

Bits: 4–3

Bits: 2–1

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Vehicle Speed Below Allowed Speed (SPN 3717) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Engine Not Warmed Up (SPN 3716) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Permanent System Lockout (SPN 3715) – N/A

Particulate Trap Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to

Temporary System Lockout (SPN 3714) – N/A

Bits: 8–6

Bits: 5–3

Bits: 2–1

Not De fi ned

Reserved

Exhaust System High Temperature Lamp Command (SPN

3698)

000: Off

001: On – solid

010: Reserved for SAE assignment

011: Reserved for SAE assignment

100: On – fast blink (1 HZ)

101: Reserved for SAE assignment

110: Reserved for SAE assignment

111: Not Available

Particulate Trap Automatic Active Regeneration Initiation

Con fi guration (SPN 3718) — N/A

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-63

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

PTO – Power Takeoff Information

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

Byte: 2,3

Byte: 4,5

Byte: 6

100 ms

8 bytes

254

240

65,264 (0x00FEF0)

Power Takeoff Oil Temperature - N/A

Power Takeoff Speed - N/A

Power Takeoff Set Speed (SPN 187)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Measured_PTO_1

Bits: 8,7 Not De fi ned

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

Remote PTO Variable Speed Control Switch - N/A

Remote PTO Preprogrammed Speed Control Switch

(SPN 979)

Byte: 7

Bits: 2,1

00: Switch Off

01: Switch On

11: Not Con fi gured

PTO Enable Switch (SPN 980)

00: Switch Off

01: Switch On

Measured_PTO_2

11: Not Con fi gured

Bits: 8,7 PTO Accelerate Switch (SPN 981)

00: Switch Off

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

01: Switch On

11: Not Con fi gured

PTO Resume Switch (SPN 982)

00: Switch Off

01: Switch On

11: Not Con fi gured

PTO Coast/Decelerate Switch (SPN 983)

00: Switch Off

Bits: 2,1

01: Switch On

11: Not Con fi gured

PTO Set Switch (SPN 984)

00: Switch Off

01: Switch On

11: Not Con fi gured

Byte: 8 Not De fi ned

6-64

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

RC – Retarder Con

guration

Transmission Rate: 5 sec or upon receipt of a destination speci fi c request

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU Format:

PDU Speci fi c:

Default Priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

19 bytes

254

225

65, 249 (OxOOFEE1)

Type and Location

Bits: 8–5 Retarder Location (SPN 902)

0000: Engine Compression Release Brake

0001: Engine Exhaust Brake

0010: Transmission Input

0011: Transmission Output

0100: Driveline

0101: Trailer

0110: Not De fi ned

0111: Not De fi ned

1000: Not De fi ned

1001: Not De fi ned

1010: Not De fi ned

1011: Not De fi ned

1100: Not De fi ned

1101: Not De fi ned

1110: Other

1111: Not Available

Bits: 4–1 Retarder Type (SPN 901)

0000: Electric/Magnetic

0001: Hydraulic

0011: Cooled Friction

0011: Compression Release (Engine Retarder)

0100: Exhaust

0101: Not De fi ned

0110: Not De fi ned

0111: Not De fi ned

1000: Not De fi ned

1001: Not De fi ned

1010: Not De fi ned

1011: Not De fi ned

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-65

Bytes: 3–4

Byte: 5

Bytes: 6,7

Byte: 8

Bytes: 9,10

Byte: 11

Bytes: 12, 13

Byte: 14

Bytes: 15,16

Bytes: 17,18

Byte: 19

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Byte: 2

1100: Not De fi ned

1101: Not De fi ned

1110: Other

1111: Not Available

Retarder Control Method (SPN 557)

0 – DVB

1 – Konstandrossel

2 – Low/High Compression

3 – Low/Med/High Compression

255 — Not Con fi gured

Retarder Speed at Idle, Point 1 (SPN 546)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque at Idle, Point 1 (SPN 551)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% offset

Maximum Retarder Speed, Point 2 (SPN 548)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/Bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque at Maximum Speed, Point 2 (SPN 552)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% offset

Retarder Speed, Point 3 (SPN 549)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque, Point 3 (SPN 553)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% offset

Retarder Speed, Point 4 (SPN 550)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 rpm offset

Percent Torque, Point 4 (SPN 554)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% offset

Retarder Speed at Peak Torque, Point 5 (SPN 547)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 rpm offset

Reference Retarder Torque (SPN 556)

Resolution: 1 Nm/Bit, 0 Nm offset

Percent Torque at Peak Torque, Point 5 (SPN 555)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% offset

6-66

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Requests

Reception Rate:

Data Length:

Data Page:

As Needed

3 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Bytes : 1 — 3 Requested PGN

234

Destination Address

59,904 (0x00EA00)

NOTE:

It is recommended that requests occur no more than 2 or 3 times per second.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-67

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

Shutdown — Idle Shutdown

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

1 sec

8 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

254

228

65,252 (0x00FEE4)

Idle Shutdown_1

Bits: 8,7 Idle Shutdown Timer State (SPN 590)

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

Bits: 2,1

00: Inactive

01: Active

Idle Shutdown Timer Override (SPN 592)

00: Inactive

01: Active

Driver Alert Mode (SPN 594)

00: Inactive

01: Active

Engine Has Shutdown by Idle Shutdown (SPN

593)

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

00: Engine has not shutdown by idle shutdown

01: Engine has shutdown by idle shutdown

Idle Shutdown_2

Bits: 8,7 Idle Shutdown Timer Function (SPN 591)

Bits: 6-1

Bits: 8,7

Bits: 6,5

Bits: 4,3

Bits: 2,1

00: Disabled in Calibration

01: Enabled in Calibration

Not De fi ned

Refrigerant High Pressure Switch- N/A

Refrigerant Low Pressure Switch- N/A

A/C High Pressure Fan Switch (SPN 985)

00: Pressure Normal

01: Pressure High Fan May be Engaged

Lamp_commands

Bits: 2, 1 Wait to Start Lamp (SPN 1081)

00: Inactive

01: Active

Engine Shutdown_1

Bits: 8,7 Engine Protection System Timer State (SPN 1107)

00: Timer not Active

Bits: 6,5

01: Timer Active

Engine Protection System Timer Override (SPN

1108)

6-68

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Bits: 4,3

Bits: 2,1

00: Override Off

01: Override On

Engine Shutdown Approaching (SPN 1109)

00: Not Approaching

01: Approaching

Engine Has Shutdown By Engine Protection

System (SPN 1110)

00: Not Shutdown

01: Has Shutdown

Byte: 6 Engine Shutdown_2

Bits: 8,7

Engine Protection System Con fi guration (SPN

1111)

Bits: 6-1

Bytes: 7-8 Not De fi ned

00: Not Enabled In Calibration

01: Enabled In Calibration

Not De fi ned

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-69

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

SOFT – Software Identi

cation

Transmission Rate : On Request

Data Length:

Data Page:

60 bytes

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

254

218

65,242 (0x00FEDA)

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Number of Software Identi fi cation Fields - 15 (SPN 965)

1st digit of Major Version Level - ASCII

2nd digit of Major Version Level - ASCII

3rd digit of Major Version Level - ASCII

* - Delimiter

1st digit of Minor Version Level - ASCII

2nd digit of Minor Version Level - ASCII

3rd digit of Minor Version Level - ASCII

Byte: 9

Byte: 10

Byte: 11

Byte: 12

Byte: 13

Byte: 14

Byte: 15

Byte: 16

Byte: 17

Byte: 18

* - Delimiter

1st Digit of Edit Build Version - ASCII

2nd Digit of Edit Build Version - ASCII

3rd Digit of Edit Build Version - ASCII

* - Delimiter

1st Digit of Con

2nd Digit of Con

3rd Digit of Con fi fi fi g ID - ASCII g ID - ASCII g ID - ASCII

Byte: 19

Byte: 20

Byte: 21

Byte: 22

Byte: 23

Byte: 24

Byte: 25

Byte: 26

Byte: 27

Byte: 28

Byte: 29

* - Delimiter

Software Release Type - ASCII

X - Experimental

T - Pre-production

R - Production

* - Delimiter

CPC Hardware Major Version - ASCII

* - Delimiter

Edit Letter - ASCII

* - Delimiter

1st Digit of Diagnostic Version - ASCII

2nd Digit of Diagnostic Version - ASCII

3rd Digit of Diagnostic Version - ASCII

* - Delimiter

1st Digit of Diagnostic Variant - ASCII

2nd Digit of Diagnostic Variant - ASCII

Byte: 30

Byte: 31

3rd Digit of Diagnostic Variant - ASCII

* - Delimiter

Bytes: 32,33 Software Year – ASCII

6-70

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Byte: 34 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 35, 36 Software Month – ASCII

Byte: 37 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 38, 39 Software Day - ASCII

Byte: 40 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 41,42 Software Hour – ASCII

Byte: 43 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 44,45 Software Minute – ASCII

Byte: 46 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 47,48 ECU Serial Number – Production Year – ASCII

Byte: 49 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 50–53 Production Day

Byte: 54 * - Delimiter

Bytes: 55–59 Production Unit

Byte: 60 * - Delimiter

TC — Turbocharger

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

1 sec

8 bytes

254

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

221

65, 245 (0x00FEDD)

Turbo Oil Pressure - N/A

Bytes: 2,3 Turbocharger 1 Speed (SPN 103)

Resolution: 4 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Byte: 4 Bits: 8–7

Bits: 6–1

Turbo Oil Level Switch–N/A

Not De fi ned

Bytes: 5-8 Not De fi ned

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-71

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

TCFG2 — Transmission Con

guration

Transmission Reception

Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

On request or sender may transmit every 5 seconds until acknowledged by reception of the engine con fi guration message PGN 65251 SPN 1846

Variable

254

65, 099 (0xFE4B)

Bytes: 1–2 Transmission Torque Limit (SPN 1845)

Resolution: 1 Nm/Bit, 0 offset

Bytes: 3–8 Not De fi ned

6-72

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

TCO1 — Tachograph

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1

Byte: 2

Byte: 3

Byte: 4

Bytes: 5,6

Bytes: 7,8

50 ms

254

108

65,132 (0x00FE6C)

Driver Status

Bits: 7,8

Bits: 4–6

Bits: 1–3

Driver 1

Bits: 7,8

Bits: 4–6

Bits: 1–3

Drive Recognize (SPN 1611) – N/A

Driver 2 Working State (SPN 1613) – N/A

Driver 1 Working State (SPN 1612) – N/A

Overspeed (SPN 1614) – N/A

Driver card, Driver 1 (SPN 1615) – N/A

Driver 1 Time Related States (SPN 1617) – N/A

Driver 2

Bits: 7,8

Bits: 5,6

Bits: 1–4

Not De fi ned

Driver card, driver 2 (SPN 1616) – N/A

Driver 2 Time Related States (SPN 1618) – N/A

TCO1 Information

Bits: 7,8 Direction Indicator (SPN 1619) – N/A

Bits: 5,6

Bits: 3,4

Tachograph Performance (SPN 1620) – N/A

Handling Information (SPN 1621) – N/A

Bits: 1,2 System Event (SPN 1622) – N/A

Tachograph Output Shaft Speed (SPN 1623)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 offset

Tachograph Vehicle Speed (SPN 1624)

Resolution: 1/256 km/h per bit, 0 offset

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-73

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

TD — Time/Date

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte: 1

254

230

65,254 (0x00FEE6)

Seconds (SPN 959)

Resolution: 0.25 sec / Bit, 0 sec offset

Byte: 2

On Request

8 bytes

Byte: 3

Minutes (SPN 960)

Resolution: 1 min / Bit, 0 min offset

Hours (SPN 961)

Resolution: 1 hour / Bit, 0 h offset

Byte: 4

Byte: 5

Byte: 6

Byte: 7

Byte: 8

Note:

Month (SPN 963)

Resolution: 1 month / Bit, 0 month offset

Day (see Note) (SPN 962)

Resolution: 0.25 day / Bit, 0 day offset

Year (SPN 964)

Resolution: 1 year / Bit, 1985 year offset

Local Minute Offset – N/A

Local Hour Offset – N/A

The Day fi eld represents days elapsed (e.g. 1/1/98 at 12:00 am would be 0 for byte 5 (Day) and 1/1/98 at 1:00 pm would be 2 for byte 5 and 1/15/98 at 1:00 pm would be 62 for byte 5).

TSC1 — Torque Speed Control

Reception Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Byte : 1 Control Bits

Bits: 8,7

Bits: 6,5

10 ms when active to the engine, 50 ms when active to the retarder

8 bytes

Destination Address

0 (0x000000)

Not De fi ned

Override Control Mode Priority (SPN 897)

00: Highest

01: High

10: Medium

11: Low

6-74

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Reception Rate :

Byte: 2,3

Byte: 4

Bits: 4,3

Bits: 2,1

10 ms when active to the engine, 50 ms when active to the retarder

Engine Requested Speed Control Conditions (SPN 696)

00: Transient optimized for driveline disengaged and non-lockup conditions

01: Stability optimized for driveline disengaged and non-lockup conditions

10: Stability optimized for driveline engaged and/or in lockup condition 1 (e.g. vehicle driveline)

11: Stability optimized for driveline engaged and/or in lockup condition 2 (e.g. PTO driveline)

Override Control Modes (SPN 695)

00: Override Disabled

01: Speed Control

10: Torque Control

11: Speed/Torque Limit Control

Requested Speed / Speed Limit (SPN 898)

Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset

Requested Torque / Torque Limit (SPN 518)

Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset

0-125% for engine torque requests

-125-0% for retarder torque requests

Bytes: 5-8

Note:

Not De fi ned

The CPC will honor TSC1 messages from the following source addresses:

□ TSC1 Source Address J1939 — Customer Selectable

□ Transmission (Source Address 3)

□ ABS (Source Address 11)

□ Adaptive Cruise Control (Source Address 42)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-75

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

VD — Vehicle Distance

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

100 ms

8 bytes

254

224

65,248 (0x00FEE0)

Bytes: 1-4 Trip Distance (SPN 244)

Resolution: 0.125 km / Bit, 0 km offset

Bytes: 5-8 Total Vehicle Distance (SPN 245)

Resolution: 0.125 km / Bit, 0 km offset

VDHR – High Resolution Vehicle Distance

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

1 sec

8 bytes

254

193

65,217 (0x00FEC1)

Bytes: 1-4 High Resolution Total Vehicle Distance (SPN 917)

Resolution: 5 m / Bit, 0 m offset (16.4 ft/Bit, 0 ft offset)

Bytes: 5-8 High Resolution Trip Distance (SPN 918)

Resolution: 5 m / Bit, 0 m offset (16.4 ft/Bit, 0 ft offset)

VEP – Vehicle Electrical Power

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

1 sec

8 bytes

254

247

65,271 (0x00FEF7)

Byte: 1

Byte: 2

Net Battery Current - N/A

Alternator Current - N/A

Bytes: 3,4 Alternator Potential (voltage) - N/A

Bytes: 5,6 Electrical Potential (voltage) (SPN 168)

Resolution: 0.05 V / Bit, 0 V offset

Bytes: 7,8 Battery Potential (Voltage), Switched (SPN 158)

Resolution: 0.05 V / Bit, 0 V offset

6-76

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

VH — Vehicle Hours

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

On Request

8 bytes

254

231

65,255 (0x00FEE7)

Bytes: 1-4 Total Vehicle Hours -N/A

Bytes: 5-8 Total Power Takeoff Hours (SPN 248)

Resolution: 0.05 h / Bit, 0 h offset

VI – Vehicle Identi

cation

Transmission Rate :

Data Length:

Data Page:

PDU format:

On Request

Variable

254

PDU speci fi c:

Default priority:

PGN:

Bytes:

1–XX

236

65, 260 (0x00FEEC)

Vehicle Identi fi cation Number (SPN 237)

Up to 200 characters ('X' delimited)

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

6-77

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

6-78

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

APPENDIX A: HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS

The MCM Engine Harness schematic for the Series 60 and MBE engines and the CPC Vehicle

Interface Harness schematics are available on the DDC extranet.

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

A-1

APPENDIX A: HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS

A-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

APPENDIX B: ACRONYMS

AAT Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

ABS

AECL Sensor

ACP Sensor

ACS

AFR Sensor

AIM

ALSG

AP Sensor

ATI

A/T

AWL

BPP

CKP

CMP

CPC

CPP Switch

DCC

DDC

DDEC

Anti-lock Braking System

Add Engine Coolant Level Sensor

Air Compressor Pressure Sensor

Application Code System

Air Filter Restriction Sensor

Auxiliary Interface Module

Automotive Limiting Speed Governor

Acelator Pedal

Accelerator Pedal Sensor

Aux Timed Input

Automatic Transmission

Amber Warning Lamp

Brake Pedal Position

Cruise Control

Crankshaft Position Sensor

Camshaft Position Sensor

Common Powertrain Controller

Clutch Pedal Position Switch

Diagnostic Connector, Cab

Detroit Diesel Corporation

Detroit Diesel Electronic Controls

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

B-1

EFC

EOL Sensor

EOP

EOP Sensor

EOT Sensor

ESS

ET Sensor

FEI

FMI

FRS

HEI

IAT Sensor

IMP Sensor

ISD

APPENDIX B: ACRONYMS

DDDL

DLC

DRS

DTC

ECL Sensor

ECT Sensor

EDM

EEPROM

B-2

Detroit Diesel Diagnostic Link

Data Link Connector

DDEC Reprogramming System

Diagnostic Trouble Code

Engine Coolant Level Sensor

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

Electronic Display Module

Electronically Erasable Programmable

Read Only Memory

Electronic Fire Commander

Engine Harness

Engine Oil Level Sensor

Engine Over Temperature Protection

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor

Engine Synchro Shift

Exhaust Temperature Sensor

Fuel Economy Incentive

Failure Mode Identi fi er

Fuel Restriction Sensor

Half Engine Idle

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor

Idle Shutdown

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

PID

PSG

PTO

PVM

PWM

RSL

SEO

MCM

MPG

MPH

MID

OECL Sensor

OEM

PGN

SID

SFT Sensor

TCI Sensor

TCO Sensor

TDC

VEPS

VIH

VIN

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Motor Control Module

Miles Per Gallon

Miles Per Hour

Message IDenti fi cation Character

Optical Engine Coolant Level Sensor

Original Equipment Manufacturer

Optimized Idle

Parameter Group Number

Parameter IDenti fi cation Character

Pressure Sensor Governor

Power Take-off

Pulse to Voltage Module

Pulse Width

Pulse Width Modulated

Red Stop Lamp

Stop Engine Override

Subsystem IDenti fi cation Character

Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor

Turbo Compressor In Temperature Sensor

Turbo Compressor Out Temperature Sensor

Top Dead Center

Vehicle Electronic Programming System

Vehicle Interface Harness

Vehicle Identi fi cation Number

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

B-3

APPENDIX B: ACRONYMS

VLS

VSS

Vehicle Limiting Speed

Vehicle Speed Sensor

B-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Diagnostic

Name

0 Speed

Gov TSC1

Condition

1 Speed

Gov TSC1

Condition

2 Speed

Gov TSC1

Condition

3 Speed

Gov TSC1

Condition

Parameter

Group

1 01 DI

Selection

1 021 DI

Selection

1 05 DO Fault

Detection

1 10 DI

Selection

Min Max Default

1 15 DI

Selection

2 08 DI

Selection

2nd Axle

Speed Switch

Con fi g

3 01 AI

Selection

3 05 AO

Selection

3 06 AO

Selection

3 07 DO Fault

Detection

Access

DRS, VEPS

Range

0 - Series 60; 16 - MBE

DRS, VEPS

0=disable, 1=enable Dual Speed Axle,

2=enable transmission retarder input,

3=FUSO Auxiliary brake cut switch

0=disable, 1=enable park brake interlock, 2=FUSO Park brake switch

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disable, 1=enable aux shutdown,

2=FUSO Accelerator switch

0=disable, 1=Shutdown override

/ Diagnostic Request (Fault Code

Flashing), 2=CC-Cancel, 3=Diagnostic

Request (Fault Code Flashing)

0=disable, 1=Remote-Throttle enable,

2=Service-Brace active

DRS, VEPS

0=hardwired, 1=Ccvs1, 2=Ccvs2,

3=Ccvs3

DRS, VEPS

0=no sensor, 1=air fi lter restriction sensor, 2=OI Thermostat input,

3=FUSO Clutch pedal sensor input

0=disabled, 1=oil pressure lamp, 2=5 bar oil pressure gauge, 3=10 bar oil pressure gauge, 4=fuel fi lter sensor

0=disabled, 1=coolant temperature lamp, 2=coolant temperature gauge,

3=OI Thermostat input

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-1

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

Min

3 07 DO

Selection

3 08 DO Fault

Detection

3 08 DO

Selection

3 09 DO Fault

Detection

3 09 DO

Selection

3 10 DO Fault

Detection

3 10 DO

Selection

3 12 DO Fault

Detection

3 12 DO

Selection

3 17 DO Fault

Detection

3 17 DO

Selection

3 18 DI

Selection

Max Default

Access Range

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=decompression valve,

2=grid heater, 3=TOP2 lockout solenoid, 4=modulation output for

Allison Transmission without J1939

Interface (Gear1), 5=PTO valve for

AGS2

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=exhaust brake only,

2=exhaust and decompression brake via single valve, 3=port extension turbo brake, 4=PTO stationary for AGS2,

5=PTO mobile for AGS2, 6=TOP2 shift solenoid, 7=Fuso starter lockout relay

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=grid heater hardwired,

2=AGS2 backup lamp, 3=engine brake active, 4=not used, 5=FUSO engine brake active lamp

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=air fi lter lamp, 2=AGS2 transmiss. temp indication lamp,

3=battery voltage low lamp, 4=coolant level low lamp, 5=Fuso retarder control

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=oil level lamp, 2=AGS2 check transmiss. indication lamp OI:

Optimized Idle, 3=oil pressure low lamp,

4=cruise / Pressure Governor System active lamp, 5=Fuso retarder control 2

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=enable starter lockout,

2=enable kick down output, 3=not used,

4=optimized idle alarm, 5=split valve 2,

6=starter lockout and AGS2 run signal / starter lockout, 7=engine brake disabled for over speed

0=disable, 1=enable ABS input,

2=enable transmission retarder input,

3=enable tempo set, 4=enable grid heater detection, 5=switchable torque demand, 6=drive on super structure,

7=throttle inhibit super structure, 8=split select, 9=FUSO Engine brake stage 2 cancel switch, 10=DPF inhibit switch

C-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Diagnostic

Name

4 06 DO Fault

Detection

Parameter

Group

4 06 DO

Selection

4 07 DO Fault

Detection

Min Max Default

4 07 DO

Selection

4 08 DI

Selection

4 09 DO Fault

Detection

4 09 DO

Selection

4 10 DO Fault

Detection

4 10 DO

Selection

4 12 PWM

Output

Selection

Access Range

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=grid heater lamp,

2=accelerator pedal idle position, 3=run signal / starter lockout

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=accelerator pedal kick down, 2=actual torque, 3=road speed, 4=engine speed, 5=coolant temperature, 6=pedal torque, 7=boost temperature, 8=oil pressure (PLD threshold), 9=coolant temperature (PLD threshold), 10=vehicle power shutdown

/ ignition relay, 11=optimized idle ACC bus (ignition relay), 12=split valve 1,

13=High Exhaust Temperature Lamp

0=disable, 1=clutch switch, 2=PTO request for AGS2

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=accelerator pedal idle position, 2=actual torque, 3=road speed, 4=engine speed, 5=coolant temperature, 6=pedal torque, 7=boost temperature, 8=oil pressure (PLD threshold), 9=coolant temperature (PLD threshold), 10=optimized idle active lamp, 11=deceleration lamp, 12=Fuso ground starter lockout relay

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=not used, 2=not used,

3=vehicle power shutdown / ignition relay

0=disabled, 1=throttle torque 10%..90%,

2=difference torque, 3=throttle torque

90%..10%, 4=actual torque, 5=load torque (no idle torque for automatic transmission), 6=road speed,

7=demand speed, 8=demand speed

CC+, 9=AGS2 transmiss. temp indication lamp, 10=FUSO Accelerator

PWM output

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-3

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

AC Fan

Vehicle

Speed

Enable

AC Fan

Vehicle

Speed

Thresh

Adaptive

Cruise

Control

Enable

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

Min

4 13 DI

Selection

4 17 DI

Selection

4 18 DI

Selection

Max Default

Access Range

DRS, VEPS

0=disable, 1=enable ABS input,

2=enable transmission retarder input,

3=enable tempo set, 4=enable grid heater detection, 5=switchable torque demand, 6=drive on super structure,

7=throttle inhibit super structure, 8=split select, 9=FUSO Engine brake stage 2 cancel switch, 10=DPF inhibit switch

0=disable, 1=2 Clutch Switch, 2=DPF regeneration switch, 3=FUSO Air suspension speed limit switch

0=disable, 1=enable engine door bus,

2=enable engine hood, 3=AGS2 PTO

Feedback, 4=RPM Freeze, 5=Engine

Brake Disable, 6=Fast Engine Heat Up

Switch

250 km/h

32.1875

km/h

DRS, VEPS

0=disable, 1=enable

—

0=disable, 1=enable

Adaptive

Cruise

Engine Brake

Mask

Adjusted Idle

Con fi guration

Air Condition

Enable Auto

Fan

Conditions

AL Min

Engine

Torque

AL Ramp up

Rate

DRS, VEPS

0=no engine brake activation,

16=exhaust fl ap only, 17=Jake

Brake 2nd stage, 64=decompression valve only or Jake Brake 1st stage,

80=decompression valve and exhaust fl ap, 81=decompression valve and turbo brake or Jake Brake 3rd stage

0=disabled, 1=enabled, 2=enabled if neutral, 3=enabled if neutral and park brake, 4=enabled if park brake

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=enable

DRS, VEPS

0=AL permanently active, 1=No AL during shift, 2=extended AL with torque curve#3 thresh., 3=combination 1+2,

4=No AL during shift torque freeze + release

— 100% 100% DRS, VEPS

8191.875

(1/min)/s

DRS, VEPS 0..65535=signal

C-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

CC Set Cst

Res Accel

Sw Con fi g

CC1 Source

Address SAE

J1939

CC2 Source

Address SAE

J1939

CC3 Source

Address SAE

J1939

Clutch Switch

Con fi g

CM1 DPF

Source Addr

SAE J1939

CM1 Fan

Source Addr1

SAE J1939

CM1 Fan

Source Addr2

SAE J1939

Con fi g

PTO Speed

Control

Diagnostic

Name

Ambient Air

Temp Sensor

Enable

Parameter

Group

Anti Tamper

Axle Ratio

Cab PTO

Switch Con fi g

CC ON OFF

Switch Con fi g

CC Pause

Switch Con fi g

Min Max Default

5.29

Access Range

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=not available, 1=hardwired,

2=reserved for J1939, 3=J1587,

4=ECAN

0=disabled, 1=enable anti-tampering function via ABS, 2=enable anti-tampering function via Gear

Ratio

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

DRS, VEPS

0=hardwired, 1=Ccvs1, 2=Ccvs2,

3=Ccvs3, 4=Ccvs1 or hardwired,

5=Ccvs2 or hardwired, 6=Ccvs3 or hardwired

DRS, VEPS CC ON OFF Switch Con fi g

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=Ccvs1, 2=Ccvs2,

3=Ccvs3, 4=Ccvs1 or Ccvs2, 5=Ccvs2 or Ccvs3, 6=Ccvs1 or Ccvs3, 7=Ccvs1 or Ccvs2 or Ccvs3

DRS, VEPS

0=hardwired, 1=Ccvs1, 2=Ccvs2,

3=Ccvs3

255

DRS, VEPS

—

DRS, VEPS

0=no clutch switch, 1=1 Clutch Switch,

2=2 Clutch Switch, 3=Ccvs1, 4=Ccvs2,

5=Ccvs3, 6=ETC1

DRS, VEPS

—

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

d, 2=enabled if neutral, 3=enabled if neutral and park brake, 4=enabled if park brake, 5=PTO while driving

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-5

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Cruise RSL

Eng Brk

Mode Select

Decrement

Cruise Set

Speed

DPF J1939

Inhibit Sw

Enable

DPF J1939

Regen Sw

Enable

DPF Lamp

Con fi g

DPF

Stationary

Regen Only

EBC1 Source

Address SAE

J1939

Enable

Cruise Auto

Resume

Diagnostic

Name

Cool Level

Eng Protect

Shtdn

Parameter

Group

Cool Level

Sensor Input

Enable

Coolant

Temp Eng

Protect Shtdn

Cruise

Control

Enable Eng

Brk

Cruise Power

Min

0 km/h

Max Default

10 km/h

1.61

km/h

Access Range

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=warning, 1=engine shutdown

DRS, VEPS

0=disable, 1=dual level probe sensor

(IMO), fi x threshold evaluation, 2=single level probe sensor (Rusty Nail), temperature dependent evaluation,

3=dual level fl oat sensor (FTL), fi x threshold evaluation, 4=single level probe sensor (Rusty Nail), fi x threshold evaluation

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=enable

0=disable, 1=enable automatic engine brake operation with cruise control

0=high power only, 1=low power only,

2=Cruise power enabled

0=vehicle overspeed based, 1=torque interface based

—

Enable Idle

PTO Shtdn

Override

255

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=not active, 1=active

0=hardwired, 1=J1939 PTC1

0=disabled, 1=enabled

—

0=disable, 1=enable automatic cruise resume function after clutch has been released once, 2=release clutch twice

0=disabled, 1=enabled, allows Stop

Engine Override / Diagnostic Request switch (pin 1/15) to override engine idle/PTO shutdown, 2=enable without clutch and service brake

C-6

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Engine Brake

Switch Con fi g

Engine Hour

Sync Fault

Enable

Fan AC Hold

Time

Fan Vehicle

Speed

Enable

Fan Vehicle

Speed

Threshold

Fast Idle Spd

Air Cond

Input

Eng Brake

Enable Auto

Fan

Eng Brk

Stage 1 Off

Delay Time

Eng Brk

Stage 2 Off

Delay Time

Eng Brk

Stage 3 Off

Delay Time

Eng Speed

Limit While

Veh Stop

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

Enable Idle

Shutdown

Enable Noise

Control

Enable PTO

Shutdown

Min Max Default

Access Range

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS, VEPS

0=disable, 1=enable idle shutdown with Park Brake status, 2=enable idle shutdown without Park Brake status,

3=enable idle shutdown with edge triggered accelerator pedal

0=VCU style, 1=DDEC style

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=enable PTO shutdown with Park Brake status, 2=enable PTO shutdown without Park Brake status,

3=enable PTO shutdown with edge triggered accelerator pedal

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=enable

Engine Brake

Con fi guration

1280000 240 ms DRS, VEPS

1/min

4000

1/min

255

3000

1/min

0..64000=signal

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

DRS, VEPS

0=no engine brake, 1=Decompression

Valve Only or Exhaust Flap Only,

2=decompression valve + exhaust fl ap,

3=jake compression brake or turbo brake

0=hardwired, 1=info from J1939

(muxed), 255=not available

0 s

600 s

250

500

1/min

3000

1/min

180 s

0 km/h DRS, VEPS

600

1/min

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disabled, 1=enabled

—

0=disable, 1=enable

0..32000=signal

—

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-7

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

FEI Use Trip

Mileage

Fleet

Management

Enable

FM Alert

Update

Enable

FM Daily

Usage

Enable

FM Fuel

Density

FM Incident

Update

Enable

FM Monthly

Trip Enable

FM Serv

Interval

Update

Enable

Fuel

Economy

Incentive

Enable

Gear Ratio for High Gear

Power

Gear Ratio

Gear Down

Protect

Diagnostic

Name

Fault Code

Flashing

Enable

FEI

Conversion

Factor

FEI Max

Vehicle

Speed

Reward

FEI Minimum

Fuel

Economy

Parameter

Group

Min

0 mph

/mpg

0 km/h

4 mpg

0 kg/l

Max

20 mph

/mpg

20 km/h

20 mpg

65.535

kg/l

Default

2 mph

/mpg

0 km/h

7 mpg

0.835

kg/l

0.02

0.01

Access

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

Range

0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

0=based on fi ltered fuel economy,

1=based on trip fuel economy

0=disabled, 1=enabled

—

0=disabled, 1=enabled

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=enabled

—

C-8

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Diagnostic

Name

Hi Amb Air

Override

Temp

Hi Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Hi Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

Hi Exhaust

Temp Lamp

Con fi g

Parameter

Group

Min Max

–40°C 75°C

0 km/h

48 km/h

Default

32°C

10 km/h

6 km/h

Access

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

Range

—

DRS, VEPS 0=hardwired, 1=J1939 PTC1

Hold Time

Fan

19 0 s 600 s 10 s

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

Idle

Shutdown

Auto

Override

Idle

Shutdown

Time

Increment

Cruise Set

Speed

J1587 Page2

SID Convert

Enable

1 s

0 km/h

5000 s

10 km/h

60 s

1.6 km/h

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS, VEPS

0=no automatic override performed,

1=automatic override performed

—

0=disabled, 1=enabled

J1939 Engine

Retarder

Con fi g

10 3 255 255 DRS, VEPS

0=variable controlled brake, 1=1 step,

2=low/high steps, 3=Jake or Constant

Throttle Brake, 4= Exhaust Flap,

255=not con fi gured

J1939 Fan

Request

Enable

19 0 1 0 DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enabled

J1939 Steps

Engine Brake

Limiter0 Max

Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter0 Max

Eng Trq

Enabled

Limiter0 Max

Road Spd

Enabled

1/min

0 Nm

255

4000

1/min

5000

152 km/h

255

4000

1/min

5000 Nm

152 km/h

DRS, VEPS

0=variable controlled brake, 1=1 step,

2=low/high steps, 3=low/medium/high steps, 255=not con fi gured

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-9

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

Limiter0 Max

Trq Curve

Select

Limiter0 Max

Vehicle Accel

Limiter0 Min

Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter1 Max

Eng Speed

Enabled

Limiter1 Max

Eng Trq

Enabled

Limiter1 Max

Road Spd

Enabled

Limiter1 Max

Vehicle Accel

Limiter1 Min

Eng Speed

Enabled

Lo Amb Air

Override

Temp

Low Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Low Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

Max Adjusted

Idle Speed

Max Cruise

Set Speed

Min Max Default Access Range

–15.625

m/ss

1/min

0 km/h

1/min

–40°C

0 km/h

1/min

48 km/h

15.625

m/ss

4000

1/min

4000

1/min

5000

152 km/h

–15.625

m/ss

15.625

m/ss

4000

1/min

75°C

48 km/h

4000

1/min

152 km/h

10 m/ss

500

1/min

4000

1/min

5000 Nm

152 km/h

10 m/ss

500

1/min

–4°C

5 km/h

2 km/h

850

1/min

152 km/h

DRS, VEPS

0=PLD torque curve (max. torque),

1=Power Rating Curve #1, 2=Power

Rating Curve #2, 3=Power Rating

Curve #3

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

0 Nm

5000

100 Nm DRS, VEPS —

Max Engine

Load PTO

Shutdown

Max Engine

Speed

Max PTO

Spd Resume

Accel Sw

1/min

500

1/min

4000

1/min

3000

1/min

3000

1/min

3000

1/min

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

C-10

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Min PTO Spd

Set Coast Sw

Min Road

Spd Eng Brk

Operation

Mode of AC

Status Input

No of Speeds via Remote

PTO

Noise Max

Engine

Speed

Noise Min

Engine

Speed

Number of

Output Shaft

Teeth

Diagnostic

Name

Max Road

Speed

Parameter

Group

Max Road

Speed in

PTO Mode

Med Eng Brk

Max Cruise

RSL Spd

Med Eng Brk

Min Cruise

RSL Spd

MID for

Ambient Air

Temp

Min Coolant

Temp

Min

102 km/h

0 km/h

–40°C 200°C

16 km/h

Max

152 km/h

128 km/h

48 km/h

255 km/h

152 km/h

Default

152 km/h

7 km/h

5 km/h

10°C

32 km/h

Access

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

10 km/h DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0 km/h DRS, VEPS

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

Min Cruise

Set Speed

Min Eng Spd for Engine

Brakes

Min Engine

Speed

1/min

500

1/min

0 km/h

4000

1/min

4000

1/min

3000

1/min

200 km/h

1100

1/min

592

1/min

500

1/min

0 km/h

DRS, VEPS

Range

—

DRS, VEPS —

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

DRS, VEPS

0=disabled, 1=AC active closed, 2=AC active open, 3=LIM active closed,

4=LIM active open

—

1/min

4000

1/min

4000

1/min

250

1450

1/min

1100

1/min

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-11

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Diagnostic

Name

OI Alternate

Battery Run

Time

Continuous

Batt Time

Enable

Parameter

Group

OI Extended

Mode Disable

OI Lower

Limit

Continuous

Run

OI Target

Engine RPM ae 0

OI Target

Engine RPM ae 1

OI Target

Engine RPM ae 2

OI Target

Engine RPM ae 3

OI Target

Engine RPM ae 4

Thermostat

Max Time

OI Upper

Limit

Continuous

Run

OI Variable

Volt Thresh

Enable

Oil Level Eng

Protect Shtdn

Oil Press Eng

Protect Shtdn

Optimized

Idle Enable

Min

0 s

Max Default

30600 s

–40°C 100°C

800

1/min

800

1/min

800

1/min

800

1/min

800

1/min

0 s

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

459000 s

–40°C 100°C

0 s

–4°C

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

1000

1/min

0 s

32°C

Access

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS, VEPS

Range

—

0=disabled, 1=enabled

0=enable, 1=disable

—

0=disabled, 1=enabled

0=warning, 1=engine shutdown

0=disable, 1=enable

C-12

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

PS Low Gear

1 RPM Limit

PS Low Gear

2 Max RPM

Limit

PS Low Gear

2 Max Vehicle

Spd

PS Low Gear

2 RPM Limit

PS Pass

Speed

Duration

PS Pass

Speed

Increment

PS Pass

Speed

Interval

PTO Dropout on Clutch

Enabled

Diagnostic

Name

Park Brake

Switch Con fi g

Parameter

Group

PasSmart

Enable

Progressive

Shift Enable

PS High Gear

On Vehicle

Spd

PS High Gear

RPM Limit

PS Low Gear

1 Max RPM

Limit

PS Low Gear

1 Max Vehicle

Spd

Min Max Default

0 km/h

1/min

0 km/h

1/min

0 km/h

1/min

0 min

0 km/h

1 h

250 km/h

4000

1/min

4000

1/min

250 km/h

4000

1/min

4000

1/min

250 km/h

4000

1/min

255 min

250 km/h

24 h

80.5

km/h

1650

1/min

1800

1/min

19.3

km/h

1400

1/min

1800

1/min

43.5

km/h

1800

1/min

0 min

0 km/h

8 h

Access Range

DRS, VEPS

0=hardwired, 1=Ccvs1, 2=Ccvs2,

3=Ccvs3

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=enable

0=No PTO drop out with clutch pedal,

1=Causes PTO to drop out if the Clutch is being depressed

—

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-13

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

PTO Dropout

Serv Brk Prk

Brk

PTO Enable

Auto Fan

Activation

PTO Ramp

Rate

PTO

Shutdown

Time

PTO Throttle

Override

Enable

Ramp Fan

Ramp Rate

Adjusted Idle

Spd

Remote

Accelerator

Enable

Remote

PTO Spd

Selection

Mode

Resume

Accel Max

PTO Torque

Resume

Accel Sw

PTO Set Spd

Road Spd

Limit Max

Stage Num

Second

Highest Gear

Ratio

Service

Brake Switch

Con fi g

Min Max Default Access Range

0 3 0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=No PTO drop out on service brake or park brake activation, 1=Causes PTO to drop out on Service Brake or Park

Brake activation, 2=Drop out on Service

Brake activation, 3=Drop out on Park

Brake activation

(1/min)

1 s

1 %/s

(1/min)

2500

(1/min)

5000 s

200

(1/min)/s

60 s

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

100

%/s

8191

.875

(1/min)

25 %/s

100

(1/min)/s

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=enable

—

0=disable, 1=Enable engine speed in

PTO mode to be increased with throttle input

—

0 Nm

1/min

5000

3000

1/min

5.75

5000 Nm

500

1/min

2.55

DRS, VEPS 0=disable, 1=enable

DRS, VEPS

0=1 pulsed input(VCU style), 1=2 gray coded inputs, 2=2 binary coded inputs

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

DRS, VEPS 0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

DRS, VEPS

0=hardwired, 1=Ccvs1, 2=Ccvs2,

3=Ccvs3

C-14

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

Service Brk

Enable Eng

Brakes

Set Coast

Max PTO

Torque

Set Coast

Switch PTO

Set Speed

Single Step

Adjusted Idle

Spd

Spd 1 Max

Eng Trq

Remote PTO

Spd 1 via

Remote PTO

Spd 2 Max

Eng Trq

Remote PTO

Spd 2 via

Remote PTO

Spd 3 Max

Eng Trq

Remote PTO

Spd 3 via

Remote PTO

Stage 1 Eng

Brk Off Delta

Spd

Stage 1

Factor

Engine Brake

Min

0 Nm

1/min

0 Nm

500

1/min

0 Nm

500

1/min

0 Nm

500

1/min

Max

5000

5000 Nm

3000

1/min

100

1/min

16 1/min

5000

5000 Nm

3000

1/min

5000

5000 Nm

3000

1/min

5000

5000 Nm

3000

1/min

8000

1/min

100%

Default

500

1/min

950

1/min

1250

1/min

1850

1/min

100

1/min

100%

Access

DRS, VEPS

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

Stage 1 Mask

Engine Brake

10 0 81 64

Range

0=disable, 1=enable automatic engine brake when applied service brake,

2=operator selection and service brake for engine brake activation

—

DRS, VEPS

0=no engine brake activation,

16=exhaust fl ap only, 17=Jake

Brake 2nd stage, 64=decompression valve only or Jake Brake 1st stage,

80=decompression valve and exhaust fl ap, 81=decompression valve and turbo brake or Jake Brake 3rd stage

Stage 2 Eng

Brk Off Delta

Spd

1/min

800

1/min

100

1/min

DRS, VEPS —

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-15

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

Diagnostic

Name

Stage 2

Factor

Engine Brake

Parameter

Group

Min

Max

100%

Default

100%

Stage 2 Mask

Engine Brake

Stage 3 Eng

Brk Off Delta

Spd

Stage 3

Factor

Engine Brake

81 80 DRS, VEPS

0=no engine brake activation,

16=exhaust fl ap only, 17=Jake

Brake 2nd stage, 64=decompression valve only or Jake Brake 1st stage,

80=decompression valve and exhaust fl ap, 81=decompression valve and turbo brake or Jake Brake 3rd stage

800

1/min

50 1/min DRS, VEPS —

100% 100%

Access

DRS, VEPS

Range

—

Stage 3 Mask

Engine Brake

Throttle

Override Max

Eng Spd

Tire Revs per

Unit Distance

Top Gear

Ratio

Top2 Cruise

Control Sw

Enable

Torque

Factor Gear

Dwn Protect

Torque

Factor High

Gear Power

Trans Factor

Engine Brake

Trans Mask

Engine Brake

3000

1/min

160

1/km

1599

1/km

0.099

609375

2.5498

046875

100%

3000

1/min

312

1/km

100%

DRS, VEPS

0=no engine brake activation,

16=exhaust fl ap only, 17=Jake

Brake 2nd stage, 64=decompression valve only or Jake Brake 1st stage,

80=decompression valve and exhaust fl ap, 81=decompression valve and turbo brake or Jake Brake 3rd stage

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=disable, 1=using cruise control master switch

—

DRS, VEPS

—

DRS, VEPS —

DRS, VEPS

0=no engine brake activation,

16=exhaust fl ap only, 17=Jake

Brake 2nd stage, 64=decompression valve only or Jake Brake 1st stage,

80=decompression valve and exhaust fl ap, 81=decompression valve and turbo brake or Jake Brake 3rd stage

C-16

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

Diagnostic

Name

Parameter

Group

Min Max Default Access

Trans Neutral

Input Con fi g

13 0 255 0

Range

DRS, VEPS

0=hardwired, 1=info from J1939

(muxed), 255=not available

Trans

Retarder Fan

Percent

Trans Torque

Limit Enable

Transmission

Type

Transmit

EBC1 for

AGS2

TSC1 Source

Address SAE

J1939

0% 100%

255

231

DRS, VEPS —

DRS, VEPS 0=disabled, 1=enable

DRS, VEPS

0 – Manual, without neutral switch, 1 –

Not Used in NAFTA, 2 – Allison, Eaton

UltraShift, AutoShift, ZF ASTronic: direct start, 3 – Manual, with neutral switch, 4 – Not Used in NAFTA, 5

– Eaton AutoShift, UltraShift, ZF

ASTronic, AGS2: MCM Start, 6 –

Allison, Eaton UltraShift ASW: MCM

Start, 7 – Eaton Top2

0=no EBC1, standard PTO message,

1=transmit EBC1 and standard PTO message, 2=no EBC1, AGS2 speci fi c

PTO message, 3=transmit EBC1 and

AGS2 speci fi c PTO message

DRS, VEPS —

Two Spd Axle

Second Axle

Ratio

8 1 20 5.29

Vehicle

Speed

Sensor

8 0 8 4

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

—

DRS,

VEPS,

DDDL 7.0

0=no sensor, 1=C3 sensor, 2=square wave (hall sensor), 3=J1939 ETC1,

4=magnetic pickup vehicle speed sensor, 5=J1939 TCO, 6=J1939 CCVS

Source1, 7=J1939 CCVS Source2,

8=J1939 CCVS Source3

Table C-1 DDEC VI Parameters

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

C-17

APPENDIX C: PARAMETER LIST

C-18

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

INDEX

A

Acceleration Limiter, 5-3

Active Codes, 5-15

Aftertreatment Device (ATD), parked regeneration,

5-113

AGS2 Backup Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-120

AGS2 Check Trans Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-121

AGS2 Trans Temp Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-122

Amber Warning Lamp (AWL), 3-107

engine protection, 5-45

idle shutdown, 5-89

requirements and guidelines, 3-107

use in diagnostics, 5-15

wiring, 3-108

Analog Outputs, 4-49

Automotive Limiting Speed Governor (ALSG), 5-133, accelerator pedal, 5-133

C

Cold Start, MBE900 & MBE4000, 5-5

Common Powertrain Controller (CPC), 3-27

environmental conditions, 3-29

vehicle interface harness, 3-30

Communication Link, J1939, 6-28, 3-63

Conduit and Loom, 3-87

Connectors, deutsch connector, 3-72

Criteria, wires, 3-73

Cruise Active Lamp, requirements and guidelines, 3-114

Cruise Control, 5-9

clutch released, 5-11

engine brake, 5-22, 5-38

resume/accel, 5-11 service brake released, 5-11

set/coast, 5-10

throttle inhibit switch, 5-14 vss fault, 5-14

Data Link

D

SAE J1587, 6-4

SAE J1708/J1587, messages, 6-5

SAE J1939/J1587 connector, 3-72

DDEC Data, 5-77

DDEC Reports, 5-79

Deceleration Lamp, requirements and guidelines, 3-115

Deutsch Connectors, 3-74

Deutsch Terminals installation, 3-74

removal, 3-76

Diagnostics, 5-8, 5-15 amber warning lamp, 5-15 dashboard panel lamps, 5-15

fl ashing fault codes, 5-17

red stop lamp, 5-15

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Connector, 3-23, 3-25

Digital Outputs, 4-29

optimized idle active light, 4-42

Top2 shift lockout solenoid, 4-46

Top2 shift solenoid, 4-45

DPF Regeneration Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-110

Dual Speed Axle, 5-19

E

Engine Brake, MBE900 & MBE4000, 5-21

clutch released input, 5-22 cruise control, 5-22 disable, 5-22 engine fan braking, 5-22

minimum mph, 5-23

service brake control of, 5-22

switches, 5-21

Engine Brake, Series 60, 5-37

active, 5-38 clutch released input, 5-38 cruise control, 5-38 disable, 5-38 engine fan braking, 5-38 minimum mph, 5-38

service brake control of, 5-37

Engine Coolant Level Sensor, 3-97

Engine Harness (EH)

120–pin connector, MBE 4000, 3-12

120–pin connector, MBE 900, 3-8

INDEX

120–pin connector, series 60, 3-4

Engine Protection, 5-45

prewarning, 5-46 stop engine override, momentary override, 5-46 warning, 5-46

Engine Starter Control, 5-49

Ether Starting, Series 60, 5-51

F

Fan Control, 5-53

dual fans type 6, 5-60

single-speed fan type 4, 5-54

single-speed fan type 7, 5-57

two-speed fan, 5-64

variable speed fan type 2, with fan speed feedback,

5-72

variable-speed fan type 3, without fan speed feedback,

5-68

Flashing Fault Codes, 5-17

Fleet Management, 5-77

DDEC data, 5-77

DDEC reports, 5-79

FMI, CPC identi fi er, 6-4

Fuel Economy Incentive, 5-85

Fuses, 3-68

G

Governors, 5-133 automotive limiting speed governor, 5-133

PTO, 5-134

J

J1939, switch inputs, 4-27

L

Lamps ags2 backup lamp, 3-120

ags2 check trans lamp, 3-121

ags2 trans temp lamp, 3-122

amber warning lamp, 3-107

cruise active lamp, 3-114

dashboard panel lamps, 5-15

deceleration lamp, 3-115

dpf regeneration lamp, 3-110

high exhaust system temperature lamp, 3-111

low battery voltage lamp, 3-116

low coolant level lamp, 3-117

low oil pressure lamp, 3-113

malfunction indicator lamp, 3-112

optimized idle active lamp, 3-118

red stop lamp, 3-108

wait to start lamp, 3-119

Limiters, 5-97

Low Battery Voltage Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-116

Low Coolant Level Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-117

Low Gear Torque Reduction, 5-101

Low Oil Pressure Lamp, requirements and guidelines,

3-113

High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp, requirements and guidelines, 3-111

I

H

Idle Adjust, 5-87

Idle Shutdown Timer, 5-89–5-90

idle shutdown override, 5-90

vehicle power shutdown, 5-93

Inactive Codes, 5-15

Inputs, 4-3

M

Main Power Supply Shutdown, 3-67

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), requirements and guidelines, 3-112

MCM, diagnostics, 5-15

Message Identi fi cation Character (MID), description of,

6-4

MIDs, CPC identi fi er, 6-4

Motor Control Module (MCM), 3-3

120–pin connector, MBE 4000, 3-12–3-15

120–pin connector, MBE 900, 3-8–3-11

120–pin connector, series 60, 3-4

120–pin connector, Series 60, 3-4–3-7

21–pin connector, 3-17

31–pin pigtail connector, 3-19

Index-2

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

DDEC VI ELECTRONIC CONTROLS APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

O

OEM diagnostic connector, 3-72

installed sensors, 3-94

supplied lights, 3-107

Optimized Idle digital outputs, 4-42

engine mode, 5-106

thermostat mode, 5-108

Optimized Idle Active Lamp, requirements and guidelines, 3-118

SAE J1939, message format, 6-28

SAE J1939/71, application layer parameter group

de fi

nitions, 6-29

Sensors, 3-91–3-92, 3-94

engine coolant level sensor, 3-97

factory-installed sensors, 3-92, function and location,

3-92

OEM-installed sensors, 3-94, function and guidelines,

3-94

vehicle speed sensor, 3-102

SIDs, CPC identi fi er, 6-4

Starter Lockout, 5-129

Stop Engine Override Options, 5-46

Switch Inputs, 4-27

P

Parked Regeneration, 5-113

PasSmart, 5-117

Passwords, 5-121

PIDs

CPC identi fi er, 6-4

double byte parameters, 6-14

single byte parameters, 6-6

variable length parameters, 6-17

Power Supply, 12 volt system, 3-65

Power Take-off (PTO), 5-134

Progressive Shift, 5-123

high range, 5-125

low range #1, 5-124 low range #2, 5-124

PTO Shutdown, 5-89

PWM Output, 4-51

T

Tachometer Drive, 5-131

Tape and Taping, 3-89

Terminal Installation, Deutsch connectors, 3-74

Terminal Removal, Deutsch terminals, 3-76

Throttle Control, 5-133

Top2, 5-153, digital outputs, 4-45–4-46

Transmission Interface, 5-149

Allison, 5-159

Eaton autoshift, 5-157

Eaton Top2, 5-153

Eaton ultrashift, 5-155

Eaton ultrashift asw, 5-156

manual transmissions, 5-149

Mercedes AGS2 transmissions, 5-149

ZF astronic, 5-158

R

Red Stop Lamp (RSL) engine protection, 5-45

requirements and guidelines, 3-109

shutdown, 5-46

use in diagnostics, 5-15

S

SAE J1587 message format, 6-4

PIDs double byte parameters, 6-14

single byte parameters, 6-6

variable length parameters, 6-17

V

Vehicle Interface Harness (VIH), 3-30

design criteria, 3-31

power wiring, 3-61

wiring

coach applications, 3-42–3-45

crane applications, 3-50–3-53

re truck applications, 3-46–3-49

transit bus applications, 3-54–3-57

truck applications, 3-34–3-37

vocational applications, 3-38–3-41

Vehicle Speed Limiting, 5-161

Vehicle Speed Sensor, 3-102

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)

Index-3

INDEX

Vehicle Speed Sensor Anti-tampering, 5-163

VSS Anti-tampering, 5-163

W

Wait to Start Lamp, 5-7, requirements and guidelines,

3-119

Wires criteria, 3-73 recommendations, 3-73 requirements, 3-73

Wiring

communication wiring, 3-63, proprietary

Engine-CAN link, 3-65

power wiring, 3-61

tachometer, 5-131

Top2 transmission, 5-153

Index-4

All information subject to change without notice.

(Rev. 01/07)